05-Solidworks Advanced Part Modeling 2018

p75 SHSTEMES
DDSSFDULT
FIDVHNCED PFIRT MODELING

SOLIDWORKS TRRINING
ENG
SOLIDWORKS®
Advanced Part Modeling
Dassault Systémes SolidWorks Corporauon

175 Wyman Street
Wahham, Massachuseks 02451 USA
m 199572|ll7 bum... s,,........ Sullqurk» Cumin-nun", a Copyright Nolitn {or wunwoxxs Slandnnl, Ymmiuln.
DxxmuflSyw. b. 5...... ....y, l75 w ...... 5....- w........., PmiesximlaL 5...l Education Pmllucls
M... u245l MM. AHKIg ...... .y. Pumum um... ...nw... .3 1986.20” . ...“... PM...
r... rum...“ ....l .l.. (.....m. 4......“ ... u..y.l............ ... L... .l. Mxmgcmcm Suflwam l... All ngmx Vucrval
.....j... ... .....g. (0...... "...... ....l .... ..... “...... [numb by Tim wurk .... .... I‘ulluw g wflwan: ..."...l by
Dusaulk gym... s....lw...l.« (lurpummm ms s......w.....l
Indubkry Smflwan. ......l...
N. ......ml b. ......lu... ... ......y....u..l .. ....y ...... .. by
....y ......y, ..."...ll ... ......mlly, l... Anflurpuw w..l...... Lamb...» 2.: DCM «a 2m 5......“ lndmlry 5......“
.... ......» wnucn ...... ..... urns s....lw . l.........l All Rights Rcwrvml
UrCubch 3.: u M «32.1.7 5......“ l.........y Suflwxw
r... mflwxw ...... y..l .... ( 40...“... .. r muhcd .....l...
l.........l AU R l... R my...
......llb... ....
..
l........ ...... .... b. .... ...... -.l ....ly ... ..
“...... w... .l..
gwcnh us s..l..lw...l.y.(
All warmnhc Dr('l.bcdm> mm o 2lll7 3...»... l......«..y 50...... ......m.
.I “full 1... ...; ......y.
... .... an:
wtlwwnmls‘ducumcn‘llnlmn
b tuna“, ... .... .. ...... ..., ...... . b , u mm"...
lugl... “marvel
All
“FR-......» ...... b. mi»...
.. .l....'.'... a
Igodlficalnm
.. m7..b..lm>r Ma: 20.7 s ~.......yl...l.....y 5......“ leucd
Amvndmlm|ufany|cn\1x,........l...g warmmms, .. .... ......y. All lllglm Mm...
ngnx‘mcm n 5....ch AbMa: 20I7 5 ......y l......y..y Sully-y... L........l
Pm... anim All my.» Mm...
souuwmzxsm 3.: .... ...“... cm ....u... Sm-mlmiun Form-m um... yunw... m \WXVZUH HCL l. ......g... L...
wflwxw .,y ......w... hy L s rm...
5,... L725, 6,XM,K77, P..r......w.*u... mum... \ncur'mmw rnyyxw by NVIDIA 2......
b,x~lx,5m, b.9ub,7lz, 7079,99“, 7,477,202, 7552.705,
7,57l,o79, 7,5..u,497, 7,b45,u27, 71.72.22, 7,.xx,1lx, 20m
7,0”,238.7,151,940,x,305,37fi.K,§XI,9(Y2,X,XI7.02PL pun.......r.l..,( ...nw... u Zuulrlofi Luxulugy, LL(' AH ......
x,9lll,o7.l, 9.2.0.7, 9,l55,u72, 9,2fi2,863, 9.4.5.394, .....y... ......» pcrulmg
9,m,4l2 ...... ......gn ......m, l. 1;, LP l,l lb,l9u BI ...... IF Pom...“ ..m... ...nw... .3 2007.20” u....-w...l.. L...
3,5!7,641)
mm. gm Myflwan: .. prulmmxi by l. s r...... 7,lx4,o44, .2 :0l l, M........r. .:............... All ...... .. ...xl
U s 9...... 7,502,u27, ...... rm...“ 9...... 2mm. mam... Adohcm PDF lemy ...l.....l..gy
u s ...... ......gn pm... ......ling ('uuynghilfixérzmh Ad..b.5ys......l... andlhhcmwm All
Tnflenurln 5...: ma... m...” l... sounwmlks righ‘» rcMTvcd mm...
by u s v.0... 5,029,866,;941M51,
man... ...... 5mm. 5,201,154, fi,563,§fl2. 0,519,591, .7541... 9...... Pandmg
so...)wmu<s,1 r... -...(:....m.,;u 9.5...me Adm, .... Mob. ...... Am... .... Adubc l-l). logo, Dlalhllcr
. ....l Rcmlnrr .... rcgmcnxl ......mm ... [Mm-lurks ..rAdub.
cme ....lm.
3. Drawmplugum 'gu .... “mm...
.......2
.....Mmgcm ......ly uwncd WW... \xmlcmark ... Syn...» l... ... .l.. l. s mulumu ......l...y
us s.....lw...¢.. l'urmun: Db '..l..lw...l..y mpyngh‘lnfunmuon, ... la... 5
v... ..w...» ....me ,PhalquwXMLAndTuIAmlnyw
......n... l... .....y
Abum suuuwom
Copyrigm Name. {or sounwonx. .....l..ib.. rm“...
|cnx1|mdcmnrkufH(‘L l'whmlugncb
Pom...» um... mum... 200x Suhrrxufl .:.......m......
SULIDWORK mm ......
0..., SOLIDWORKS Plcmium.
m 55 n 1992720” (:....,..............l Applmalluns ...... by“...
.....gm....., l... All nghn .....y...
ml, SOLIDWURKS mM (Inpyrighl Name. {or sounwmucs PDM Fmrmianal
......lm. SDLIDWURKS Slmulxfllun Smudbrd,
ouuwmlks
L.
5...... .... Pml‘c l, SOLIDWURKS
......mm, SOLIDWURKb How s.....lb......,
ma...
.....
v.. .r, Mm... lb...»
.....l, sounwom 0......l. lbw my... ......lugy, .2 I‘NZVZUIZ (ml.
.buLlnwmsz rm... SULIDWORKS .: 20l l. M........n own..." All nghb mwrwxl
-
s......l...l, SOLIDWURKS um“...
......l. SULIDWORKS ul....-....l m, Cnpydghl mm... l... .nnwibg. Pmduub
>ULIDWORK bl....-. .l
sUmeuRK
mama...
“w"...
<'.....,...y.., sounwm: Pumum um... ...nw... .2 20002..” 1.... s... 1.)
......u...
SULIDWORKS MED, SULIDWORK powcmd by'
Alkum, SOLIDWURKS l-(ta Comm... puwcmd by A...“ '
rcs Puma)“ um... ...rlw... m \WSVI‘NX 1......” (.....y ......
sounwom M... A...
......
sbl..lw...l.y
Vlauhlahun ......l... ......y ... ... Pumum unhxs mum... e3 lWHrZUDI 59......X..."
on... m... .. ml... ...“... .... ......mm .. .. “...... Purim» unhu mm... a. \WXVZUM 0,... Alllanw lug.
trademark» ..r. ... ......uy. bub...»
.., .y...
All ..g...»
(‘()MMER('IAL( MPUTLRSUI‘ WARLrPRUPR TARY
Pumum unhxs ...nw... an “”5720” 5...... (Zur'mmllun
l......- “9““ ...... ...-ll ....l :1 4x
R ......» .. u "mmmuux .........."l.... n..- cme "gm l... w....uwym wflwarc .« b”... .. ......m .l..
1..
»uflwxw" .... wflwargdocumcnmhun" .y wurk ..rll. ......T.....l.... .m: (......p
...... ... ..y... ... 4x a l‘
(burr “195)....“ .....y..l..l
R l2 ZIZ
Pumum .. cmemgW ......me aapyngm z: l99bl999
....... u s (kwcmman ... r... m: .. .... by ...... b.l...lr..l
clvlhanagcnu -..... ....yy..l.. ...... y...l.nl.i..Ax<'l:R 5...... (...... ...y Syxlumx, l...
l2 2lz, ....b. r... mum... by ...... b.l.a.rul......( ...... Purlium ....nmw...gym r... .mw ....yngb. .2 2005 , 2llu5
u.
4.13......m...ll).l... .... ".....wm. .... l.. y.. .....l...
R 227 72024 mm l995l.....l 227 In“ UUN l9957 Applc .....p.... l...
l.. .... ...... ...... y... rmwc .. “...... r..... ...y b ....y ...... Copyright Names r... souuwokxs ran rm...“
U s (..ybmm... ... my... Suflwan: ...... .. .n.(i.yun.. ll. -
90......“ ..r..... mum... «a 20.7 Aluum Limlkxl
... ...... ab... .... w... ......ry us Sullqu y ...... ...... ..
.... ...“... ....l s ammo... w||l hm fly. (5. bum... days
Mb"... u... my...“ 5 ...... b. 4w...»......
..., ... ... l. .l... ...... .... - , ...... (:............./
(,m’mmhun, l75 D............ Nun-lbw PM l'lKDlrbNKi
Wyn-mu 5...... wblmbm, asuchmclb 0245} “5A
Contents
Introduction
About This Course .
Prerequisites . .
Course Design Philosophy . . .
Using this Book

.............
Laboramry Exeruses u.
A Nme About Dimensions .
Conventions Used in xhis Book .

Abom the Training File asasuuuuknAAwwwNNNNN
Training Templates. . .
Windo .e
Use of 01m . e . .
Graphics and Graphics Cards .

Color Schemes
............
More SOLIDWORKS Training Resource
Lesson 1
Local User Groups
..............
Multibody Design Techniques
Mumbody Pans
........................................... 8
Hide/Show Tree Items
Multibody Des|gn Techniques
.....
Creating a Mumhndy .
Merge Resuh ......
Case smdy: Mulubody De, gn
Contour Selection ......
Contents soLIDwoRKs
Solid Bodies Folder

Local Operations
......................................ttl5I3
Feature Scope . . . ”l5
Patterning Bodies ..... .tl7
Tool Body Technique . . “18
Using Insert Part. .. ttlx
External References ttlg
Entities t0 Transfer. ttlg
Locate Pan and Move/Copy Bodies .tZl
Combining Bodies ................
Case Study: Protective Screen . . .
“25
”27
lntelsect with Snlid Bodies
...... H31
Case Srudy: Bowl
.............
Calculating Internal Volume. .
“31
“33
lndent Feature
..... “34
Case Study: Indent . . “34
Deleting Solid Bodie . . . “36
Delete/Keep Body Feature . . . H36
Exereise 1: Bridging a Multibody Part. H38
Exercise 2: Local Operations
Exercise
......
ositioning Inserted Pans .
H40
H43
Exercise 4: Patterning Bodies H46
Exercise Modeling Negative Space . “50
Exercise ‘ombining a Multibody Pan “53
Lesson 2
Exercise Indent
:
.................. t55
Saving Solid Bodies

Mllltibody Part vs. Assembly
Saying Bodies Functions .
...............................ttfil60
Default Templates. . H62
Case Study: Clamp . t . . “62
Insert into New Pan “63
Save Bodie H67
Case Smdy: Boat Cleat H67
Modeling for Rapid Tooling H70
Splitting a Part into Multiple Bodies H71
................
Split Feature t.7l
Case Smdy: Handle. . . . H72
Saying Split Bodie. . H73
Automating an Assembly ....................
Case Study: Using Split Pan with Legacy Data
H74
H75
Exercise risen into New Pan. . H78
Exercise plit Pan and Save Bodie “80
Exereise 10: Modeling for Rapid Tooling t8}
SOLIDwoRKs Cements
Lesson 3
Sketching with Splines
Curves in Sketches
.................................... loo98
Using Sketch Pictures. .. . .
Case Study: (iuitar Body . . ml
Splines........
Standard Spline.
.
.
I03
I04
Keep it Simple . . . I04
Creating and Manipulating Spline . I04
Anatomy ofa Spline .......... . I07
Spline Tools
......
Adding Spline Relations
.
.
I07
l07
Spline Handle Basics . . i . l07
Spline l-Iandle Relations . . . on
Changing the Shape nfa Spline . . . I09
The Control Polygon
........
Manipulating the Spline l-landles
.
.
I09
I09
Fully Defining Splines . . lll
Evaluating Splines .. . . . lll
Spline Evaluation Tools . i
l [2
W'haiIs Curvaiure]. . l 12
Evaluating Curve Quality using Curvature Combs . . I13
Spline Parameters
..........
Other Spline Modification Tools
.
. l
I15
16
Case Snidy: Two Point Spline . le
Equal Curvature
.......
Curvature
. . le
Evaluating Continuity with Combs .
I [9
Analyzing Solid tleometry
Display Curvature. .
................... .
.
I21
I21
Zebra Stripes. . . I22
Surface Curvature Combs . l23
Style Spline
............
Case Snidy: Watering Can Handle
.
.
I24
I24
Style Spline Types . . I25
Style Spline Tools. . . I27
FitSpline. .. . I30
Case Snidy Coffee Cup . I30
Pit Spline Parameters . . I32
Pit Spline Tnleranee .. . I32
Splines Summary . . I34
Exercise ll: Fleurrderlis . l35
Exercise 12: Soda Bottle . I42
Exercise 13: Spline Practice . . . I46
Exercise 14: Coffee Cup Handle . . I48
Exercise [5: Fun with Splines
............................. lSZ
Contents soLtioRKs
Lesson 4
Introduction to Sweeping
Sweeping
............................................. I56
Sweep Requirements
.........
Case Study: Faux Raised Panel Door
I57
t
I58
.
Sweep with Guide Curves t I60
Case Study: Bottle Body t I60
Fierce Relation t . . t I62
Showing Intermediate Sections . t I65
Multirthickness Shell
The SelectionManager.
....... t
t
I66
I67
Case Study: Hanger Bracket t I68
Exercise 16: ()val Foot Drawer Pull. . I71
Symmetrical Splines
Exercise 17: Tire Imn. t
. .
.......... .
.
I73
I76
Circular Profile Sweep t I77
Dmne Feature . . t I78
Exercise ix: Sizrship Fuselage. . . t ixo
Exercise 19: Build Your Own Bottle t I85
Lesson 5
30 Sketching and Curve Features
Curve Features . t . I88
Case Study: Spring. . . I89
Sweeping Along a 3D Path t I89
3D Sketching
.........
Using Reference Plane,
.
.
I89
I89
Additional Techniques t I89
Space Handle .....
Subset of Sketch Enti ies and Relations
t
.
I90
I90
Helix Curve
....................... . I95
..............
Helix and Spiral Feature
Creating a 3D Curve from Orthogonal views .
t
.
I95
I98
Projected Curve Feature . . t I99
Combining Curves rt. . tzvv
Composite Curve Feature . 200
Smoothing Transitions. t 202
Exercise 20: 3D Sketching
Exercise 21- 3D Sketching with Planes . . 207
Activating a Flane ..............
Creating a Plane within a 3D ketch
_
.
.213
21 1
Exercise 22: Dceil Flashlight Spring . 216

Exercise 23: Water Bottle Cage . . t 217
sounwoRKs Contents
Lesson 6
Threads and Library Feature Parts
Bonle Features
......................................... 222
Library Feature Pans
.......
Case Study: Modeling Threads. . .
.
.
222
222
Thread Feature . . 222
Thread Profile ., . . 223
Saving a Library Feature Fart. . 224
Performance Considerations. . . 226
Performance Senings in System Options. . . 226
Performance Settings in Document Fmpenies. . 227
Suppressing Features
.................... . 227
Using the Freeze Bar
..........
Case Study: Adding the Label ()ulline.
.
.
228
230
Designing a Lilarary Feature Fan . 230
Library Feature File Locations . . . 231
Anatomy ofa Library Feature Pan. . 232
File Explorer
..........
Dissolve Library Feature .
.
.
233
235
Creating the Sweep Path . 236
Splimng a Face. . . . . .236
Sweeping Along Model Edges. . . . 23x
Propagate Along Tangeni Edge . 23x
Exercise 24: Woml Gear. . . 241
Exercise 25: Adding the Bottle Lip . . 246
Exercise 26: Smrship Continued. . . . . 252
Contents SOLIDWORKS
Lesson 7
Advanced Sweeping
Sweep Options
......................................... 265
Additional Sweep Settings
264
A
Profile Orientation
......
Intermediate Sections A
.
A
266
266
Follow Path
.......
Keep Normal Constant
A
.
267
267
Case Study: Keep Normal Constant. . 269
lntersection Curve Feature
visualizing Sweep Section.
........ A
A
269
270
Face Curves
.........
Controlling Twist . . . A
A
A
270
272
Case Study: Controlling Twist . . . 273
Case Study: Controlling Twist with Guide Curves . 277
Case Study: Align with End Faces. . . A .285
Sweeping Along NmHangem Edges . 286
Solid Profile
......
Case Study: Drill Bit . .
.
A
2x8
288
Exercise 27- Twi tAlong Path. . . A 291
Defining Twist ......
Exercise 2x: Controlling Twist with Guide Curves
A
.
291
293
Equation Driven Curve
What do the Equations Mean‘A
...... .
A
293
294
Exercise 29: Makeup Case . 297
Exercise 30: Mouse A . . . .300
Lesson 8
Exercise 31: Blower Housing
.............................. 304
Introduction to Loft and Boundary Features
Comparing Complex Features
How Lofiing and Boundary Work
............................. 316
.312;
Case Study Defroster Vent A 319
Lofi Feature. .3 19
Preparation ot the Protiles A 320
Merge Tangent Faces . . . A 322
Start and End Constraints A A 323
Boundary Feature......... . , 325
Boundary with Surfaces
............
SelectionManager in Lott and Boundary .
.
.
328
329
vi
sounwoRKs Contents
Case Snidy: Lofied Merge . t t

Case Study: Reusmg Sketches
Copying a Sketch
Modify Sketch. . .
..........
Derived Sketches
Boundary Preview Options
Sketch Block and Library Feature Profiles
Exercise 32: Lofied Vase
............
Exercise 33: Creating a Trans ion .
Exercise 34: Light Cover
......
Exercise 35: Sketch Blocks as Profile.
Curve Through XYZ
Lesson 9
Sketch Blacks
.....
Advanced Loft and Boundary Features
Additional Curves in Lofi and Boundary .
Centerline Lofiing
...................
Case Study: Heat Shield
Sharing Sketches. .
Lnfi Preview Option,
Adding Sketch Segments .
Segment . .
Split Entit s t
cleaning Up a Model .
Deleting Faces .......
Delete Face Feature
Evaluating Edges a.
Deviation Analy.
Face Fillets
.....
Case Snidy: Hook
Planning a Modeling Strategy
Curve Influence. t
Exercise 36: Hook Luntinuedt
........
Exercise 37: Funnel
(Sonics
.............
Exercise 38: Rocker Arm .
vii
Contents soLtioRKs
Lesson 10
Advanced Filleting and Other Features
Fillet Settings
Fillet Parameters .
......................................... 402
.403
Fillet Method. 1 403
Fillet Profile 1 . 404
Constant Size Fillets . 405
Multiple Radius . 1 405
Setback Parameters. 1 406
Delete Face: Delete and Fill 1 1 408
Fillet Options
........
Select Through Faces .
1
1
409
409
Keep Features 1 409
Round Corners .
1 1 41 1
Overflow Options . . 1 412

Variable Size Fillets . . . . . 4I3
Variable Size Control Points. . . 414
Variable Size Fillet Profile 1 415
Straight and Smooth Transitions. 1 416
Zero Radius Values 1 416
Face Fillets
.......
Curvature Continuous
.
Fillets
.
. . .
.
.
417
419
Radial or Chord Width Definition 1 1 420
Hold Lines . 421
FilletXperL . . . 423
Other Advanced Features . 1 427
Wrap Feature. . .. 1 427
Deform Feature. . 1 430
Point Deformation
Curve to Curve Deformation .
.......... 1
.
430
433
Surface Push Deformation . . . . 435
Joining Surfaces . . 1 1 435
Knit Surface Feature 1 435
Direct Editing
........
Move Face Feature . .
.
1
439
439
Exercise 39: Variable Radius Fillet . 1 442
Exercise 40: Face Fillets
Exercise 41: Bottle Fillets1
.......... 1
1
444
445
Exercise 42: Watering Can 1 448
Exercise 43: Delete Face. . 1 454
Exercise 44: Direct Editing 1 456
viii
Introduction
Introduction SOLIDWORKS
About This The goal of this course is to teach you how to build muhibody and
Course complex shape solid models using SOLIDWORKS mechanical design
automation sofiware. Most ot‘the case studies and exercises in this
course are taken from industrial type applications, and the lessons
primarily center around working with solids. Surfacing functions are
covered in depth in the Surface Made/mg course.
The tools for modeling complex shapes in the SOLIDWORKS
software are quite robust and feature rich. During this course, we will
cover many ofthe commands and options in great detail. However, it is
impractical to cover every minute detail and still have the course be a
reasonal'tle length. Therefore, the focus ofthis course is on the
fundamental skills, tools, and concepts central to successfully building
iniiltioody and complex shape solid models. You should view the
training course manual as a supplement to, not a replacement for. the
system documentation and onrline help. Once you have developed a
good foundation in the skills covered in this course, you can refer to the
onrline help for information on less frequently used command options.
Prerequisites students attending this course are expected to have the following:
.I Mechanical design experience.

Completed the course SOLIDWORKS Esxemials.
. Experience with the Windowsm operating system.
Course Design This course is designed around a proceSSrbased (or mskrbased)
Philosophy approach to training. Rather than focus on individual features and
functions, a pmceSSrbased training course emphasizes the processes and
procedures you follow to complete a particular task. By iitiliZing case
studies to illustrate these processes, you learn the necessary commands,
options and menus in the context ofcompleting a design task.
Course Length The recommended minimum length ofthis course is three days.
Using this Book This training manual is intended to be used in a classroom environment
under the guidance ofan experienced SOLIDWORKS instructor. [1 IS
not intended to be a selfrpaced tutorial. The examples and case studies
are designed to be demonstrated “live“ by the instructor.
Laboratory Laboratory exercises give you the oppominity to apply and practice the
Exercises material covered during the lecture/demonstration portion ofthe
course. They are designed to represent typical design and modeling
situations while being modest enough to he completed during ctass
time. You should note that many students work at different paces.
Therefore, we have included more lab exercises than you can
reasonably expect to complete during, the course. This ensures that even
the fastest student will not run out of exercises.
sounwoRKs introduction
A Note About The drawings and dimensions given in the lab exercises are not intended
Dimensions to reflect any particular drafting standard. In fact, sometimes dimensions
are given in a tashion that would never be considered acceptable in
industry. The reason for this is the labs are designed to encourage you to
apply the information covered in class and to employ and reinforce
cemin techniques in modeling, As a result, the drawings and dimensions
in the exercises are done in a way that compliments this objective.
Conventions Used This manual uses the following typographic conventions:
in this Book
Convention Meaning
Bold Sans Serif SOLIDWORKS commands and options
appear in this style. For example, Features >
Extruded Cut Ed means click the Extruded
Cut icon on the Features tab ot‘the
CommandManager.
—
'I‘y'pewricer Feature ilanies and file ilanies appear in this
style. For example, Sketchl.
Double lines precede and follow sections of
17 Do this tlle procedures. This provides separation
step.
between the steps ofthe procedure and large
blocks ofexplanatory text. The steps
themselves are numbered in sails serifbold.
About the A complete set ofthe various files used throughout this course can be
Training Files downloaded from the SOLIDWURKS websites
www.solidworks.com. Click on the link for Support, then Training,
then Tr ng Files, then SOLIDWDRKS Training Files. Select the
link for the desired file set, There may be more than one version ol'each
file set available.
Direct URL:
WWWledeoI‘k ODJ tired 'n ilessolidWDI’ks
The files are supplied in . gned, seliiextraeting executable packages.
The default extraction location for the training files will be
0: \ SOLDDWORKS Training Files.
The files are organized by lesson number. The Case Study folder
within each lesson contains the files your instructor uses while
presenting the lessons. The Exercises folder contains any tiles that are
required for doing the laboratory exercises. Completed lesson files are
also included alld the tiles names are followed by “780“ to differentiate
them.
Intmduetion soLIDwoRKs
Training A set nflmining templates are used throughout the course to

Templates standardize the settings for the new files that are created. These
templates are also supplied in signed, selfeextracting executable
packages. They ean be downloaded from the same website address as
the Training Files and use the same extraction location.
These templates are used for all SOLIDWORKS core courses.
l
To access the training templates in SOLIDWORKS:
1 Click Tools, Options, System Options, File Locations.
2. Choose Document Templates from the drop down menu.
3. Click Add and browse to the Training Templates folder.
4. Click OK and Yes on each ofthe messages.
Accessing Training Once the file location has been added, click the Advanced button and
Templates the Training Templates tab in the New SOLIDWORKS Document
dialog can be used.
mum-wk
Mum tumult “inhuman
w
'5 3
Windows The screen shots in this manual were made using the SOLIDWORKS
sofiware running a mixture ofwindows“i7 7 and Windows It). You may
notice slight differences in the appearance ofthe menus and windows.
These difi'erences do not affect the performance of the sofiwate.
SOLIDWORKS Introduction
Use of Color The SOLIDWORKS sofiwnre

user interface makes extensive
use ofcolor to highlight
selected geometry and to
fit;
_
provide you with visual

feedback. This greatly increases
the intuitiveness and ease ofuse
ofthe SOLIDWORKS
software To take maximum
advantage ofthis, the training manuals are printed in full color.
Also, in many cases, we have used additional color in the illustrations
to communicate concepts, identify features, and otherwise convey
important information. For example, we might show the result ofau
operation in a different color, even though by default, the
sounwrmxs sofiware would not display the resulLs in that way.
Graphics and The SOLIDWORKS sofiware sets a new standard with bestrinrclass
Graphics Cards graphics The combination ofa highly reflective material and the
realism of ReaMew Graphics is an effective tool for evaluating the
quality ofadvanced part models and surfaces.
ReaM w Graphics ishardware (graphics card) support of advanced
shading in real time. For example, ifyou rotate a part, it retains its
rendered appearance throughout the rotation.
Color Schemes Out ofthe box, the SOLIDWORKS sofiware provides several
predefined color schemes that control, among other things, the colors
used for highlighted items, selected items, sketch relation symbols, and
shaded prevrews offenturest
We have not used the same color scheme for every case study and
exercise because some colors are more visible and clear than others
when used with different colored parts.
in addition, we have changed the viewport background to plain white
so that the illustrations reproduce better on white paper.
Intmduction SOLIDWORKS
As a result, because the color settings on your cumputer may be

different than the ones used by the authors 0f this book, the images you
see on your screen may not exactly match those in the book.
User Interface Throughout the development of the sofiware, there have been some
Appearance cosmetic User Interface changes, intended to improve visibility, that do
not ad‘ect the function ofthe software. As a policy, dialog images in the
manuals which exhibit no functional change from the previous version
are not replaced. As such, you may see a mixture ofeurrent and “old“
U1 dialogs and color schemes.
More MySoldeorks.eum enables you to be more productive by connecting

SOLIDWORKS you with relevant SOLIDWORKS content and services , anytime,
Training anywhere, on any device.
Resources Plus, with MySolidWorks Training you can enhance your
SOLIDWORKS skills on your own schedule, at your own pace,
Just go to My.Scudchksccmztram'gg.
Local User Groups Discover the benefits ofthe SOLIDWORKS User Group Network
(SWUGN). Attend local meetings to hear technical presentations on
SOLIDWORKS and related engineering topics, learn about additional
W
SOLIDWORKS products, and network with other users. Groups are
led by SOLIDWORKS users just like you. Check out for
more information, including how to find a group in your area.
Lesson 1
Multibody Design
Techniques
Upon successful completion ohhis lesson. you will be able to:

Creme mullibody solids using a variety oftechniques.
Pattern solid bodies.
Use feature scope opuonsr
Use the Insert Pan command,
Combine sohd homes using add, submxct, and common operzmonsr
Use xhe Intersect command.
Deform a solid body using me Indem feature.
Dele‘e sohd bod|esr
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
ululnuudy Design Tenhmques
Mullibody Parts Multibody parts occur when there is more than one continuous solid in
a single part tile. There ztre 2 primary uses for having multiple solid
bodies within a part: a multihody part can be an intermediate step
towards a single body design, or a multibody pan can used as an
alternative to an assembly.
ln this first lesson, we will take a look at some multibody design
techniques which result in a single body part. In Lesson 2, some
methods for working with multiple pieces ofa product within the same
part are covered.
Hide/Show Tree Certain items in the top ofthe FeatureManager design tree are
Items automatically hidden if they are not used. For this course, it is helpful
to have the Solid Bodies folder always shown. Follow the steps below
to Show this fulder.
1 Click Options {5) , System Options, FeatureManager.
2 Under Hidelshow tree items, set the Solid Bodies folder to Show.
For more information an this folder, see Solid Bndiex Folder on
page l3.
Mullibody There are many modeling techniques and features that make use of
Design multibody solids. ()ne nfthe most common multibody techniques,
Techniques bridging, was introduced in the SOLID WORKS Essentials course and is
pictured below. This technique allows you to concentrate on the most
pertinent features of your design, even ifthey are separated by a
distance. Then once the driving features have been established,
cunnecting geometry can be added to “bridge" them together into a
single solid.
\
sounwoRKs Lesson 1
Multihudy Design Techniques
Same mher multibudy design techniques are summarized in the table
‘ VN
below and will be demonstrated throughout the lesson
Bridging
a~s
Local Operations
Boolean Operations
_>
Tool Body
“I
,—>
Patterning
Lesson 1 soLlnwoRKs
uunmoriy Design reehmaues
Creating a Multihody solids are created in several ways. Some examples are:
Multibody
.I Create a boss from multiple disjointed contours.
Create a cut that separates a single body into more than one.
. Create a boss feature separated by a distance from other solid
geometry of a pan.
I Create a boss feature that intersects other solid geometry of the pan
and clear the Merge Result option.
Merge Result The Merge Result option is what is responsible forjoinirlg features
together to form a single solid body. This option appears as a check box
in boss and pattern features and can be cleared to prevent a feature from
merging with existing geometry. A feature created with this option
cleared will result in a separate solid body, even ifit intersects existing
features.
Note The Merge Result option will not appear for the first feature ofa part.
Case Study: In this ease study we will ereate a part using several multihody
Mullibody techniques. Remember there is often more than one way to achieve the
desired geometry ofa model. These techniques are just one solution
Design and will allow us to examine the multihody part environment.
10
~.... This case study will also review concepts ofConlour Selection which
were introduced in SOLID WORKS Exst‘nllalx.
sounwoRKs Lesson 1
Open an existing part.

Open the existing pan Multibudy Design from the
Lesson01\Case Study folder.
This pan contains two sketches with multiple
conteurs.
Contour Selection techniques will be used to create
multiple features and bodies from these sketches.
Contour Selection When a sketch contains more than one contour, Contour Selection
techniques can be used to pick the areas nfa sketch that are intended
for a feature. Contour selection can be used to select either a Contour,
which is a closed selection of sketch entities. or a Region. which is an
area bounded by sketch entities Contours and Regions can also be
combined to achieve the desired result.
Sclccfinn Result
Contour , select a sketch q)

entity which helongs m a
closed contour. Entire area
within the contour will be used
for the feature.
,, e
<9
Region , select an area

surrounded by sketch
geometry.
11
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
Mulllbndy Design Technlqucs
:1
There are several ways to select specific
fl “mm @
m—;
,
Contours and regions ofa sketch: x ..
I From a Feature PropertyManager, make
use ofthe Selected Contours grouplmx.
I Preselect a sketch entity associated with a m“
lw:l
A
|—‘
Contour before activating a feature.
- Use the Contour Select Tool from the I
Shoncut Menu to preselect a Region,
Contour, DY combination.
El
termini;
{3
.2
We will use these techniques in the following ’ tmstmm
0%
steps to create the features ofthe part. i
mm V
Select the feature sketch.

Select the Right Contours sketch in the FeztureManager design tree
to indicate this is the sketch to be used for the first feature.
Activate the feature.
Click Extruded BosslBase fl.
Select Contours.
Because of the intersecting contours the
default setting ofusing the entire sketch is
net valid. Selections must be made to
identify which areas afthe sketch will be
extruded.
Clear the sketch name from the Selected
Contours groupbox.
Select the semircircle contour as shown.
Extrude contour.
Use the following settings for
the extruded boss:
End condition = Midplane
Distance = 76mm
Click OK J .
Note The Front Contours sketch has been hidden in the illustratiun for
clarity.
12
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 1
Mulfihudy Design Techniques
6 Preselecl a contour.
Select the circular contour as shown.
7 Create the feature.
Click Extruded BossIBase CB.
0
End can on Midplane
=
Dislance = 57mm
Click OK ¢ .
a Resulls.
There are now 2 separate solid bodies in the part.
~
Solid Bodies The Solid Bodies folder organizes the solid
Folder bodies of the part and provides aeeess to select,
'E 5"“ Mm) ,
hide, or Show bodies within ihe model. By

default, this folder will only be visible if more than one body exisls
within the model, but System Options for the FeatureMixnilger can be
adjusted to modify this behavior.
The number shown next to the Solid Bodies folder indicates how
many bodies are in the model. The t‘older can be expanded to access the
individual bodies, which are represented by a cube icon 3. The
default name of each solid body will reflect the last feature applied to
that body.
Whereto Find ll - FeatureManager design tree: Solid Bodies 53 folder
9 Explore the Solid Bodies folder.

E 5"“ 3""“m
.0
, ,
The second Boss-Extrude feature causes the

creation of another solid body. In the Bossifimudd
FentureMimager design tree, expand the Solid aassazxtmdez
Bodies E folder to view the solid bodies of

the part.
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
Multlbndy Design Tenhmques
10 Create a third solid body.

Use the green Front Contours sketch to create an Extruded Boss]
Base ‘3 from the contour shown below.
End con on = Through All in both directions.
Clear the Merge result check box.
Keeping this feature as a separate solid body will allow it to be
modified separately from the other bodies of the part
Note Some sketches have been hidden in the illustmtions for clarity.
'le
hp The color scheme is defined so the edges orsolid bodies are black.
Notice there are no edges displayed where the third body intersects the
other two. This is a visual clue that the bodies are hot merged.
11 Through All cut.
Use the contour shown from the blue Right.
Contours sketch to create an
Extruded Cut 3.
Click Reverse Direction 4 and set the
end condition to Through All.
Click Flip side to cut.
14
sounwoRKs Lesson 1
Multihody Design Techniques
12 Detailed Preview.
Click Deniled Preview O.
The preview shows that the feature will cut the
third body to the correct shape, but it will also
cut the first two bodies.
The feature options will need to be modified to
get the result we are looking for.
13 Turn of! Detailed Preview.

Click Detailed Preview 07 again to toggle off the preview,
Local Creating separate solid bodies within a model allows modifications to

Operations easily he made to one body without affecting other bodies ofthe part.
This modeling strategy is referred to as the local operations technique.
To define which bodies are affected by a feature, Feature Scope
options can be used.
Feature Scope Feature Scope allows you to select which Mamie A
bodies are affected by a feature. when Allbodlu
working with a multibody part, the Feature 3:33;:ka

Scope options are visible in the , W
propenyiyunager when creating one and or.
features.
Feature Scope Auto-select is the default option and will automatically aFfect all
Options bodies ofthe part that are currently visible in the graphics area.
The All bodies option can be selected to have even hidden bodies of
the part affected by the feature heing created.
Selected bodies isused to manually select the bodies that Will be
affected by the feature, which is what we will use for this part.
Where to Find It I Feature FropertyMauager: Select the Feature Scope groupbox
14 Set the feature scope.

“New:
“E
A
Expand the Feature Scope group box. was
a. commotion
Clear Auto-select. jnlm eta
15
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
Multlbndy Design Technlques
15 Select body.
Select the third body that was created in step 10
and click OK v.
16 Results.
The cut feature only affects the seleeted body.
Notice that tlle cut feature did not merge the three
bodies.
17 Isolate.
Solid bodies can be hidden, shown, isolated, and
controlled by display states in the same way as
components within an assembly.
Rightsclick the out-Extrudel body either from the Solid
Bodies folder Or the graphics area and choose Isolate
from the shoncut menu.
We will pattern this body before merging the bodies into
one.
18 Exit Isolate.
Click the Exit Isolate button in the dialog to
bring, back the hidden bodies.
16
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 1
Mulfihndy Design Techniques
Patterning
Bodies
Each type of pattern feature can be used to
create instances of solid bodles. The Bodies
. , ,
to Pattern field is used to identify which body

G:
H0
e
“an
:'—_® "W
x
E
or bodies will be patterned.
lo—
u .
a
e
E:
bun-tam mm"
We.» mm
9
now
Where to Find It I Pattern feature PropertyManzger: Select the Bodies to Mirror
groupbox
19 Mirror body.
Insert a Mirror Ink] pattern using the Right Plane.
f
Activate the Bodies to Mirror groupbox and select the CuLExtrudel
solid body.
Keep Merge solids cleared. Click OK «.

@E
Malina:
i3 9
.o
4x
W ham.
8
We mm» o
”E:
0mm
i:MUM ind,
Ll Km Wm
M Pinned-k and promo
m not».
m Pmlxi WW
Note There is point selecting Merge solids because that only merges the
net
msulls ofthe mirror operation with the body being mirrored. since the
mirrored copy and its parent don‘t touch each other, they cannot be
merged. The other two bodies are not pan ofthe mirror operation, thus
they are not affected by it.
17
Lesson 1 someoRKs
Mullli‘mdy Design Techniques
20 Create a bridge.
Use the green Front Contours sketch to create an Extruded Boss]
Base ‘3 from the region shown below.
End con on = Mid Plane
Distance = 8mm
Merge Result = checked
Boss»EXtmde4 merges all touching bodies

E
.
v Solid sedan)
into one. The Solid Bodies folder now
Rossettmdu
displays only one solid.
Tool Body The tool body modeling technique is used to add or remove model
Technique volume using specialized “tool" parts. This technique can he used to
standardize or automate common features by saving “tool“ pans to a
library and inserting them as solid bodies into models you are
designing.
Fur the part we are working on, we will add two standard Mounting
Lugs to the model. The features oftlie mounting lug have been saved
as a separate part. To to add it to this design, we will use the Insert Part
command.
Using Insert Part The Insert Part command is used to add an existing part as one or more
solid hodies into the active part. There are 2 techniques to place the
inserted part:
I Cli k in the graphics area.

Th . technique inserts the part at the cursor location.
I Click OK s/ .
This technique aligns the plan's origin with the origin ufthe active part.
The option to Locate part with MoveICopy feature can he selected to
launch an additional dialog used to position the inserted part using
mates or specific movements. See Locate Pm and Maw/Copy Bodies
on page 21 for more information.
13
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 1
nuinoody Design Techniques
Where to Find It I Menu: Insert, Par! 5!

. File Explorer or Windows Explorer: Drag and drop a pan file into
an open pan document. Choose Yes to create a derived part.
21 Insert a part.
Click Insert, Part 5.
Browse to the Lesson01\Case Study folder
and select the part Mounting Lug.
The pan being inserted is simp1y a standard part
file.
Do not click OK yet.
External When you insen a part into another part, you have the option to create
References an external reference. While a powerful and useful tool, it requires
some care and understanding An Insert Part feature that is linked to
the part that was inserted will update ifthe referenced model changes
When inserting a part, the option Break Link to original part can be
used to prevent an external reference. For more information on external
references, see the Assembly Modeling course.
Entities to Tmnsfer If you choose the option to break the link, all information from the pan
being inserted will be copied into the active part. Ifyou choose to
externally reference an inserted part, you can choose to transfer with it
any combination ofthe touowing:
Solid bodies Surface Bodies
Axes Planes
Cosmetic threads Absorbed sketches
Unabsorbed sketches Custom properties
Coordinate systems Model dimensions
Hole wizard data Sheet metal information
Material
19
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
Multlbnuy Design Technlques
22 Entities to transfer.
Under Transfer, select Solid bodies, Planes, g imm Q
-/ x
and Model dimensions
We will use the planes in assist in locating the
m
Inn-
v
A
pan. zW ham“
E1 who: We,
Clear any other selected items. DA“:
E wine:
23 Locale Part option. a mmum...
Check the option to Locale part with Move! Emma Mm,
Copy feature. D Unahsamed mm
D (mam Wm:
24 Insert the Part. B Mann mum:
Click in the graphics area to insen the part. III mmm am
Uriuzm mm
D mm
mm m A
¢ m. ”WWW/my
Imam
m A
Daren immunginnm
m. 7mm A
Dknnxwuzmmnuwmlpm
25 Results.
An instance ofthe Mounting Lug is added to the active pan and the
Locate Part PmperryManzger appears.
sounwoRKs Lesson 1
Multihudy nesigii Techniques
Locate Part and The Locate Part PropertyManager is nearly

army.“ o
Move/Copy Bodies the same as the MoveICopy Bodies « x
PropertyManager, Locate Part is used
mum"; A
specifically when inserting a pan, while the
MoveICopy Body command can be used to
8
reposition bodies that already exist in a mode].
The Move/Copy Body command has the M WM
same options with an additional selection l‘k rwiia
required to identify which body will he lJ— memes
moved. Move/Copy Body also includes the Rpm
option to copy a body. l© W.
Locale Part and MoveICopy Bodies are used
E mm
WDW
to orient solid bodies within a part. Bodies can ‘13 one
moved by using two different methods: Main New”
I Constraints
Add mates, similar to the way components
are mated in an assembly,
I Translate/Rotate
Specify translation and/or rotation with 0mm“ V
respect to the X, Y, and Z axes, or a

selected reference. r mime/Mm:
Use the button at the bottom ot‘the PropertyMaiiager to switch between

the Constraints and Translate/Rotate methods.
You can create multiple mates within the same Move/Copy feature, but
each translation or rotation will need to he created separately.
Where to Find it I Menu: Insert, Features, Move/Copy
a
This example illustrates using mates to body. For an
locate the solid
example using explicit translation, see Exam-Lie 4: Paiiemmg Bodies
mi page 46.
21
Lesson 1 someoRKs
mummy Design Techmques
26 Selecflhe planes.
Verify that you are on the Male
Settings page of the
PropenyMznager.
Front Plane-
Select the
Mounnng Tab and the
Right Plane of the hast pan.
27 Male lhe body.

Verify the orientation cf the Mounting Lug is
3......“ 9
V _
cunect. If necessary, change the Mate
Alignment ta match the picture below.
a
.
\\t we
”Wm“
Hl .tm ;
A} W.
m ”mm
will
Click Add to apply the Coincident A mate.

For more infomation about males, see [he SOLID WORKS Essemialx
training manual.
sounwosz Lesson 1
Multihndy Design Techniques
28 Additional mate.
Add a Coincident A male between
the buttum faces of the Mounting
Lug and the host pan.
29 Additional mate.
Add a Distance H mate between the Front plane ofthe host pm and
the Right PlaneMounting Lug.
Set the Distance to 38mm and click Add.
This cumpletes pus ning the lug. Click OK «.
23
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
unitieedy Design Tenhmques
30 Examine the feature.

The Mounting Lug appears as a part feature in the FeatureMznager
Iree. The “>‘ symbol indicates the feature has an external reference.
This means the feature is dependent an information from a separate
external file, the Mounting Lug pan tile in this case.
Expand the MOUDUHE ~ §Meinngtuer>tnnnm
Lug feature listing. v @ meted-en)
Entities transferred with T! ‘MWW ‘W’"C""E"“‘="

the part are listed as ' E ”m”
I WWIMMMWM
mepianrMuummglug
I. mammnmmgiug
,
child features along
with the mates applied
when locating the part. . a A”WWW;
cetnndenn [anlPianerMommng Lugfilgm prim
A (etnrtdentz (screamedmiinming Lug}
H ninenrei (Right pleneMennting lugmePhne}
31 Explore the solid bod'es.
..
. El ”mammal
A second solid body is listed in the “35.5mm“
folder. (Mernengtrge.<en.re.nn>
32 Mirror body.
Insert a Mirror DH] using the From Plane.
Select Mounting Lug as the Bodies to
Mirror.
Keep Merge solids cleared,
Click OK J .
..
sounquKs Lesson
Multihudy Design reenninnes
1
Combining The Combine command is used to combine the volumes ofmultiple

Bodies solid bodies into a single body by adding, subtracting, 0K intersecting.
The Combine command has three options:
Add: Selected bodies are merged into a single solid by adding all
volumes. This operation is also known as n umml in other systems.
Body1
Result
Balm
—>
BodyZ
Subtract: Selected bodies are merged into a single solid by

subtracting the Bodies to Combine from a Main Body.
Bodyl
Result
Main Body
—>
Common: Selected bodies are merged into a single solid by finding
the volume that is common to all. This operation is also known is a
intersection in other systems.
Body1
’"
. I Resufl
Body2
sbdya
25
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
Mulllbudy Design Tennnlques
Where to Find It I
I
Menu: Insert. Features, Combine
.
Shoncul Menu: Multirselecl solid bodies, rightrclick, choose
Combine
Tip The Solid Bodies Selection Filter

‘
is useful when selecting solid
bodies or xhey can be selecied from the Solid Bodies folder.
33 Combine the solid bodies.

0 m“, Q
Click Combine
.. for ’ "
”
Use the Add option Operation Type. “’33"
Selecx all lhree bodies for Bodies to I SEER:
Combine. Mflmwm A
,
Click OK V . memo
<Mlumnulu1>r<nwwd
.‘ m . ,
34 Dplional: Add fi sh features.

Add holes, cuts, and 1.5mm radius fillets and rounds as indicated.
A
a!
35 Save and close the part.
26
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 1
Multihody Design Techniques
Case Study: ()t‘the three ways to combine solid

Protective bodies in SOLIDWORKS, the
Screen Common method, sometimes referred
to as a Boolean intersection, is the most
abstract. This example uses the
Common volume of solid bodies
within a part to model the protective
screen for the pictured sea scooter.
We wtll first create a body that
represents the thin revolved shape of
the screen. Then another intersecting body will be created with the
screen's wire pattern and outside contour, Finally, we'll combine the
bodies and use their common volumes to achieve the desired result.
Open the existing part Protective

Screen.
Open Protective Sereeneldpl’t from
the Lesson01\0eee Study folder.
This pan contains 2 profiles that
represent the revolved contour and
outside dimensions of the screen.
Revolved thin feature.

Use Sketch for Revolve for a Revolved Boss/Base
since the sketch is open, you will be asked
3
ifyou want close
to it.
Click No to create a thin feature.
Select the horizontal centerllne as the Axis of Revolution.
Use Mid Plane with an Angle of
90".
Set the Thickness to 1.00mm and
make sure the material is added to
the alt/side ofthe sketch.
Click OK t/ .
27
Lesion 1 soLIDwoRKs
Multlbcdy Design Techmques
3 Extruder
Click Extruded BasslBase fl.
Extrude the Outside Profile
sketch using the end condition
Through All.
Important! Clear the Merge result option to
create this feature as a second
sulid body.
Next, we‘ll shell this body and
use ribs m create the screen
pattern.
4 Shell.
Shell m the extruded boss using :1
Thickness of 3mm.
Remove the uppermost face.
5 Sketch.
Open a new sketch 0n the top face.
Sketch a line for a rib as shown
below.
6 Rib.
Click Rib @.
Set the Rib Thickness m be 1mm,
applied to Both Sides E
of the
sketched line.
The Extrusion direction is
Normal to Sketch 6'.
For Selected body, select the
shelled body.
Click OK J .
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 1
Multihndy Design Techniques
7 Rib patternl
Click Linear Pattern BE.
Se1eet the rib as the feature to patiem and use

the following settings:
;- momma
drum m mum
Pattern Direction: select the 5mm dimension is u; m reverence
from step 5
Up to reference: select the Vertex as shown
below. licmmld
MEI
_
a menu mum:
Offset from reference = 0
Selected reference: select edge as shown
below for the Seed reference.
Spacing *12.75mm rm.“ e
Mai
n We... run: A
Under Feature Scope, clear Auto-select and
choose the Ribl solid body. 5
B l
Click OK ~/ .
'3 we. V
we 9'. V
'E
were. A
g mm,
in rum rm,
Em m
Note Rib features automatically extend up

to next in all directions so each
pattern insmnce extends across the
part.
29
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
ulultuaudy Design Techniques
8 Optional: Mirror feature.

We want to create a rib pattern in the opposite direction.
Try mirroring the linear pattern feature over the Right Plane.
What are the results? Why does this occur?
Because of the way rib features are calculated , up to next in all

directions , the existing ribs in tile model are limiting the extents ofthe
second pattem.
One method to avoid this would be to create the first rib pattern cthset
from the top, then create a second rib pattern at the top race to allow
them to extend across the pan.
Another strategy is to take advantage of multibody functions and
mirror the entire body oftlle shelled piece. since this body is
symmetrical, it lends itselrvery well to this technique.
Click Undo to remove the teature pattern, if necessary.
9 Mirror body.
Select the Right Plans and
activate the Mirror HQ feature.
Choose the Bodies to Mirror
groupbnx and pick the
LFatteml body.
Click Merge solids.
Click OK t/ .
There should be 2 solid bodies in
the model afier mirroring.
sounquKs Lesson 1

Click Combine
Use the
..
Commonoption for
Operation Type and select
both bodies.
Click OK ./ .
Intersect with Another tool that can be used to merge bodiet within a pan is the
Solid Bodies Intersect tool. The Intersect tool is unique in its ability to both add
and subtract material in a single operation, unlike Combine which can
just do tine or the other. Use of the Merge Result option can result in
either joining lntersecting bodies or producing additional bodies in the
part. This tool is most common with surface modeling techniques, but
it can also be applied to solid bodies and can make use of planes.
Using Intersect The Intersect tool allows for the selection of solid bodies, surface
bodies, and planes and calculates all possible regions resulting from
their intersection. Regions can be chosen to be excluded from the
results to remove unwanted areas. The regions included in the resulting,
feature can either be merged or can produce separate bodies.
Where to Find It I CommandManager: Features > Intersect fl
I Menu: Insert, Features, Intersect
Case Study: We will use the Intersect tool to complete a Bowl design. The existing
Bowl model contains 2 solid bodies: one representing the bowl and the other
representing, the bowl lip.
To get the result we want, we will add regions troin each body and
exclude others.
31
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
Multlbndy Design Techniques
1 Open the existing part

Bowlilntersect.
BowLLnterseetslde’t can be found in
the Lesson01\Case Study folder.
2 Intersect.
9' (a a)
Click Intersect a. ~I x
choose the 2 solid bodies from the graphics Wm ~

¢ am
area.
Click Intersect in the PropertyManzger to .I am up
calculate the regions resulting from the bodies itmmlmnedlng vegmm

intersection. twinninmm
g rm no
There are 3 Regions to Exclude; the tap area a as Bllmv flaming: on tonne:
ctfthe bowl, the middle region efthe bowl lip
body, and the region inside the bowl. been“. A
Make sure Merge Result is checked.
Click 0K ./ .
Ilg noon on
Won 1
i
Regina 1
min. I
Rewar- i
new 5
New» t
:Menxelemnn
Olin-ms A
m Mew: ion:
in (mm Swims
3 Result.
The regions included in the intersect
feature are merged into one body.
32
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 1
Multihufly Design Techniques
Calculating The Intersect feature can be a valuable tool for calculating internal
Internal Volume volume. It can easily be used to generate a body from the internal
region ofinterseeting entities. In the following steps, we will use n
plane to indicate the fill level oftlle buwl and use Intersect to create a
body from the region inside the bowl and the plane.
4 Offset plane.
Create a new reference plane offset
from the Top Plane, 15mm.
5 Intersect.
Click Intersect D.
Select Planel and the bowl hody.
Click Create internal regions.
By using this option, only the internal regions will be recognized. The
regions resulting from the intersection ofthe plane and the howl are
ignored.
Click the Intersect button.
If necessary, clear Merge Result. We
will create the internal region as a
separate solid body.
Click OK
I .
the intersect feature

Rename Volume.
6 Mass Properties.
From the Evaluate toolbar, click Mass Properties It“.
Select the solid body inside the bewl ta
lneasure its volume.
Click Options... in the dialog. Click
Use custom settings.
Change the Per unit volume to liters
and click OK.
The bowl holds about 1.661lters.
Close the dialug.
7 Suppress the Volume feature.
Lesion 1 sounwoRKs
Multlbody Design Techmques
Indent Feature Certain features in SOLIDWORKS require multiple bodies to exist

within a part. Combine is one example, and the Indent feature is
another. To cream an Indent, a Tool Body must exist and must intersect
a separate Target Body which will receive the indent.
The Indent feature is used to reshape thin walls of a Target Body to
the shape of one or more intersecting Tool Bodies. The indentation
thickness and optional clearance are controlled by numeric values. A
cut can also result from the indent if no additional material is required
to achieve the desired shape.
Selections required for an indent feature include the Target Body and
the Tool Body Region.
I The Target Body is the body being indented.
I The Tool Body Region is a selecnon of both the solid body

providing the shape of the indent (tool) and an area of that body.
Options in the Indent Property Manager control whether the area
picked will Keep the indent feature around it or be Removed from
the indent.
Where to Find It Menu: Insert, Features, Indent @
Case Study: 1n the next example, Indent is used to

Indent reshape an existing thin walled feature for
a hole and fastener and to add clearance
for tools.
1 Open the part Indent.

The Indent part includes two intersecting solid bodies.
soLIchlRKs Lesson 1
uultiaedy Design Techniques
2 Circular pattern. mm,

Add 3 Circular Pattern Spinng. xtudlq %
of the tool body as wine: 1 5%
shown. "
3 lndenL
Click lndent @ and select the large solid as the Target body.
Keep selections is the default option for choosing the Tool body
region.
Select the underside of
three revolved solid bodies
as shown to “keep" the
indent surrounding these
areas.
Under Parameters, set the
Thickness to 6mm and
Clearance to 1.25mm.
The preview shows the
indent.
Click OK ./ .
Note Altemately, the Remove Selections option can be selected and

regions chusen on the tool body will be excluded from having indent
walls built around them.
4 Section Wew.
Use the Section Want
a
tool with
the Front Plane to cut the display.
Note how the Clearance is applied. It
can be reversed 2.; ifnecessary.
5 Isolate.
Isolate the main body.
35
Lesson 1 soLIDwoRKs
Mulllbndy Design reetuuuues
6 Fillet.
Apply a 2mm fillet to the face as
shown.
Exit Isolate.
Deleting Solid In some cases, afier using multibody techniques you may be lefi with
Bodies solid bodies in the model that are not pan ofthe finished product.
Deleting bodies that ore not part oflhe finished model is good practice.
Removing extro bodies ensures Mass Properties calculations are
correct and prevents confusion ifthe model will be exported. Since
visual properties are not translated into 211 formats, all existing bodies
may be shown in an imponed version ofthe file. Bodies can be deleted
from a model using the DeleteIKeep Body feature.
Delete/Keep Body The Delete/Keep Body feature is used to remove solid or surface
Featu re bodies from a model at or specific point in feature history. Adding a
Delete/Keep Body feature to the model ensures the body exists in the
model for calculations prior to that deletion.
Selections can be made to choose which bodies to delete, or which
bodies to keep in the model.
Where to Find It I
.
Menu: Insert. Features, DeleteIKeep Body
.
Shoncul Menu: Righteclick a body and click Delete...
Since the lndent feature does not absorb the tool bodies from the part,
we will add a Delete/Keep Body feature to remove them.
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 1
Humhndy Design Techniques
8 Delete Bodies.
Click DelefielKeep Body
For Type, click Keep
..
Bodies.
Chouse the main target body from the model.
Click OK v.
A feature is added 10 the FeatureManager design tree and marks the
location in feature history where the bodies are removed.
‘7
9
lanai
§, hm rumrmemw rm
3 mm
em
. m Any-mam
. Ev waned;
E Mlllvu‘ m W>
m m. m
0 m Fun!
9 Ian M
.a Imlml
L. om
.
.
W
a hug:
.2: ("9mm
a3 rm
m
. Mme-m
9 Save and close the pan.
37
Exercise 1 soLIDwoRKs
Endglng a Mulfibody Pan
Exercise 1: Create this part by following the steps as

Bridging a shown.
Mullibody Part This exercise reinforces the following
s s:
I Mullibndy Partx on page 8

I Contour Seleclmn on page 1
l
- Merge Result on page 10

Units: millimeters
Design Intent Tile design intent for this part is as folluws:

l. The connecting feature between the circular boss and the vertical
plate should be based eff of their locations and update properly if
the size or position ofthese features change.
2. Holes are through all.
3. All fillets and rounds are 5mm radius.
Procedure
New part.
Open a new part using the PartiMM template and name it Bridging.
Create a mu '
ody part.
Consider creating a sketch with multiple contours to produce the hcdies
as shown.
L
2n
if i 15 ,
[7 025
/7 mo
1—
95
lo ~
Io» -
60
Au
SOLIDWORKS Exercise 1
Endglng a Ilulfihudy Pan
3 Finish part with bridge technique.

Create a feature in bridge the bodies wgether. Its geometry should be
driven by ihe existing bodies.
Use Merge Result to combine the bodies.
Add fillem as shown.
R5
TYP
7/
39
Local operations
Exercise 2: Creating separate solid bodies within

Local a model allows modifications to
Operations easily be made to one body without
affecting other bodies ofthe pan.
This modeling strategy is referred to
as the local operations technique. A
common example ofthis technique is
a variation on shelling. The shelling
operalion, by default, afi'ects all
features ofthe solid body that
precede it. In this example, a shelling problem will be solved using
Merge result and Combine.
This exercise reinforces the following skills:
I Mullibmiy Partx on page 8

- Combining Bodies on page 25
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open the part Local Operations.
Shell part.
Add a 4mm shell that removes the bottom face.
Explore Resuls.
Click Section View a-
Locate the section plane 42mm from
the Front Plane.
Notice in the section view that the
shell aereets the entire part. We only
want it to affect the bottom plate.
in order to limit the shell to the bottom
plate, we will modify the features to
keep that area of the part as a separate
body.
Click OK to keep the section view
active.
Note in some cases, like this simple example, reordering the feature would
solve the problem. But on more complex models, reordering may not
be an option. Multibody tools can ofien provide an alternative solution.
sounwonKs Exercise 2
Lazil Operations
4 Modify features.
Modify the features that touch the bottom
plate to prevent them from merging.
Use Edit Feature
bosses:
fl on these two
l VerticalgPlate
l RibgUndeI‘
Clear the Merge result check box for
each boss and click OK J
.
Features can be selected for editing from the
._
11p ..
‘fl
‘_ “
.
FeatureManagerTree, by selecting a face of ”1'2

the feature, or by using breadcrumbs. Use
the “d" key on the keyboard to move l
Q
breadcrumbs to your cursor location. bC W
5 Explore the solid bodies:
..
Expand the Solid Bodies iolder to view the
.
v m 50M “'58)
Rlb UM“
bodles ln the part.
.
0-H“
Afier clearing the Merge result check box for the Shelli
upper features, there are three separate bodies in

the part The shell feature only affects the body it is applied to.
Note The solid body names are assumed from the last feature affecting the
body.
Merge Using What ifwe wanted a feature to merge with some bodies of the part, but
Feature Scope not others? To accomplish this, the Merge result option can be turned
on and Feature Scope can be used to limit which bodies are afiected
by the feature. Any existing body that is not part of the Feature Scope is
ignored by the feature and will not be merged.
6 Merge the RthInder feature

using feature scope.
Edit the Ribflnder feature.
Click Merge result.
Under Feature Scope, click
Selected bodies.
Select the body as shown.
Click OK J .
M
Exercise 2 SOLIDWORKS
Local Operations
7 Results. , El 59“ M542)

The mmmder feature merges with the selected
body, but not the bottom plate. There are now 2
separate bodies in the pan.
.. D
9;,“
M
8 Optional: Use Isolate to evaluate the 2 separate bodies.

Select both bodies from the Solid
Bodies folder.
menu. '
Riglitrclick and activate
Combine from the shortcut
Use the Add option for Operation

Type.
Click OK J .
the si gle solidt

10 Explore
. E Saw 356150)
11
The part now exists as a single send body.
Turn ofithe section View.

. Comma
42
Paslllomng Insenea Parts
Exercise 3: Create this part by following

Positioning the steps as shown.
Inserted Parts This exercise reinforces the
following skills:
- 11mg Insert Pm
on page s 1
- Locate Pm and Move/

Copy Bodies on page 21
- Combining Bodies
on page 25
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open part.
Open the pan file Base from the Lesson01\EXercises
folder.
Save As...
Save the file with a new name: Insert Part.
Insert part.
5.
I
Click Insert. Part
Select the part Lug from the ‘
LessonO 1 \ Exercises folder.
For entities to Transfer, select Solid bodies.
Select Locate part with Move/Copy feature.
Click OK J .
Locate Part.
Use Constraints to position the Log as
shown.
MoveICopy Body.
Click Insert, Features, MoveICopy Q.
For Bodies to Move select the Lug.
Click Translate/Rotate to access those options.
t
Exercise 3 sounwoRKs
Pasllloning Inserted Pans
6 MoveICopy Seningsi
Click Copy.
Under Translate, specify the location fur the cupied body by selecting
3 Translation Reference (Verm::<1>) and To Vertex (Verbex <2>)
as Shawn.
8 WM
W
a; Tmnslstion Reference
v X (Venex<1>)
hen-4mm, A
_
e To Venex
(Venex<2>)
Em»
e4 ‘ :
1...“, A
B
'
me V
Repeal.
Use Insert Part g and MoveICopy
Body Q in add 2
more insmnce uf
the Lug on the other side of me pan.
Combine bodies and add fillets

Combine
.
all the solid bodies imo one.
Add 3mm and 2mm filIeLs as shown.
Paslllomng lnseflgd Pans
9 Modify the Lug.

Open the Lug part and change the 45mm
dimension to 60mm.
$35
70
&
11p An externally referenced part can be opened by rightcucking the Insert

Pan feature (Lug ->) and selecting Edit in Context from the shortcut
menu.
10 Propagate change.
Return m the main pan. Rebuild I if necessary 1;: propagate the
changes.

Exercise 4 scLIDwoRKs
anemlng Bodies
Exercise 4: Create this pan by followmg the

Patterning steps as shown.
Bodies This exercise reinforces the
following skills:
I Utmg Insert Part on page 18
- Lat'ale Pm and Move/Com
804195 on page 21
I Patterning Bndit’x on page 17
Units: millimeters
Procedure
New part.
Open a new pan using the Far'LMM template and name it
Patterning Bodies.
lnserl part 213.
Click Insert, Part 5‘.
Select the pan 213 from the Lessono 1 \Exercises fulclen
For entities to Transfer, select Solid bodies.
Clear Locate pan with MoveICopy feature.
Click OK J to position the part on the Origin,
Insert pan 13.
insert pan 1B from the LESSODOI \Exel‘cises foldert
Transfer only the Solid bodies
information and select Locate part with H =
MoveICopy feature.
‘
5,
Click OK »/ to position the pan at the

Origin initially.
25
Use Translate options to locate the part:
Della X AX = -38mm
Della Z AZ = -25mm
2n
45
Pammmg Ba as
4 Insert pars 2A and 1A.

Insert and [)0 ’tion pm 2A and 1A using the workflow listed in sxep 3
and the position information shown below.
5 Add patterns.
Pattern the solid bodies as shown‘
47
Panemlng Bodles
6 Con necl bodies.

Create a bridge that connects the bodies without merging.
Pattern the bridge in Create 3 instances.
44 9.50
7 Create plate.
Sketch on the Top Plane to create the Plate feature.
Tip View Temporary Axes «
to create some of the dimensions shown.
Extrude the feature 6mm and click Merge result.

ramming Bodies
8 Add fillets and rounds.

Finish part with 3mm radius fillets and rounds.
9 Modify referenced part.

Rightrclick the feature 2B and choose Edit in Context.
Change the deplh ofthe extrusion in 58mm.
i
58
10 Propagate change.
Retum m the main pan. Rebuild I if necessary in propagate the
changes.
49
Modeling Negative Space
Exercise 5: In this exercise, the

Modeling Combine feature is used to
subtract one solid body from
Negative Space another in order to remove
internal volume.
To produce a hydraulic
manifold, one design
technique is to produce the
internal hole structures as
solid bodies first, then
lmsge o Plenum Deng“ Hydiaiilier Limited
subtract them from a solid
block.
By producing the internal space as a solid body, internal information,
such as volume, can easily be measured and adjusted during the design
process.
.- Marge Result on page 10

Combining Bodies on page 25
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing part Hydraulic Manifold from the
LessonOl \Exercises folder.
The part contains multiple solid bodies representing interconnected
cavities in the manifold. This is the negative space of the final model.
soLIDwoRKs Exercise 5
Modeling negative Space
2 Sketch a rectangle.
Open a new sketch on the Top Plans and sketch a rectangle whese
four sides are collinear with the planar faces of the cavity bodies.
3 Extrude.
Extmde the rectangle in two directions.
I Direction 1 (up): Up To Surface
I Direction 2 (down): Blind; Depth : 30mm
Clear Merge result.
51
Examine 5 souuwoRKs
Modeling Negative Spin:
'
4 Cnmhlne the solld bottles.
Cnmhlne wiflJ a Subtract opemtinu.
Use the extruded block as the Maln Body and the remaining solid
bodies as the Bodles to Suhh‘act.
Note Transparency has been applied m the extruded block for illustration
purposes.
Combinmg a Muillhady Pan
Exercise 6: Create the pan by following the

Combining a steps as shown.
Mullibody Part This exercise reinforces the
-
following skills:
- Combining Bodies on page 25
Units: millimeters
Procedure
1 New Part.
Open a new part using the ParnMM template and name it Combine.
2 Thin Exirude.
Use the Front Plane
to create the sketch as
shown.
53.5044 ”f
Use lines and fillets as
the open profile for a 115
176
Thin Feature.
Extrude the profile 57mm using the Mid Plane end condition.
Add :1 Thickness of 9.5mm above the sketched entities.
3 Second solid body. W
Create a profile on the
Top Plane as shown.
Extrude a separate solid

body as required.
4 Combine bodies.
Combine O the two solid
bodies into one.
21
Cnmhlnlng a mum Fan
5 Add features
Add boss, cut, hole wizard and fillet features.
i
Finish the pan with 1.5mm radius fillets and rounds.
13
20
CBORE Var M5
Pan Head (“3
Maomne Screw

limit:
Exercise 7: in this exercise, the Protective Screen will be completed by adding

lndent an Indent feature to reshape the part.
This exercise reinfctrces the
following skills:
I Mullibndy Partx on page 8
I Indent Fealum on page 34
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing pan Protective Screen - Indent from the
LeSsDnO 1 \ Exercises folder.
This is a cnpy of the part cumpleted in this lessons case study.
Rollback.
Rollback to just before the Shell feature. We will build the Indent Tool
Body hi this location in feature history.
V
CER$I>
.Dmmewm llldemlDleunni
, mum
l3: em,»
-
mom“.
- mete-mew
a Malena! «matprmed»
U rtemvlm
lfl resent.
lfl tenet.“
L em
. a Kmvelmn‘i
Hide body.
Hide N: the extruded body.
fin You can hide bodies from the Solid Bodies E folder, from the
graphics area, or by choosing to hide a feature in the tree thnt is
associated with the body. Additionally, the Tab key cnn be used in the
graphics area to Hide «x and Shift + Tab will Show at.
55
lndem
4 New sketch.
Open a new sketch on the
Top Plane.
Select Outside Profile sketeh in
the FeatureManager Tree.
Tip This sketch was used for the Boss-
Extr'udel feature.
Click Offset Entities E.
Offset 2mm inside the
Outside Profile sketch.
5 Extrude.
Extrude the new sketch.
Use Offset From Suflace for the
end condition and choose the tap
face of the revolved body as the
face to ufi‘set from.
Set the Offset Dishnce to 1mm
and make sure the offset is above
the face of the revolved feature.
Important! Clear the Merge result option.

6 Fillet
Apply a 0.5mm radius fillet to
the top face and the four vertical
edges 0f the new extruded bndy.
Indenl
7 lndent.
Click lndent @.
Select the revolved budy as
the Target body.
Select the curved face at the
extruded body as the Tool
body region to keep.
Under Parameters, set the
Thickness to 1mm and the
Clearance to nmm.
Click OK ./ .
Hide body.
Hide V the tool body to see the
results.
Fil Iel.
Apply 0.5mm fillets te the concave edges ofthe indented region.
Apply 1.5mm fillets to the convex edges as shown in the section view
below.
57
lndem
10 Roll forward.
The system rebuilds (he pan incorporaling (he changes you have made
11 Delele body.
Expand lhe Solid Bodies folder, rig‘mrclick the (001 body (Filletl ),
and click Delete/Keep Body ‘-
Set lhe Type [0 Delete Bodies.
Click OK ./ m delete thetool body.

A Body»DeleLe/Keep1 feamre lS added l0 lhe feature tree and (he
Filletl body is removed from I‘ne model.
Lesson 2
Saving Solid Bodies
Upon successful completion ofthls lesson, you will be able to:

Use various techmques to spllt a pan into multlple bodies.
Save solld hodles as dlscrele pan files,
Create an assembly from a multibody pant
Use the Spln feature for direct editmg,
59
Lesson 2 sounwomts
Savlng Snllfl Eodles
/
Mullibody Part ln the previous lesson, we saw several design
vs. Assembly techniques that use multiple bodies within a
part as an intermediate step to a single body
part. Another way to use multibody parts is
as an alternative to an assembly. This means
designing separate pieces ofa product within
the part environment. SOLIDWORKS
Weldments are based entirely on this design
technique (for more information see the
SOLIDWURKS Weld/news Course). Weldment Part
Any multiple piece product can use this design method ifappmpriate.
Sometimes it makes sense to model multiple pieces ofa product within
the same environment so that they share common dimensions and
changes propagate throughout the model to maintain the design intent.
At times this can be
accomplished in the assembly
environment using t0p»down
assembly modeling
techniques (see the Assembly
Modeling some). But when
multiple pieces require
smooth blending across
surfaces or have multiple
corresponding faces,
designing them as a single
part is often the best
approach.
The pan environment does
offer some advantages over an
assembly including the elimination nfmzte features and the need to
manage multiple files. However, bodies ofa part will not appear in a
Bill of Materials and there is no way to simulate motion between
bodies.
Company standards may also require each separate piece ora product
to exist as a separate tile for tile management or pan number
conventiuns. To address this, SOLIDWORKS includes functions to
create individual part documean from the bodies ofa part as well as
automate the creation ofan assembly.
sounwoRKs Lesson 2
Savlng Solid undies
Saving Bodies There are several commands available to save one or more solid bodies
Functions as separate part files each wtth different characteristics. Some
commands give you the option to generzne an assembly from the saved
pans.
The various commands and techniques are summarized in the
following table:
Adds a feature to the

FeatureManager design tree ofthe
J J
source pan.
Changes made to the source pan
afier the function propagate to the
J
child parts
Changes made to the source pan

“before" the function propagate to
J J J
the child panst
(Accomplished by making changes
while rolled back before the
function)
The source part can be navigated
to from the child parts.
J J J
(Accomplished by nghvclicklllg
the feature which carries the
external reference and choosing
Edit in Context)
An assemhly document can he
automated from the resulting pans
J J
(see Air/amazing an ASKL’mb/y on
page 74).
Requires a splitting tool to first
create the bodies
J
For more information: [Ilse/‘1 mm Saw Badim‘ Split
New Part on page 67 Feature on
on page 63 page H
61
Lesion 2 sounwoRKs
Saving Sulld Bodies
Default Templates The commands in this lesson create new SOLIDWORKS documents;
either a part or an assembly or both as appropriate. You have the option
of specifying a document template or alluwing the system (0 use the
default template. This choice is determined by the settings in Tools,
Options, System 0 'nns, Default Templates. The default template
settings can he overridden by PropertyManager options fur individual
features.
Case Study: in previous examples, multibody pans have been created by adding
Clamp material, but it is also possible to create a cut that results in multiple
bodies. In this first case study, the top and bottom halves ofa hose
clamp have been designed within a single part due to the common
dimensions they share. We will first add a cut feature to create the
separate pieces 0f the clamp. Then the resulting multibody part will be
used as the source for new separate part documents and an assembly.
1 Open the part Chmpjmu‘oe.

SOLIDWORKS Lesson 2
Saving Solid aodies
Create multibodies.
Using Sketchs, create a Through All cut.
Note When a cut feature will result in multiple solid bodies, the Bodies to
Keep dialog box appears. Options here allow you to choose which
bodies you wish to retain in the model.
Click the All bodies option.
Click OK.
Explore the Solid Bodies folder.
.. “MM,
~ [a Set-dkodlssm
The cut feature created two solid bodies.
(m-Eflludfllll
Insert into New At this point the bodies of Clampeource will be used to generate new
Part part documean for the Clampjop and Clampjottom. For this
example, we will use the command Insert into New Part to create the
new documents.
Insert into New Part allows you to save individual solid bodies as new
part files. Each resulting part file is linked by an external reference
hack to the source pan. A Stock-<souree part name> feature appears
in the saved part. This feature carries the external reference. For more
information about external references, refer to the Assembly Modeling
training course.
Note If you select multiple bodies or the Solid Bodies folder, the saved pan
will he a multibody part with a Stock feature for each body.
Insert into New Part does not create a feature in the source part. The
solid bodies are saved as they are after the last part feature is rebuilt.
Any changes you make to the source pan will propagate to the saved
parts. since there is no feature indicating the Source file has other
documents that are dependent on it, it is good practice to indicate this
relationship in the file name(s).
Where to Find It
. shortcut Menu: Expand the Solid Bodies folder, rightrclick the
body (or bodies) you want to save and click Insert into New Part
Les-on 2 soLIDwoRKs
Sflvlng Sullfl Bodles
4 Insert the solid bodies into new pars.

From the Solid Bodies folder, rightaclick one of the sulid bodies and
choose Insert into New Part.
Use the PropertyManager ta define the file name shown below. Accept
the default template settings.
The new pan is opened automatically.
Repeat to create the second new part document.
c1ampgTop
Clampr ottom
5 Create an assembly.
Create a new assembly document using the Assemblyman/r template.
Add the saved parts by fixing them to the assembly origin.
Tip J
Using the green check in the Insert Componens
PropertyManager automatically fixes the components origin to the
assembly origin.
Name the assembly magnetism].
6 Examine the component pars.
Examine the Featurelvlanager design tree ordne ofthe new parts.
Note the Stock feature. This carries the external reference.
Q omen, smooths...»
V
m Mummy;
t E Sulld undiesm
i5 ems.)
a rampant
m on a.“
m antenna
L. em
@ SMkaClimijKtl 7)
To make changes to the hose clamp, we‘ll modify the source file. Due
to the external references, the new part documents will update to reflect
any madificaflons to the Clampjoume.
soLInwoRKs Lesson 2
Saving Solid Bodies
7 Make changes to the source

part.
Switch hack to the same part.
Sketch two 13mm circles on the
underside face as shown.
8 Through All cut.

Click Extruded Cut fl.
Set the end condition to Through
All.
E
9 Set the feature scope.
Expand the Feature Scope group box.
mum
3mm“:
A
ESSEX”
'
Clear the Auto-select check box.
Select the bottom halfufthe clamp and click
DKJ.
<21:
65
Leslun 2 SOLIDWORKS
Sawing Solid Bodies
10 Results
The cut feature only affects the selected body.
11 Second Through All out feature.

Create another Through All cm
feature as shuwn.
Use the Feature Scope to limit its
‘3‘
efiect to just the upper halfafthe
clamp.
12 Examine the Individual park and assembly.

The changes made to the source pan prupagated 10 the saved files.
13 Save and close the files.

sounwoRKs Lesson 2
Saving Solid Bodies
Save Bodies Another option to generate new parts from solid bodies is to add a Save
Bodies feature to the source pan. Since this method creates a feature in
the part, it marks a location in the source pan's history where the hodies
were saved. Any subsequent features added to the source part will not
propagate to the saved files. This feature also makes it easy to identify
that there are other documents externally referencing the source file.
One other marked difference between using Save Bodies and Insert
into New Part, is with the Save Bodies feature, you do not have the
option of saving more than one body to the newly created part. Each
body will generate a separate part file.
Each resulting pan file is linked by an external reference back to the
source pan. A Stock-(SOUPEG part name> feature appears in each
saved part. This features carries the external reference.
The Save Bodies command includes the option to automate an
assembly from the newly created pans. See Automating an Assembly
on page 74 for more information.
Where to Find It I Menu: Insert, Features, Save Bodies
l Shortcut Menu: Rightrclick the Solid Bodies folder and click
Save Bodies
Case Study: A Save Bodies feature will be used to create new pans from lhe bodies
Boat Cleat ofa Boat oleat design. The part has been designed with bodies
representing the pattern and core ofthe tooling required for casting the
part. These bodies will be saved before the model is completed with a
Combine feature.
Open the part Boat; meat.

There are two solid bodies
representing the core and the
'
pattern. ()ne body shown
semirtransparent for illustration
purposes.
67
Lesson 2 soLIDwoRKs
Savlng Sullfl Eodles
Edit appearance
Remove the transparency.
Tip Using the Display Pane is a good
way to identify how appearances and
‘? -mnu \ C 9 < ‘9
display uptiuns have been applied to

a model. Display optictns can also be
oceans momenta,
' NW
g
modified from within the Display , gmjm
Pane. . a two
Click the angle bracket > at the top
x_
Own New
aI b
ctfthe FeatureManager Design Tree
to show and hide the Display Pane.
3:11;“ 51
[g anDl-ne [:1
[a henna ta
Rename the solid bodiesi

1n the Solid Bodies m folder, rename the yellow body Pattern.
Rename the pink body Core.
E
..
v Solid sodium
Pmem
Cote
Note Once solid bodies have been manually renamed they will no longer
inherit the names offeztures applied to the bodies. However, the bndy
names will change ifnew bodies are created or merged as a result ora
feature.
Saving the hodi - u] s... has. a)
Click Save Be :25.
,
V x
in the Propertylvlnnager, choose to save both
bodies by placing a check in the Save H
m
We“
e
a
column or selecting, the bodies in the graphics a
area i mam
2 « esnunnipa
By default, the new file names will be the same
as the names of the solid bodies.
If necessary, clear Consume cut bodies.
Tip To change the names ofthe new files or the file
menianennnecna
locations, you can duublesclick File column
cells in the PropertyManager or click the flags aw” Wm
in the graphics area. l
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 2
Savlng Solid Bodies
5 Click OK ~/ .
The new pans open in separate document windows. Use Tile
Vertically III from the Windows menu to view them.
Note Only appearances associated with the material of the source part will
automaticany propagate to files created from solid bodies. The Save
Bodies option to Propagate visual properties can be used to include
other appearances in the new files if desired
6 Examine the FeatureManager design tree.
Examine the FeamreManzger design tree of the Nature part. A Save
Bodies feature has been added. This records the point in the part's
history when the bodies were saved. Changes made to the source part
after this feature will not propagate to the saved parts.
7 Make changes to the source
part.
Make the source pan, Boat
Cleat, active.
Click Combine O.
Subtract the Core from the
Pattern.
The results are shown in a Boat cleat
section view for c1arity.
8 Examine the Pattern part.
The change made to the source
part did not propagate to the
saved files.
Pattern
59
Lesson 2 sounwoRKs
Savlng Sulld Bodles
9 Rollback to make a change.

Activate the source file, Boat meat, unce more.
Move the rollback bar to just before the Save Bodies feature.
10 Add an Extruded Cut.
Use the Hole Sketch to
create an Extruded
Cut fi , Through All.
11 Roll [0 End.
Move the rollback bar
to the end of the
FeatureManager design
tree.
12 Examine results.
Activate the Core and Pattern part documents to explore the results.
Since the cut feature was added before the Save Bodies feature, the
holes are included in the saved documents.
Fallem Core
13 Save and close all files.
Modeling for When modeling a part it is tempting to think only ufhow the finished
Rapid Tooling part will be. But by considering how to make the part ready for
manufacturing from the start, you ran ofien minimize the cost and time
needed for detailing and tooling.
one way you can leverage your CAD model is to prepare it for the
rapid creation ortooling, as in the example ufthe Boat Cleat. By
utilizing multibodies, you can model the necessary sand cores (interior
(the outer shape, prior to secondary operations),
ual parts, and still have the finished, :Lsrmachined
version ofthe part. This is the quickest and least expensive path from
design to the delivery ufthe finished castings. For another example, see
Ermine 11:; Modeling for Rapid Tooling on page 83.
70
soLIchlRKs Lesson 2
Saving Solid Bodies
Splitting a Part Sometimes it is easier [0 sun a design as a single pan. Then, nfler form,
into Multiple fit and function are defined, the plan can be split into its individual
Bodies compcnents. This is particularly useful when aesthetics are important.
Split Feature Split alluws you to break a pan into multiple solid bcdies without
removing any material. Splitting tccls can include sketches, faces,
planes, or surface bodies (see the Surface Modeling course for more
infcrmation on surface bodies).
The sum command creates a Split feature in the FeatureManager
design tree cfthe source part. Bodies created from a Split feature can
he saved to new pan documents ifdesired. lfyou delete the Split
feature in the original part, the new parts still exist, but the status cfthe
external reference in the new parts would be dangling.
Where to Find It I Menu: Insert Features, Split m
71
Lesson 2 soLIDwoRKs
Savlng Snllfl aodies
Case Study: We will use the Split feature to split a handle design into the 2 separate
Handle halves that are required to manufacture the part.
Open the part Handle.
Split the part.

Click Splil u).
Trim tools.
Select the Right Plans as
the trim tool.
Cut the part.

Click Cut Part. The system computes the Intersection ofthe trim
tool(s) with the pan and calculates the results.
./l
/
‘/
Resulting Bodies.
The resulting bodies that can be generated from the split are listed in
the PropertyManager. Click the bodies you want to create.
In this case, click bmh resulting bodies.
Note You must select the hudies you are intending to result fmm the split
because in some instances the trim tool may intersect areas ot‘the part
that you dc not wanl afi‘ected by the Split.
72
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 2
Saving Solid Bodies
Saving Split 1n the Split command you have the option to save the resulting bodies
Bodies as individual part files by doubleeclicking in the File cells ofthe
PropenyManager and a igning file names and locations. However,
doing this within the Sp I command is not recommended because if
you edit the split feature later, you will have to remap the saved
bodies. It is a better practice to save the bodies as a separate operanon
using the Save Bodies command.
a c kOK ./.
Complete the Split feature.
7 Saving the bodies.
Click Save Bodi 5.
Choose both bodies.
Doubleclick the cells in
the File colunm ofthe
PropertyManager or use
the flags in the graphics
area to rename the files that
will he created.
Name the bodies Handle -
Left Side and Handle - Right. Side.
Note When you save the bodies you can specify an origin location. lfyou do
not the saved parts have the same origin as the source part
a Propagate visual properties.
Click Propagate visual properties.
This option will include the custom blue appearance in the new parts
that are created.
9 Click OK J .
The new pan files are created.
Note A forced rebuild (ctrlm) of the source part may he required to
properly update appearances.
The next steps would be m finish Nole' View
modeling the details of each part. m‘a‘ed
73
Lesson 2 soLIDwoRKs
Savlng siahd Eodles
Automating an Once the solid bodies have been saved as part tiles, you can use them to
Assembly create an assembly manually using traditional bottomrup assembly
modeling techniques, or you can automate the process. Assemblies can
be automated by using options in tlle Split and Save Bodies
PropertyManagers, or the Create Assembly command can be used.
Create Assembly Create Assembly collects the part files saved by one or more Save
Feature Bodies or Split features and creates a new assembly from them.
Where to Find It I Shortcut Menu: Rightrcllck a Save Bodies or Split feature and
click Create Assembly
I Menu: Insert, Features, Create Assembly
10 Create Assembly.
Switch to the Handle part.
Rightrclick the SaveBodjesl feature and click Create Assembly.
11 Click Browse.
Browse to the folder where you want to save the assembly, and type
Handle Assembly in the File name box.
12 Click Save.
The Save As dialog box eloses and the me name and location appears
under Assembly file in the PropertyManager.
13 Click OK J .
The new assembly document opens.
Note There are no mates in this assembly. Both components are fixed with
their origins at the assembly origin.
ERGO >
g mummy (boundless...
.mmuw
m mum
m wilm
m squirm
L ongm
' Q to Handle linseeqs .> (ann
»
.mmnak Ramadad) sine:
rm Mans.
14 Save and close the files.
7A
SOLIDWORKS ussan 2
Savlng Solid Budies
Case Study: The Split tool can he used for much more than just splitting and saving
Using Split Part bodies. it can also be very useful for working with imported geometry
with Legacy or legacy pans that would otherwise he difficull to change.
Data in the next example, we will modify an imponed part by using the Split
command and multihody techniques to change the geometry as shown.
Belale Niel
1 Open the part

Legacy Data.
This part was
Elna )
memo“ hummus.”
imported from a @ Hm”!
neutral file format.
There is only a single . 5 sun went
imported feature in 5
«enmiiuiva-w
the ‘FeatureManzger %
:33:
design tree. 9 mm
L. om.
- imputed
Cutting planer
To create the trim tool required for the
Split, define a reference plane that is Vertex
1
parallel to the Front Plane and that passes
through the vertex shown.
15
Lesion 2 SOLIDWORKS
sum we:
Saving
Split Pan.
Using the plane cremed in the previous step,
Split 0 the pan imo two separate bodies.
Note The bodies are shown here in difi‘erent colors

for illuslmtiun purposes.
Launch MaveICopy Body.

Click MoveICopy Bodies 9.
Choose the smaller solid body as the Bodies to Move.
Tlp If you don-i remember where in find a eemmehd, you can use the
Search Commands function in file menu bar.
Define
Conslrainls. ? :7 . a0
Use Coincident A
A
and Dislance H '3“me
maies to position the a
body as shown.
“mm A
The dismnce is 8 2:11:

0.75" between the
split faces.
0 mm
(mew
‘J‘i‘ mmm
e i. em
g. wmaeu
Mutt Nnunmrnl
IEI
4 (meme mm
H WW (W W,
76
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 2
Savlng Solid Eddies
6 Bridge the gap with an extruded boss.

Create a sketch on the flat face of the rear
body.
Use Convert Entities ® to cepy the edges
0f the face.
Extrude the sketch using the end conditiun
Up To Next.
Be sure the Merge result check box is
selected.

Insert intn New Fart
Exercise 8: Using the pan provided, create individual parts

Insert into New for the Blender Base and Blender Cup and use
Part them in an assembly. Then modify the source
part to add an lndent feature.
- 1mm mlo New Fan on page 63

I hide!!! Fealum on page 34
Units: inches
Procedure
1 Open part.
Open the existing part menderjoume from the
Lessonoa \ Exercises folder.
2 Insert into New Part.
Use the Insert into New Part command to create 2 new part documents
named menderjase and menderjup.
Use the Propagate visual properties option to include the custom
appearances.
Blenderifiase
ElenaeLCup
3 Create an assembly.
Use the new pans to create an assembly model named
Blendeuissemmy.
78
Insert Into New Pan
4 Modify the source part.

Switch back to the Blenderjuurce.
Add an Indent 0
feature using the
Base as the Target Body and the Cup
as the Tool Body.
Tip Because ofthe multiple tool body
regions created by the ribs cfthe base,
use Remove Selections in the Indent
PropertyManager. Select the top area of
the Cup as the regidn to be removed
from receiving the indent.
Use 0.100" for the wall thickness and
add a clearance of 0.015".
Click OK ./ .
5 Review the child pans and assembly.

Review the BlenderiBase nnd
BlenderiAssembly to review the changes.
Splll Pan ana Save Domes
Exercise 9: Using the pan provided, create

Split Part and multiple parts that are related to
Save Bodies the original.
This exercise reinforces the
following skills:
I Splitlmg it Furl mm
Multiple Bridle? on page 71
I Save Bodim‘ on page 67
I Automating an Assembly on page 74
Units: inches
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing part use
Flash Drive from the
This part represents the conceptual design of the product.
Split the part.
Click Split m.
For the Trim Tool, select the Front Plane. This will separate the cap
from the remainder of the body.
Target Body.
When a model contains multiple bodies, Target Bodies must be
selected for the split. This determines which bodles will be affected by
the split. The use Flash Drive contains both a solid body and a
surface body.
For Target Bodies, select the solid body in the pan.
Click Cut Bodies and select
the 2 Resulting Bodies by
selecting them in the graphics
area.
Click OK \I .
Hide 'V the cap.

Splll Pan and Save Ba :5
5 Add a boss.
Create the sketch shown below and
extrude 2 boss a distance of0.16|l".
6 Show '9 the cap body.
7 Add an Indent feature.

Use the boss to create an Indent 0 in the cap.
Since this lndent will not have thin walls build around the tool body,
use the Cut optiun to achieve the desired result.
No clearance is required.
a Isolate body.
Isolate the cap to see the result ofthe Indent
feature.
9 Exit Isolate.
10 Split the part.

Split Q] the pan to create the upper and lower halves ofthe body. Use
the Parting Surface as the trim tool. The surfnee budy is hidden, but it
can be selected it from the Surface Bodies folder.
Cheese only the 2 hnlves ofthe use body as the resulting bodies fmm
this split. We du not need to split the Cap.
Envy L
81
Split Pan and Save Domes
11 Save Bodiesl
Use the Save Bodies command to create new
part documents and autumatically create an
assembly.
Assign the new parts appropriate names as
shown.
Use the option to Propagate visual
properties ta include appearances in the new
pans.
Use options within the Create Assembly
gmupbox to creme an assembly directly from gamummum
within this command. EIPvnpchmmlmwrmn
m—
0mm lat-hurt
V mm
Team
A
new man mummlsmmmmmu"

7m.“
,
Wm
uxuumm ,nm
rmm
a “alum... am,
mama:
A
MW.“
Ream Kuwait;
mm», mm,
(WWW mm mm El
12 Optional: Modify part documens as desired

SOLIDWORKS Exercise in
Modeling fur Rapid reeling
Exercise 10: Create the Motorcycle (iear

Modeling for Case model with the required
Rapid Tooling tooling in mind.
following skills:
I Multibndy Parts on page 8
- Combining Bodies
on page 25
I Mndelingfar Rapid
.
Manylhankx Instrvc Ptcntlccnt'stcvchrntlcc Deng"
Lnnned fnrpmvldlng lhn example
730mg 0" Page 70 w. Slcycl'lcnucclkngmmm
Units: millimeters
Modeling Strategy
Phase Result
I. Design the “care",
which is the empty
space inside the model.
it provides the critical
clearance data for the
interior components.
2. Design the “pattern"

exterior body, the outer
extents ofthe model.
3. Subtract the Core

body from the pattern
body.
83
Modeling for Rapid Yaallng
4. Apply finish
machining teatnres
Note To begin this exercise with the Core body already completed, open the
pan Morbmcyclefiearfiesejore from the Lessun02\Exerclses
folder and skip ahead to step 10 on page 89.
Procedure
The Core Create the interior negative spaee.
Open an exi ing part.
Open Mommyelefiearjase.sldprt from the
Lessonog \ Exercises folder.
Three ofthe layout sketches are shown below The one lnghlighted m
blue (Gears) represents the pitch eneles ol'the gears. The gray one
(Body) is the parting line ofthe gear ease. The orange one (Bosses)
represents the bosses for the mounting bolts.
Modeling hr Rapid Tooling
2 Outline for care.

Hide the sketches named Gears, Body, Bosses, and Profile from the
Layout Sketches folder.
Show the sketeh named Core Outline. This sketch was made by
convening entities from the Body and Bosses sketches and then
sketching and trimming additional geometry.
3 Exlmde the care.

Extrude the Core Oufijne sketch 50mm upwards and 11mm
downwards, with 2" of inward Bra“ in both directions.
Hide the sketch.
Exemiam 1n SOLIDWORKS
mung In! Rapid Tooling
4 Flues.
Apply 5mm filleis to the vertical
edges.
Tip Use the Edge Selecflon toolbar and
the option Canneded lo slart face
in simplifying selecting edges.
5 Revolver] cut.
Use me sketch Core Faoe Cut is create a revolved cut feature.
soquoRKs Exercise 10
Modeling hr Rapid Tunling
6 Extruded cut.
Use the sketch Core Bridge Cut to extrude a cut 5mm upwards and
Through All downwards.
Apply 2- of man so that the dmfl goes inward in the up direction and
outward in the down direction.
1 Exlmded cut.
Use the sketch Bosses for Gears to extmde :1 Through All cut.
Use the From options to begin the cut Offset Ba5mm above the sketch
plane, with 3" of outward dmfi.
31
Modeling for Rapid fooling
8 Fillfls
Apply 5mm fillecs as shown.
sounwciRKs Eleni” 10
Modeling for Rapld Inniing
9 More fillets.
App1y 2mm miets to the edges shown. Be sure to fillet all four edges
on the underside.
10 Save bodyl
Use the Save Bodies command ta save the body as a separate part and
name it Sand Core.
Note As n reminder, this body represents the "negative" or empty space
inside the finished pan.
11 Organize the FeatureManager design tree.
Multivselect all Ihe features in the tree that make up the body of the
core.
Rightrclick, click Add to New Folder

Features.
I, and rename the folder Core
Tip To multi—select the items in the FeatureMznager design tree you can use
hex selection by pressing the left rnduse button while dragging, or
select the first feature then press the Shin key while seiecting the last
feature in the list.
89
Exemile 1o soLIuwoRKs
Modeling m Rapld Tooling
12 Hlde.
Hlde Q the acre body.
The Pattern Create the outer extents of the model.

13 Extrude the pattern.
Use the sketch Outside Body to extrude a boss 43mm upwards and
11mm downwards. Apply Drall of 2°. Use inward drafi in the up
direction and outward draft in the down direction so that all the drafl
goes in the same direction. Clear Merge results if necessary.
Note With other bodies of the part hidden, new features will have the Merge
Result option cleared by default. Also, hidden bodies will not be
included in the Auto-select option for Feature Scope.
14 Revalved cut.
Use the sketch Outside Revolved Cut to create a revolved cut feature.
SOLIDWORKS Elemise 10
Modeling for Rapld Inaling
15 Extruded cut.
Use the skewh Bridge Cut to exlrude 3 cm 2mm lawn/Ac the body and
Through All away from the body.
Apply 2., Dr Draft so mm the dmfi goes inward in the direction mm:
the body and outward in the direction away from the body.
‘
16 Fillet.
Apply a 2mm fillet to xhe edges shown.
91
Modeling for Rflpld Tualmg
17 More fillets.
Apply 3mm tlllets to the edges shown.
18 Save body.
Use the Save Bodies command to save the body and name it
Body Pattern.
19 FeatureManager folderl
Multi-selecl the features used to create the body of the pattern and add
them to a new folder called Pattern Features.
20 Combine.
Show the Core body and subtract it from the pattern budy.
92
sounwonKs Elemise 10
Modeling in: Rapld Inaling
21 First machi ng operation

Use xhe skewh Surface Machining m creme 3 Through All cm. Pay
attention in which side ofthe material is being removed.
22 Second machining operation.

Use ihe skewh Machined Bosses to create 2 Through All cuL
93
mum; in: Rapld Tooling
23 Third machining operation.

Use ‘he skewh Spot Face to create a Blind cm 18mm deep.
24 Fourth mach ng operation

Use xhe skewh Bearings '0 Create a Blind cu130.50mm deep in farm
Ihe seats for the bearings.
soLIDwoRKS ExAmise 1o
Medeiing In! Rzpid hinting
25 Last machlnlng operallon.

Use the sketch Bolts to extmde a Through All cut Offset 25mm above
the sketch plane [0 form the counterbores fer the mounting bolts.
26 Conclusion.
You now have parts representing the sand core, the pattem for the cast
body, and the finished machined part.
Providing the pattem maker with complete and accurate CAD data
saves time and money.
21 Save and close all files.
95
Modeling In! Rapid Toahng
Lesson 3
Upon successful compleiimi omits lesson, you will be able to:

Identify different types of sketched curves.
Sketch with splines and style splines.
Manipulme spline curvature using spline tools.
Evaluate the curvature of sketch and solid geomelry.
Insen a sketch picture.
Use the Fit Spline command.
97
Lesson 3 soLlDwoRKs
Sketching wnn Splines
Curves in SOLIDWORKS includes several sketch commands that can create

Sketches what we will refer to as “sketch curves". These commands result in
sketch entiites which. in most cases, cannot be duplicated with
analytical geometry made up oflines and arcs. Curve geometry is very
useful for creating smooth organic shapes and some behave very
differently than the sketch geometry we have been working With so far.
The different available sketch curves are summarized below.
in this lesson we will be focusing primarily on the ditteient Spline
commands. Most other sketch curves will be introduced throughout this
course as noted in the table. Curve fllulm‘es, found in the Insert,
Curves menu, are covered in Lesson 5: JD Sketching am! Curve
Fculm‘cs.
Spline Definition: Splines have continuously changing curvature. They are

created by placing points through which the curve interpolates its shape.
Relations and Dimensions: Tangeiicy and Equal Curvature relatiolis
can be added to the spline. Spline Handles can be used for vector related
relations such as horizontal and vertical.
Dimensions can be added to control the magnitude or direction ofthe
curvature at existing spline points and/or a length dimension can be
included to fix the full length ot’tlie spline. Spline points can also be
used in standard sketch relations and dimensions.
For more information: see Slandard SpImt’ on page [04
Style Spline Detin ii: This curve has continuously changing curvature and is
a created by locating points ofa control polygon which the curve fits
{Y within.
Relations and Dimensions: Tangency and Equal Curvature relations
can be captured while sketching or added later. The lines and points of
the control polygon can be used in standard sketch relations and
dimensions.
For more information: see Sivle Sp/UK‘ on page 124
Spline on Surface Defin' ion: When working in a 3D sketch, this command creates a
Spline constrained to a 2D or 3D surface ofa model.
<9
Relations and Dimensions: Same as Splines.
For more information: see Surfing Mnr/clmg course
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
Sketetiing with Splines
Fit Spline De tion: This command traces existing sketch entities With one
continuous spline. This tool is ofien used to smooth out transitions
L. between sketch entities or to combine separate sketch entities into a
single smooth spline.
Relations and Dimensions: Fit Splines can be constrained to the
geometry they trace, unconstrained, or fixed.
For more information: see Fll Spline on page [30
Conic De on: A conic is a portion ofa curve resulting from a plane aiid
cone intersection A conic curve will have no inflections; its curvature
will always be in the same direction. It is defined by locating the 2
endpoints ofthe curve, a 3rd point to set the top apex, and a final point to
define the Rho value controlling the steepness of the curve.
Relations and Dimensions: Tangency relations can he captured
automatically or added. A dimension defining the Rho value can be
added. The points generated for the curve can also be used for standard
sketch relations and dimensions
For more information: see Comm on page 386
Equation Driven Definition: A ZD or 3D sketched ciirve generated from user specified
Curve equations,
fi Relations and Dimensions: Defined by the values resulting from the

equation.
For more information: see Equation Driven CIA/VB on page 293
Intersection Definition: Creates a 2D or 3D sketch curve where surfaces ofa model
Curve intersect. A combination ot'faces, planes. and surface bodies can be used
to generate intersection curves,
@ Relations and Dimensions: Fully defined by the intersecting entities.
A relation oi‘“At intersection oi‘two faces" is automatically added.
For more information: see [HIBAVL’L‘ZIINX Curvy Fen/um on page 269
Face Curves Definition: Generates a mesh of3D curves across a specified face. The
mesh density can be adjusted or options can be modified to limit which
@ curves Wlii be converted to 3D sketches. A vertex can he used to
generate curves from a specific position.
Relations and Dimensions: Options can be used to constrain face
curves to the model or leave them underedeiined.
For more information: see Face Curves on page 270
99
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
sketatung with Spllnes
Using Sketch A picture in a sketch can be a good starting point for advanced part
Pictures designs. Hand drawings or images can be especially useful to reference
when creating sketch curves such as splines. To make use of an existing
image file for reference in a sketch, the Sketch Picture command can
be used.
A Sketch Picture is an image file which has been insened into a 2D

sketch. Sketch pictures are ofien used for reference to trace when
modeling, a part Sketch pictures can he set up in multiple planes,
simulating drawing views in the 30 model.
Sketch Picture When choosing an image to use as a sketch picture, it is best to select
Considerations high resolution, high contrast images. High resolution images provide
crisp lines and edges which are easier to trace.
An image file ofthe format *.bmp, *.git, ‘Jpg, "Jpeg, tut, ‘.png,
*
.psd, or ‘ .wmf can be insened into a sketch as a Sketch Picture. The
image can be seen from both sides, but cannot be seen through solid
geometry.
A sketch picture will show in the FeatureManager design tree as a child
ofthe sketch it is added to. It can be hidden by either hiding the entire
sketch, or it can he selected from the teature manager tree and hidden
independently.
Note Certain types of compression may cause tit or git images to be
unusable by SOLIDWORKS.
Sketch Picture Tools The Sketch Picture PropertyManager allows you to move, romie,
resize, or mirror the image. The sketch picture can also he manipulated
in the graphics area by dragging and utilizing the Scale Tool.
Transparency options exist to allow the use oftransparency settings

from the image file, define a specitied color as transparent, or apply
transparency to the entire image.
Where to Find It I Menu: Tools, Sketch Tools, Sketch Picture a
inn
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
Stretching with Splines
Case Study: For this next case study, we will insert a

Guitar Body picture ofa guitar mm a sketch and scale it
appropriately. Then we will use the picture
as a reference when creating the Guitar
Body profile.
1 New part.
Open a new part using the Pat‘LMM template.
2 New sketch.
Open a new sketch on the Front Plane.
3 Sketch picture.
535mm 0
Click Sketch Picture H. v x
lg
In theLesson05\0ase Study folder select mm
the file Guitar ImageJDg and click Open. ‘5'
7“?
W
The picture comes in with "S (0, 0) coordinate 2
at the sketch urigin and an initial size of 1
pixel per 1mm. since this is a high resolution a
image, the picture comes in very large. Now 'i
that the Width is I I45mm. 9W" ““‘W
Bimini“
Click Zoom to Fit p. I! 1-!
a in".
0 in
7mm
0 ml "mu:
0 my cum
4 Resize the picture.

Make sure Enable scale tool and
Lock aspect ratio are checked.
-—-—-
The line appearing over the
picture is the Scale Tool which ' '
can be used to size the picture.
1M
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
Stretching mm Splines
Drag the lefi point ofthe

scale tool to the lett edge
ofthe guitar body in the
image.
Drag the nrrow at the right
to align it with the right
edge or the guitar body
profile.
Once the nrrow is dropped,
the Modify dialog will
e
some,
x
|
become avnilable to define
the length of the line.
Type 510mm, OK «.
The sketch picture scales along with the line.
h
Note At this point, the Scale Tool arrow can be dragged to dynamically
rotate the sketch picture. If you need to redefine the scale line length,
toggle the checkbox for the scale tool offthen back on agnin in the
PropertyMznager and repeat the steps abcive.
Position the picture. a] Shannan" CD
To take advantage ofthe symmeu'y oflhe

picture we want to center the picture on the
, X
origin.
a .n um
Drag the picture with the left mouse button to 53 2229mm"-
appmximately center the scale line on the origin. g ”and

The Origin X Position in the Sketch Picture 5 ,mggmm
PropenyMznager will be around -27mm. ,3 unblnlainmm
Set the Origin Y Pos on will be around Vin-aluminum
-222.9mm. E tart lwtt‘ nus

d l-rl
l
- . _
a urn.
102
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
stretching with splines
Optional: Make the picture background ,Mmm a

transparent. Nun!
To change the white background ofthe image to 1:341;

be transparent, choose User defined from the Www‘m
Transparency options in the PropertyManager.
Use the Eyedropper
in the image. I ‘ ‘
to pick the white color
I: them new
_
a
W.s
m
Move the slider defining the Transparency tel

the right.
Toggle ottthe eyedmpper in order to make additional changes to the
sketch picture.
Click OK ./ .
Note To access the Sketch Picture PropertyManager again, duublerclick the
image.
Exit the sketch.
Since the information in this
sketch is far reference, we will
keep it separate from the sketch
geometry used for the features
ofthe solid part.
Exit the sketch and renalne it
Picture.
Save the part as Guitar
Body.
Splines The profile ofthe guitar body will be created using a spline.
A spline is a sketch element that interpolates its shape between points.
Splines are very useful for modeling freerform shapes that are smooth
and fair. [Fair is a term often used in boat building. A “fair curve" is
one that is as smooth as it can he as it follows the path it must take
around the hull of a boat; it is free of extraneous bumps or hollows].
sketching with lines and arcs is fine for certain types of geometry, but
lines and arcs are not appropriate for smooth, blended shapes. since
splines have continuously changing curvature, they cannot be
duplicated using lines and arcs. Although splines can be constrained, it
is Very common to leave splines under defined in sketches
SOLIDWORKS has several commands that can be used to generate
splines. We will begin by discussing the basic Spline command.
103
Lesson 3 soLlnwoRKs
Sketcmng with Splines
Standard Spline Splines are defined by a series of points

between which the SOLIDWORKS
software uses equations to interpolate the
curve geometry.
Splines can be modified by edding or
deleting points, moving the points, usmg
the spline‘s cnntml polygon,
manipulating the spline handles at each
point, and/or applying relations and
dimension to the elements ot‘the curve.
Where to Find it - CommandMannger: Sketch > Spline n)
I Menu: Tools, Sketch Entities, Spline
I Shortcut menu: Rightrclick while in a sketch and click Sketch
Entities, Spline
Keep it Simple When creating splines, it's best to keep the eurve as simple as possible.
This usually means using the least number of points needed to achieve
the desired result. in general, place points where ever a change in
curvature directlcm Dr magnitude is required: at the “hills" and
“valleys" otthe anticipated shape.
Once the spline points are located, several spline tools exist to assist
with modifying the spline.
Creating and The recommended worktluw for creating and manipulating a spline is
Manipulating as follows:
Splines
. Create Construction Geometry.

It necessary, set up any
construction geometry that would
be helptul in sizing and
positioning the spline,
Sketch the spline.

was
.
Use as simple a spline as

possible This usually means
keeping the number at spline
points to a minimum.
sin
1M
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
sxetamng with Splines
3. Add Sketch Relations.

Add any required relations and
dimensions to the spline and
spline handles.
. Modiiy using the Control

Polygon and moving points.
Move the spline points as
necessary, either by dragging the
points themselves or by using the
control polygon.
5. Modiiy using the Spline

Handles.
Use the spline handles, llneeded,
to modiiy the direction and
magnitude ottangency
throughout the curve,
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the

desired shape is achieved.
Guitar Body Profile We will create the pmfile for the Guitar Body using the workflow
outlined above. The first steps will be to begin a new sketch and create
construction geometry that can be used to properly size the spline. Then
a spline will be used Io trace the top halfofthe profile. The sp1ine will
require use ofspline tools to achieve the desired shape.
105
Lesson 3 sounwoRKs
Skeflflllllg mm Splines
9 New sketch C.
Create a new sketch on the Front Plane.
Create a horiznntal Cenlerline 'x' and

dimension it as shown.
510
10 Sketch a spline
Click Spline N.
Create the spline by adding points similar to as shown; Capturing the
high end lew points enhe profile.
The endpoints otthe spline are Coincident A with the endpoints 0f
the eonstrnetien line.
11 Cancel the Spline looli

Press Esc or rightaclick and activme the Select I) tool.
Tip To end the spline and keep lhe spline [001 active, you can doubledick
when placing the last paint
106
/
sounwoRKs Lesson 3
Sketehlng with splines
Anatomy of a Splines can be open or Spline Handle

Spline closed. Some key elements
cra spline‘s anatomy are Endpoint
diagrammed in the 7 Control
‘
l
Polygun
illustration to the right. _
Spline Curve
Some nfthe elements
shown , the spline handles ._
and mind pongon . are
Spline Tools which can be
used for manipulating the
spline.
Spline Tools A spline in the SOLIDWORKS snfiwme has several components and
controls. Understanding what controls and analytical tools are available
will help you get the most out ofyctur splines.
Some spline tools are used for manipulating a spline, while others are
used for analyzing the curve. Individual tools will be introduced as we
complete the lesson.
Where to Find It I Menu: Tools, Spline Tools
I Shortcut Menu: Rightrcliek a spline, click the desired tool from the
lnenu
Adding Spline Afier a spline iscreated the next step to manipulate its shape is to add
Relations sketch relations. Relations can he added to either the spline curve itself
or to the spline handles.
Spline Handle Spline handles control the direction and
Basics magnitude for the spline's curvature at
each point. Selecting a spline allows
access to the spline handles in the
graphics area.
l-land1es shown in gray have not been
activated, so the curvature at these points
will change freely as the spline is
moditied. Spline handles are activated by
dragging or by adding relations to the spline.
Once a handle has been activated it
appears in color and is an active
constraint on the curves shape.
1n7
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
Sketchlng with Spllnes
To deactivate a spline handle, select it and press Delete on the

keyboard or clear the Tangency driving option in the spline
parameters (see Spline Parameters on page I 15).
Spline Handle Relations associated with Vectors can be added directly to spline
Relations handles. These include relations such as Horizontal —, Vertical |
,
Perpendicular J_, etc.

Note When adding relations to the spline curve, relations for Tangency
and Equal Curvature K: are available. These will be covered in detail
6
on page 118.
Guinr Body For the Guitar Body, we will add Vertical | relations to the spline
Relations handles at the spline endpoints. This will ensure a smomh transition at
the line of symmetry.
12 Select the spl e.

Select the spline so the spline handles are visible.
13 Select the first spline handle.
Click the spline handle at the Origin so it is selected.
14 Add a Vertical relation.
From the Spline PropertyManager, click Vertical | .
15 Repeat.
Add a Vertical | relation to the spline handle at the other endpoint.
16 Results.
The spline handles at each end are now active. They appear in color and
are driving constraints on the shape ofthe curve.
10E
sounwoRKs Lesson 3
stietening with Splines
Changing the Once the proper relations have been defined, the next step is to tine
Shape of a tune the shape of the spline. In order to keep the spline in its simplest
Spline form, you should first attelnpt to achieve the desired shape by moving
the spline points and using the Control Polygon.
The Control The Control Polygon is tlle series q}
Polygon ofdotted lines that go around the
spline. The points on the Control
Polygon can be dragged to
manipulate the curve while still
keeping it in its simplest form. The
control polygon will move the
spline points, but will not modify
the curvature direction. In
comparison, manipulating the 5.0
Spline Handles does not move the
spline points, but will apply additional direction controls that make the
spline more complex.
Where to Find it I
.
Menu: Tools, Spline Tools, Show Spline Control Polygon
Shortcut Menu: Rightrclick a spline, click
f
Display Control Polygon
Note To have the Control Polygon appear hy default when sketching splines,
go to Options, System Options, Sketch, and check the option to
Show spline control polygon by default.
Manipulating the Besides heing useful for sketch relations, spline handles can also be
Spline Handles dragged to manually modify the shape ofa spline. Modifying the spline
H
handles allows for detailed manipulation ofthe spline, but also adds to
its complexity.
There are 3 drag handles for each spline handle
as shown at the right.
Direction Handle: The diamond direction
handle can be dragged to change the direction of Direction Handle
the curvature at the selected point. Magmmde Handle
. Combination Handle
Magnitude Handle: The arrow magnltude
.
handle can be dragged to increase and decrease the curvature at the

selected point.
Combination Handle: The dot at the end is the combination handle
and will manipulate both the direction and magnitude at the selected
point.
109
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
smelting mm Splines
The cursor reedhaelr in the graphies area will update when hovering
over these handles to assist in identifying their runetions.
”(a be “a.
Spline Handle Spline Handle Spline Handle
Direction Magnitude Combinafinn
np Spline handles at interior spline points can be manipulated

symmetrically by holding the Alt key while dragging.
Note The default settings in SOLIDWORKS are set to automatically have

spline handles turned on. This option ean be modified in Options (39,
System Options, Sketch, Enable Spline Tangency and Curvature
handles.
17 Display the Control Polygonl

Righteclick the spline and click Display Control Polygon
menu.
r from the
18 Manipulate the Control -

Polygon.
Drag the points or the eontrol
polygon to modify the shape of
.i
the spline.
19 Results. ' _
For a closer fit at the bottom ofthe ‘
Guitar, the direction and magnitude

of the curve will need to be
adj sted. We can make this
modification using the spline
handle controls.
110
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
sxetening with Splines
20 Manipulate the Spline Handles.

Drag the spline hand1es at the first
and second sp1ine points to
modify the spline shape.
21 Fine lune the spline.
Continue to modify the spline
using the control polygon and
handles until the desired shape is
achieved.
Fully Defining Splines are typicauy lefi underrdefined since it is diincult to fully
Splines describe them with dimensions. However, to prevent a sp1ine from
being changed, a sing1e Fixed relation can be added to the curve or
Fully Define Sketch can be used to dimension the spline points.
Dimensions can also be used lo 3.00.
define the angle of; handle or
add a tangent weighting value.
Other Spline types such as
Style Splines and Fit Splines
are much easier ‘0 fully define
than the smndard Sp1ine.
Evaluating Skills for evaluating splines are just as important as expertise in

Splines creating and manipulating them. Because splines are highly malleable
entities, it's essential to be aware ufhnw to identify important spline
infurmntion and assess how changes to a spline affect its curvature.
111
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
Spline Evaluation There are several tools available for

Tools evaluating splines. These tools are
\A Shuwlnflectlun Paints
valuable for gathering information I"\ Shaw WWW" “NIH:
about a spline and also for assessing
the quality ofihe curve. All oftllese JShow Curvature Comb:
tools a can be accessed in the Tools, Spline Tools menu or by l’lghlr

clicking a spline.
Show Inflccfinn Displays a “boine” icon at locations along the spline where
Points curvature switches from concave to convex.
SR Especially useful when an inflection is wanted in the curve.
Show Minimum Displays location and value nfthe minimum radius of

Radius a spline. _
ii »
M Especially useful itthe sketch will be used for funher

aperatinns such as ntfsetting, shelling, or similar.
Show Curvature Displays a series ofllnes or combs representing the

Cnmhs curvature ofthe spline where each camh is attached.
if nie scale and density ofthe cnmhs displayed can he

adjusted using Curvature Scale options.
Note Curvature combs can be displayed for any sketch entity, they are not
exclusive to splines.
What is Curvature indicates how much

Curvature? an object deviates from being
straight. Mathematically, l Smaller R :
Hrgher Curvalure
‘ l
curvature is the reciprocal nfthe \\\“l\\ l
,/
radius. Therefore, an arc with a
radius of4 has a curvature of
\\\l\‘ WM
\EM ,W'
1/4, or 0.25. Because ofthis

inverse relationship, a larger
radius value results in lower
curvature, while a small radius
produces higher curvature.
Larger R :
Less Curvature
112
sounwoRKs Lesson 3
Sketch entities such as lines and arcs have constant

curvature. Dimensions can be used to define an
arc‘s radius and therefore its curvature, while a
line has zero curvature (mathematically, its radius
is infinite). Lines and arcs can he tangent to each
other, which technically provides a “smoot "
transition, but because oftllc abrupt change in
curvature where they meet this transition produces
an edge in finished products that can be both seen
and felt.
Splines and other curve elements, however, can

have changing curvature. This means that each
point along the curve can have a ditrerent radius
value. Splines allow tor a unique sketch relation
called Equal Curvature ‘=. This relatictn adjusts
the curvature ot‘a spline to match that of an
adjacent entity providing the smoothest transition
between the two. For more infnmlation, see Equal
Curvature on page I I 8.
Evaluating Curve Curvature combs magnify the .
Quality using curvature along a spline to help

Curvature Combs identify how smooth the curve is.
The combs make variances along
the curve easier to identify, and will
dynamically update as a spline is
lv‘
ill n
modified.
For the Guitar Body example, we
will use curvature combs to assess
the smoothness and quality ofthe
curve we have created.
Note The default colcr ofcurvarure combs has been modified in some
illustrations to make them more visible. This setting can be changed by
accessing Options, System Options, Colors, and modifying the calm
scheme settings for Temporary Graphics, Shaded.
113
Lesson 3 soLlDwoRKs
stretching with Spllnes
22 Turn on Curvature Combs.

Click Show Curvature Combs
[ from the available Spline Tools.
Use the Curvature Scale options in the PropertyManager to adjust the
length and density of the combs as desired.
Note Curvature Scale options only automatically appear the first time
curvature combs are activated. Once the Curvature Scale has been set,
it can modified by selecting Modify Curvature Scale from the
Shuncut menu.
23 Interpret the resulsi

While the curve shown here may be different than the one you have
created, it is probably similar.
in the image shown, we can see the Curve is not very smooth at the
second spline point where we have manually manipulated the spline
handle.
If we wanted to smooth out this area, we could Continue to use the
manipulation tools in the graphics area, or we could make use ofSpline
Parameters (page I 15) or other Spline Modification Tools
(page 116).
114
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
Sketahlng with Splines
Spline Parameters If necessary, modifications to spline handles and the control polygon
can he reset using the Parameters options in the Spline
PropertyManager. when a spline is selected, the Parameters groupbox
allows you to step through the spline points and see information about
their location, tangent weighting, and angle. The Tangent driving
checkbox can be use to activate or deactivate ii spline handle and
buttons here allow the handle to be reset for the selected point, reset all
handles, or relax the spline.
The Relax Spline option will rerpammeterize the spline afier
modifications to the control polygon. In other words, ifpoints of the
spline have been moved by manipulating the polygon, relaxing the
spline will recalculate the curve as if it were originally created with the
points at those locations.
An additional option here allows you to define a spline as
Proportional. Using the Proportional checkbox will allow a spline to
size proportionally when manipulated.
Using Spline Let's use some ofthe Spline Parameters settings to modify the Guitar
Parameters Body spline.
24 Reset the handle.

Select the active spline handle at the second
pm
M a
spline point. M mam
75’
M
From the Spline PropertyManager click Reset
This Handle. I
fl
.( “misuse
25 Results. A an
The handle reverts to its natural state. The Ellingemumlnu
direction and magnitude are reset, but the handle signifies
is still active as a constraint on the curve.
fourth:
will“ “/ ,
'
newton
\\\\l‘ l
115
Lesson 3 soLlDwoRKs
Skeflflllng with Spllnes
26 Manipulate the spline.

Use the Control Polygon and Spline
Handles to manipulate the spline while
maintaining a smooth curve.
difficult to get a close mateh to the
It is
guitar body pieture with the current
controls while still maintaining it smooth
curve. Let's try it different appmach.
27 Deactivate the spline handle.

Select the active spline handle at the
second spline point.
From the Spline PropertyManuger, oleur
Tangent driving.
This denetivates the spline handle.
Other-Spline
Modification Taols
Other available spline tools allow yen
to add additional controls to the spllne ?' Add Tammi)! Comm
6 Add C‘WW‘" C°”"°'
f¢
curve. These tools are available in the
Tools, Spline Tools menu or by lnilrt Spline Potnt
rithtlicking u spline. employer.“
Add Tangcncy Using it: Activate from Spline Tools, click the spline where
Cnntrol you would like additional tangency control.
*f' Result: Adds a new spline point with an active spline

handle.
Add Curvature Using ii: Activate fmm Spline Tools, click the spline
Cnntrol where you would like additional curvature control. k}:
76 Result: Adds a new spline point and aetive spline handle
along with an additional drag handle which can be use to
manipulate curvature.
Insert Spline Point Using it: Activate fmm Spline Tools, click the spline where
F you would like to add additional points. Use Esc or switeh

back in the Select tool to complete adding points.
Resu New spline points are added with no active
controls.
116
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
Simplify Spline Using it: Activate from Spline Tools, use

II'
_
m
vall‘y stave
fi the dialog to adjust the allowable tolerance

for the simplified spline or use the
Smooth button to simplify by removing
simtermppeesm
Innrlvlrlalmm
immanent“ .
4
points. Use the preview to determine an mews :[ cams

acceptable result. The Previous option
returns to the last previewed Curves
Result: The spline is relaxed and/or spline points are removed to
simplify and smooth out the spline.
Inserting a Spline For the Guitar Body, we will add an additional spline point to give us
Point greater control ufthe curve near the bottom of the part.
28 Insert Spine Paint.

Rightcclick the spline.
Click Insert Spline Point K.
Click the spline between the first and
second points to place a new point.
up Spline points can be deleted by selecting them and clicking Delete

from the shortcut menu or keyboard.
29 Cancel the tool.
Press Est: to cancel the Insert Spline Point tool.
30 Manipulate the spline.
Use the control polygon and spline handles to modify the spline.
31 Mirror the s
Once the spline is
satisfactory, use Mirror
Entities Mil to mirror it
across the center line.
32 Extrude the profile
1 00mm.
33 Save and close the

part.
117
Lesson 3 someoRKs
stretching wan Splines
Final Note on It should be noted that there can be multiple methods to achieving a
Creating Splines spline shape By using dih‘erent combinations of number ufspline
points and active controls, there is ofien more than one way to
accomplish a desired shape. Therefore, while there are some best
practices to keep in mind, there is not really a right or wrong answer
when it comes to how a spline is created as long as it accomplishes the
desired shape and is of good quality.
Case Study: Splines do not have to be complex; two point splines can he very useful
Two Point for creating, simple curves and smooth blelids between entities. A two
Spline point spline is simply 2i Straight line until its controls are modified or
relations are added.
To demonstrate this, we will create a two point spline to provide a
transition between 2 lines. We will use this example to explore using an
Equal Curvature relation and how to use curvature combs to evaluate
transitions between entities.
Equal Curvature For the smoothest connections between entities, splines support a
sketch relation called Equal Curvature ‘= . This means the spline will
match the curvature ot‘the adjacent entity where they meet.
1 Open an exi ing part.

Open 2 Point Splinesldprt from the Lessan03\Ca.se Study
folder.
Skelch a spline.
sketch 2! 2 point spline connecting the
lines.
I!)
118
sounwoRKs Lesson 3
Sketcmng iintn siiiines
Add Tangent and Equal Curvature

relations.
Add a Tangent ()s relation in the lower line
and Equal Curvature E: to the upper line. I”
Note When entities match in curvature, they are
also automatically tangent. Notice a tangent
relation is added along with the equal
curvature relationt Equal curvature is also
nmated with an additional “curvature
control" arrow in the graphics area.
Li.
Evaluating Besides l‘lg the smoothness ofa curve, curvature cman are also
Continuity with very usetul tor evaluating transitions between entities. Curvature
Curvature Combs emnhs at a shared endpoint provide valuable information for
recognizing continuity conditions. Continuity describes to how curves
or surfaces are related to each other. In SOLIDWORKS, [here are 3
available types ofcontiniiity:
I Bonnet: Curvature combs at shared endpoint are in
different directions.
I Tangent: Curvature combs at a common endpoint are

collinear (indicates tangency), but ordirrerent lengths
(different curvature values).
119
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
Sketclmlg with Spllnes
I Curvature Continuous: Curvature combs at

common endpoint are collinear and of equnl length.
Note lfelenients are not in Contact, there is no continuity , they are

discontinum. For more information on Continuity conditions, see the
Surface Modcting course.
Tip Curvature combs can be displayed with c bounding curve
across the too ofthe combs to assist in recognizing \
continuity conditions and minute changes in curvature.
You can turn on the bounding curve in Options, System
Options, Sketch and checking the opticm Show
curvature comb bounding curve.
4 Show cuwature combs.

Show Curvature Combs
! to magnify the
difierence in curvature at the ends of the /i
spline.
§\\
Where Equal Curvature is defined, the
splines curvature is blending down to zem
to match the line.
5 Extrude a Thin Feature.
Use the sketch for an extruded thin feature with
10mm thickness and 50mm depth.
120
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
Sketening with epiines
Analyzing Solid The curvature conditions created in sketches propagate to the features
Geometry where they are used. SULIDWORKS includes evaluation tools that can
be used to analyze the solid geometry ofcomplex pans. Using lliese
tools allows us to evaluate the quality of surfaces and how surfaces are
blending together. We will display Curvature and use Zebra Stripes to
evaluate how the different relations ofthe spline have afl‘ected the faces
nftliis simple pan,
Display Curvature Displaying curvature will render faces ofa model in diirereni colors
according to the local curvature values. Red represents the largest
curvature areas (smallest radius) and black represents no curvature
(planar areas). When displaying, curvature the cursor will display a flag
identifying the curvature and radius ofareas.
Where to Find It I
I
CommandMnnager: Evaluate > Curvature
Menu: ew, Display, Curvature I
I Shoncut Menu: Righieclick a face and click Curvature (the menu
may need to be expanded to see this command)
Display Curvature.
Click Curvature I,
Notice wliere Equal Curvature has been defined,
the colors blend together. Where there is
tangency between the faces. there is a drastic
change in color where they meet.
Hover the cursor over areas of the model to View
the curvature and radius values at any location.
Turn off curvature display.
Click Curvature
curvature display.
I again to turn ot‘fthe
121
Lesson 3 soLtDwoRKs
Sketcmng with Spllnes
Zebra Stripes Zebra Stripes can be used to evaluate how strips of light will reflect
offfaces era model. They can be used to analyze the quality cra
surface and how adjacent faces are blending together. Zebra stripes will
display differently depending on if faces are simply in contact, tangent
to each other, or curvature continuous.
I Contact e the stripes do not match at the boundary.

. ,
Tangent the stripes match, but there is an abrupt change in
direction or a sharp corner.
I ,
Curvature continuous the stripes continue smoothly across the
boundary. Curvature continuity is an option for face fillets.
Tangent Curvature
Continuous
Contact
Where to Find It I CommandManager: Evaluate > Zebra Stripes

I Menu: ew, Display, Zebra Stripes
I Shortcut Menu: Righteelick a face and click Zebra Stripes (the
menu may need to be expanded to see this command)
I
8 Shaw Zebra Stripes.
Click Zebra Stripes
Adjust the Zebra Stripes Properties in the
PropertyManagcr to increase the number of stripes
and make them Vertical stripes.
Note The Zebra Stripes Properties will only appear the
first time the command is launched. These options can
he access again from the Shortcut menu it'required.
As you rotate the part, the reflections move over the
faces.
9 Switch to a Back View.
Change the View Orientation to a Back View 3.
From this view, it is easy to see the dirference in the
transitions between the faces.
10 Turn off Zebra stripes.
122
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
Surface Curvature Curvatures combs provide anmher way to dbsmur-mncmb- @

Combs analyze faces in a pan. Surface Curvature 4 x
Combs can be displayed in 2 ways:
I Persistent
This option displays a mesh of curves with
curvature combs across selected faces. The
density of the mesh can be adjusted as well
as the directions displayed and colors orthe {um-c DWI-1 A
combs. El Mam preview
m none
I Dynamic r at
This option displays curvature combs on a
a tumor whim
_
surfaces as the cursor moves over faces of
M names I
the pan.
mm",
The scale and density ofthe curvature comhs tor m Dlmdlun 2
both options can be adjusted in the same way as

sketch curvature comhs from the
PropertyManager.
Where to Find It I Menu: View, Display, Surface Curvature Combs 4%

I Shoncul Menu: Righmlick a face and click Surface Curvature
Combs (the menu may need to he expanded to see this command)
11 Show surface curvature combs.

Righteclick the face of the pan as shown and select
Surface Curvature Combs 6%.
Adjust the options in the PropertyManager as
desired.
Click OK v .
123
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
Style Spline The Style Spline is anoiher type of

spline entity that can be created. It is
sketched by placing the points ofa
surrounding polygon rather than
points that lie along the curve.
The style spline does not have spline
handles, hut relations and dimensions
can be added directly to the lines and
points ofthe surrounding polygon
This allows style splines to easily he
fully defined and made symmetric (tor
more information on symmetrical
splines, see Exercise 16: ()val Frml Drawer Pull on page [71).
Additionally, by using only the polygon to manipulate the curve, the
style spline creates a smooth curve with minimum inflection However.
creating an exact shape with a style spline can he challenging.
Where to Find it - CommandManager: Sketch > Spline Flyout IV >

Style Spline N
I Menu: Tools, Sketch Entities, Style Spline
I Shortcut Men : Righleclick while working in a sketch, Click

Sketch Entities, Style Spline
Case Study: The handle oftlle watering can pictured below will be created with a
Watering Can Style Spline. The remainder of the model will be completed as an
Handle exercise in a later lesson.
124
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
Sketnhlng with Splines
Open the part named WatefingcalliHEIldle from the

Lesson05\Case Study folder
The Handle Sketch is active and contains construction geometry and
dimensions for the layout of the handle.
l
l
12750
L5w L ~—l
3.750
l2.750 —
2 Style Spline.
Click Style Spline N.
Style Spline Types Style Splines suppon several different Spline

Types. The Insert Style Spline E5 E e O
rimwesiee ere
PropenyManager can be used to select a Bezier .Ix
curve or B»Spline curves of varying degrees.
Bezier Curves will produce the smoothest Hm A
possible spline, but do not offer as much

control. BrSplines will more closely fit the new»: A
e inner
pulygun that is created and may be easier to fit .
‘Bspllm Dmlu!
,ernn.» menir
to an exact shape. o swine menu
Splines and Style splines are interchangeable.
A Spline enn be convened to a Style Spline and
vice versa. A Degree 3 B-Spline Style Spline type would be able to
direet1y ccmven to a Spline. The higher the degree of BrSpline, the
more relaxed the curve will be.
Tip Access Help ® from the Insert Style Spline PropertyManixger to
view examples ofthe different Spline Types available.
125
Lulu" 3 SOLIDWORKS
Skzmmng mm Splines
3 Create a Bezler Style Splinel

Create the Bezler style spline by placing poims of the Control polygon
similar to as shown. The ends of the style spline are attached to [he
constmcu‘un geometry.
1-— ——l
mu
12.750
4 Add relations to layout geometry

Add Coincident /\ relations between the canstrucu‘an geomeu-y and
the style spline as shown.
126
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
sxemnng mm Splines
5 Add relations to control polygon.

Add Vertical I , Horizontal —, and Coincidenl /\ relations to the
control polygon of the style spline as shown.
l2.750
I” L ~—l
aim
12.750 >
Style Spline Tools Style Splines use many oftlie Seledzd Emily [5|er Splines)
r
‘
same evaluation lools as standard
splines. The uniquetools and Insertcwo'Vmex
options for style sniines are as Showlnfleztlun Point:
defined balow-
fl ShmlI/_Mmlmum Radius
g, comma Spline
! snow Curvature Comb:
Insert Control Allows for additional venices to be added to the control polygon at
f
Vertex selected locations.
Note: Comm] venices can be removed from the polygon by selecting
them and using Delete X from either the keyboard or shoneut menu.
Convert To Spline Convens a style spline to a standard spline in order to provide more
controls.
N],
N Note: A standard spline can also be convened to a style spline using a
similar command: Convert to Style Spline M
127
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
Sketclung with Spllnes
Local Edit This option in the Style Spline PropenyManager mm

allows modifications to he made to the style spline Lineman"
without atl‘ectmg any adjacent under defined L rm. Mm
entities.
(mm:
mm
in. degree t
~l
.
Curve Degree This option allows for the number of control points mm
ofthe polygon to be changed from the gamma...
Uncommon
PropertyManager.
This option will only be available for modification (WM-r
before constraints are added to the style spline law-w: v
6 Insert Control Vertex.

To add additional curvature control near the from ofthe handle, an
additional control vertex will be added.
Rightrclick the style spline or control polygon and click Insert Control
Vertex ? .
Click on the control polygon to add a new vertex. Press ESC or activate
the Select h tool to finish.
Add Vertical | and Coincident A relations to the control polygon

segment as shown.
,7,,,,,,,.,,,, l
h
l
.
l
.
.
. .
12E
soLIDwoRKs Lemon 3
Skmhing m Splins
1 Add dimenslonsl
Add dimensions to the control polygon to fully define the style spline.
a Optional: Show curvature combs

Use Show curvature Combs
I to evaluate the style spline.
129
Lesson 3 sounwoRKs
Fit Spline Fit Spline is another tool available for generating a spline curve. Flt
Splines are the best tool to use to constrain a spline to specific
dimensions.
The Fit Spline command is used to trace multiple sketch entities with
one continuous spline. One technique to easily create a constrained
spline is to first sketch 2 chain of fully defined lines and arcs and then
use the Fit Spline command to constrain a curve to that geometry.
The F't Spline command is also very useful for moothing out
transitions between existing geometry or combi rig multiple entities
into one.
Where to Find It l Menus: Tools, Spline Tools, Fit Spline L
—s~lL
When acommand is not easily
Tip
accessible from the available
M Q, _
_ m a x
Ms L}
toolbars, consider activating it .9 2mm
from the command search.
Case Study: ln this next case study, we will ,_‘ , .. .
Coffee C u p modify a model ofa coffee cup to
create smooth continuous races for
the port.
1 Open part.
Open the existing part Coffeefiup from
the LessonOS\Case study folder.
130
sounwoRKs Lesson 3
sxetemrrg wflh Splxnes
Evaluate lhe geometry.

The main faces ofthe Cup feature have
been created with a line and tangent area
Tum on Zebra Slripes to see how this
affecLs reflections across the faces.
To smooth out the transition here while still
holding the required dlmenslons nfthe
cofiee cup, we will use (he Fil Spline moi
lo modify the sketch.
Tum ol‘fZebra Slripes

I.
Edil skelch.
Select lhe Cup feamre and click Edil Sketch Q
Tip Features and sketches can be selected
‘3
for editing from the FeamreMnnager ‘2‘}1'1
Tree, by selecting a face oftlie feature, “ puke?“ 5
(If by using breadcrumbs Use the “d"
key on the keyboard to move
s cm IW,
as L,
breadcrumbs to your cursor location.
Fit Spline.
<le 00
Click Fit Spline L. ,
Select the vemeal hue and are 1
from the graphics area. l
’19)70L R50
131
Lesson 3 someoRKs
Sketcmng with Spllnes
Fit Spline In the Fit Spline PropertyManager,options in the Parameters groupbox

Parameters are detailed below:
I Delete geometry , removes the original L. M,“ m
geometry from the sketch. Using this
, x ,.
checkbox will void any options for
constraining the spline.
ammneltnnemm
A.
I Closed Spline . creates a closed loop L'“‘W”‘l"l

spline, regardless ifthe selected chain of 'ZZCL‘H'IEN
entities a closed loop. M

M“ ”W
I Constrained . constrains the new spline to
the original geometry in the sketch using a Mm A
Fit Spline relation. The original sketch “i 3W ,_-

geometry convened to construction
is tnotmtm
geometry.
I unconstrained , the original sketch
Pm W
mtrflzmonpolntl
A
geometry convened to construction, but

is Whitman.
no relation is created to the new Spline. WWW
I Fixed . the spline is created with a Fixed
relation. The original sketch geometry is convened to construction.
Fit Spline The Tolerance options of the tit spline can be adjusted to define how
Tolerance closely the spline will match the existing entities. The allowable
tolerance can be adjusted, the actual tolerance is shown in gray.
Adjust Fit Spline Parameters.

Clear the Closed Spline option; this will be an open spline.
Click Constrained, it‘ necessary.
Adjust the Fit Spline Tolerance.

Modify the Fit Spline Tolerance to be 1mm.
Note Loosening the tolerance will provide a smoother transition between the
line and arc,
132
SOLIDWORKS ”son 3
sxetemng wnn Splines
7 Resulls.
Click OK v/ .
The new spline is constrained

with Fit Spline relations io the
criginal geometry. This ensures
ifihe dimensions controlling
the lines and am change, the
spline will update as well.
8 Exit Sketch.
Exit the sketch 6 to rebuild the feature.
Since there continuous
is now a single, curvature
entity making up the outside oftlle cup, there is
une continuous smomh face resulting in the
feature.
9 Evaluate the model.
Display Zebra Stripes to evaluate ihe
changes tc the model.
Tum ofthebra Stripes I.
The handle ofthe CoffeeJEup will be
ccmpleted in the exercises following this
lesson.
133
Lesson 3 soLlDwoRKs
Skemhlng mm Spllnes
Splines Summary The dli‘ferenl spline lypes are well suited for dlil‘erem design snuanons.
The table below Summanzes some characierisilcs oflhc spline
commands lmmduced ln Ihls lesson:
I Useful for iraclng complex curves.

Spline m l Highly modifiable.
(page 104) I Call include many inflecnon polms.
I Nol easy in fully define.
W1“ 51"“ N
V V _ I (‘reales smooth curves wnh minimum inflecnon.
I Easy in fully define and make symmemeal
(“3“ 124)
I Manipulanon may be lime consumlng I0 genemm ml exacl shape.
I Easiesi way In constrain a spline lo specific dimensions.

Fit Spline L Useful for combining mulliple sketch enmles inm one.
(page 130)
I Useful for smoollllllg om lransitions between enmles.
134
FleurdeJIs
Exercise 11 : In this exercise you will add an

Fleur-de-lis image to a SOLIDWORKS part as
a Sketch Picture, then trace the
image with splines to create the
model profile.
following skills:
I leltg Sketch Pictures on
page 100
- Splines on page 103
I Creating and Manipulating
Splines on page 104
- Adding Spline Relations on
page 107
- Case Study: Two Point Spline
on page 1
18
Units: millimeters
Procedure
New part.
Open a new port using, the PartiMM template.
New sketch.
Sketch picture.
av skin me o
Click Sketch Picture a. x
In the LessonOmExercises folder select the file Item A
F1eur-de-lis.jpg and click Open. g 1th

a tintmm
or
The picture comes in with its (0, 0) coordinate at
the sketch origin, an initial size of 1 pixel per
Q title
1mm. Since thi is a high resolution image, the a ianntm
picture comes in very large. Note that the Height
17 Emble sulemal
is 1600 millimeters.
methylene
Click Zoom to Fit ,0. .i-l l:-:l
rim an, inn.

,.
135
Exercise 11 soLtioRKs
Fleur—de-lis
4 Resize the picture. - - .

Make sure Enable scale tool and
Lock aspect ratio are checked.
The line appearing over the picture is
the Scale Tool.
Drag the lefi point ofthe scale tool to
the top point ofthe picture profile.
Note You can scroll the middle mouse
wheel to zoom in while dragging.
Drag the armw at the right to make the

scale line venical and in line with the
bottom point ofthe picture pmfile.
Once the arrow is dropped, the Modify
dialog will become available (0 define
the length of the line.
Type 200mm, OK .z.

The sketch picture scales aluiig with
the line.
Note At this point, the Scale Tool arrow can be dragged to dynamically
rotate the sketch picture. if you need to redefine the scale line length,
toggle the checkbox for the scale tool offtheii back on again in the
PropertyManager and repeat the steps above.
136
Fleume—lis
5 Position the picture. a] smooth... 0:

To take advantage ofthe symmetry of the picture
v x
we want to center the picmre on the origin.
””35"
i. 7
Zoom out so you can see both the picture and the g new
origin nfthe part. fl einu flullrrm
Drag the pieture with the left mouse button to g nnnvew
approximately center the scale line cm the origin. i IISSZEZITUMM
The Origin X Position in the Sketch Picture in Its minim
PropertyMznager will be around -9s.3mm. l7 Emele not on

u ien non rm:
Set the Origin Y P05 n to -100mm. 1
l'i i'u‘
month, A
1 mi we.
a User ram
ill
I: Home ohm
ii
to
6 Make the picture background transparent.

To change the white background of the image to be transparent, choose
User defined from the Transparency options in the FropertyManager.
Use the Eyedropper
/ to pick the white color in the image.
Move the slider defining the Transparency to the right.
Toggle offihe eyedmpper in order to make additional changes to the
sketch picture.
Click OK J .
Note To access the Sketch Picture PropertyManager again, doubleeclick the

image.
7 Exit the sketch.
Since the information in this sketch is for reference, we will keep it
separate from the sketch geometry used for the features ot‘the solid
part.
Exit the sketch and rename It Picture.
137
Exercise 11 someoRKs
Fleur—de-lls
8 Sketch on the Front Plane.

()pen a new sketch on the Front Plane.
Sketch a vertical Centerline w." through the Origin.
Add dimensions to fully define the line as shown.
¢\
9 sketch a spline.
Click Spline A].
Starting at the centerline's endpoint, sketch 2 3
point spline over the first ponion ofthe image
Note There are multiple ways to accomplish this shape,
but due to the changing curvature , more flat at the
top then changing from convex to concave , at
least 3 points on the spline are required.
10 Display the control polygon.

Click Display Control Polygon f.
13E
sounwoRKs Elemise 11
Fleume—lis
11 Adjust the spline.

Drag the spline and polygon points to adjust
the spline as necessary.
The control polygon allows the spline to be
manipulated while still keeping it in its 1%
simplest form. To change the curvature
diteetion at the ends, howevet, we will need
10 use the spline handles.
12 Fine tune the spline.

Adjust the spline handles at each end to make the
A
spline conform to the image.
13 Repeal.
Repeat step 11 and step 12 to adjust the spline as
necessary.
14 Continue sketching splines.

Continue using splines to tiaee the picture; one spline for each segment
ofthe image similar 10 as shown.
139
Examine 11 souuwoRKs
Fleur-AME
15 Last segment
The last segment requires a relation to ensure the transition to the
symmetrical half will be smooth.
Sketch a two—point spline, then activate the lower spline handle. Use
tlle PropertyManager to add 3 Horizontal — relation to the handle.
Adjust the spline to properly trace the segment.

16 error.
Box select all entities in the sketch.
Click error Entitles H41.
Right-click the Picture sketch and click Hide 1‘ .
Mn
FleurdeJIs
17 Exlrude.
Extrude the skexch Mid Plane,
15mm, wi‘h a dmfi angle «20°.
Optional: Add 2mm fillets tn the
edges as shown.
1M
Soda some
Exercise 12: in this exercise you will model a 2002. (59ml) soda
Soda Bottle bottle. Since these bottles are filled and handled by
automated equipment, the bottom of the botlle and the
neck are standard parts. Your task is to design the area
in between. It is this portion ofthe bottle that gives it
its look and feel, and establishes the branding, for the
soft drink company.

- Using Insert Pm on page 18
- Locate Part and Move/Copy Bodim‘ on page 21
- Intersect with Solid Bodies on page 31
- Cairn/«ting Internal Volume on page 33
Units: inches or centimeters, your choice
Procedure
New part.
Decide whether you want to build the part using English or metric
units. Then open a new pan using the appropriate template and name it
Soda Bottle.
Note The illustrations in this exercise have the material PET, transparency of
0.2, and the color green applied.
Insert bottle bottom part.
Click Insert, Part g.
Browse to the Lesson03\EXePCises
folder and select the part Bottle Bottom.
This part was created from a neutral
fonnzt tile.
For Transfer options, select Solid
bodies.
Clear Locate part with Move/Copy
feature.
Click OK ./ to position the Bottle Bottom at the Origin.
142
Soda same
3 Insert bottle neck part

Click Insert, Part g.
Browse in the Lesson03\Exercises
folder and selecl the pan Bottle Neck.
Check Locale part with Move/Copy
feature.
Click OK J .
Locale part.
This part was built with the tap of the neck at
the urigin.
When the Locale Part PropertyManager
appears, translate the part 3.75" (22.2cm) in
the positive Y direction.
Click OK ./ .
143
Soda some
5 Sketch.
Open a sketch on the Front Plane.
Using a combination ofsplines and other sketch
geometry, sketch the profile ofthe bottle. The shape
is up to you. Be as conservative or outlandish as
ynu wish. Use your imagination. Be creative.
You will need a centerline because this is going to
be a revolved, thin feature.
Pay attention to how the splines connect to the
bottom and neck of the bottle.
6 Create a revolved thin boss feature.

Click Revolved BosslBase a. I!
Click No to the message regarding closing the
‘
sketch; this will be 2 Thin Feature.
‘-
Set the Thickness to 0.012" (fl.|)3cm) and verify
that the thickness s being applied to the inside of
the bottle.
Make sure Merge result is checked.
Click OK w i
7 Explore the Solid Bodies folder.
There should be only one solid body in the folder. If "
there are more, check your sketch and the thin
feamre for errors.
144
Soda Bottle
/ \ /'
8 Check the volume.
Create a new plane offset from the Top Plane
7.5" (19.ncm).
K
Click Intersect a.
Select the new plane and the body of the bottle.
Click Create internal regions.
Click Intersect in the PropertyManzger.
Click OK ./ .
9 Isolate the new body.
There are new 2 solid bodies in the part: one is
the bottle and the other represents the internal volume the bottle can
hold.
Isolate the internal volume body.
10 Mass properties.
Click Evaluate > Mass Properties ‘B.
Click the solid body to evaluate its properties.
ltyuu are working in English units, the volume should be
36 cubic inches.
In metric units, the volume should be 591 cubic
centimeters.
fin You can also change the Options in the Mass
Properties dialog to use custom units for volume such as
liters or fluid ounces.
11 Modify the bottle shape.
If the volume is incorrect, edit the sketch of
the revolved feature and adjust the shape.
Tip Consider using InstantSD § and showing

the sketch in the graphics area. With
lnstant3D turned on, you can drag underr
defined entities without editing the sketch.
This allows you to see the model geometry
update in real~time.
145
spiine Fractlce
Exercise 13: [n this exercise you will use splines to

Spline Practice trace n sketch pictures ofthe four
playing card suit symbols: spades,
lieans, diamonds, and clubs.
Thls exercise relnfnrces the following
skills:

- Slv/c Spmie on page 124
- Mung Sketch Pic/mes on page 100
Units: millimeters
Procedu re
New part.
Open a new part using the Pat-LMM template.
New sketch.
Open a new sketch on the Front Plane. Name the sketch Picture
Sketch picture.
Click Sketch Picture El.
Browse to the LessunOS\EXePcises folder. Select the file
Card Suit Symbolstbmp and click Open.
Scale and position.
Make sure Lock aspect ratio is checked,
Scale and position the image as desired. You can use the
PropenyManager or you can drag and resize the image in the graphics
window.
Exit the Picture sketch.
Start a new sketch.

Trace.
Trace the sketch picture using
splines and other sketch entities as
necessary. Take advantage of
symmetry by mirroring where
appropriate,
I.
145
sounwoRKs Exercise 13
Spllne Panama
8 Check sketch.
Check the sketch for any gaps or Intersectmg contours.
Click Tools, Sketch Tools, Check Skelch for Feature Select
BaseExtI’ude for Feature usage and chck Check.
Are there gaps where the ends of consecmive splmes are not
coincident? Are there are i where splines cross over themselves or
neighboring splines? Inn is the cases fix me sketch
9 Extrude.
Extrude (he Sketch.
Optional: Apply appearances m the bodies ofl‘ne pan.
10 Save and close the parl.
LV
Q
147
Cullen Cup Handle
Exercise 14: In this exercise, use Fit Spline to

Coffee Cup create the handle ofthe coFfee cup as
Handle a smooth continuous face while
holding specific dimensions.
following skills:
- Fit Spline on page 130
I Intersect with Solid Bodies on
page 3]
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing part earreefiupjandle from the
LessonOmExemises folder.
New sketch.
Begin a new sketch on the Right Plane.
Offset silhouette edge.
Click Offset Entities [E_.
Offset the silhouette edge of the
cup 2.5mm.
Change the entity to be
construction geometry.
Create handle profile. ~
Create the profile of the

handle using a
horizontal line and 2
tangent arcs.
The endpoint of the
bottom are is
Coincident with the
endpoint ofthe otl‘set
edge.
Dimension as shown.
in
some Cup Handle
5 Fit Spline.
Use the Fit Spline L
tool m trace the line
and arcs with one
continuous smooth
spline.
Create an epen,
constrained spline
using the default
tolerance.
"w
6 Thin Extrude.
Use the sketch for 21 Thin Extruded Boss fl feature.
Extrude Mid Plane, 15mm.
Clear Merge Result t0 create the feature as a separate body.
Use 6.5mm for the thin rennire thickness and make sure the material is
being added inside the profile.
Click OK J and rename the feature Handle.
7 Intersect.
Take a look at the inside of the Cup.
Faces ofthe Handle are protruding
into the Cup.
Use Intersect
a to add the
bodies together and exclude this
Z
region of the Handle.
149
Cullen Cup Handle
8 Add filleIst
Add Full Round Fillets E to the top
face of the Cup and the front and back
of the Handle.
Add a 12mm filletto the bottom inside
edge or the cup (purple).
Add 3mm fillets to the outside nee of
the cup (green).
Optional The remainder of this lesson is optional and is focused on adding a

decal to the model.
9 Add a Decal.
To add the logo to the side of the cup, you can use a Decal. Decals
apply an image onto faces Ufa model.
.
In the Task Pane at the right, click the Appearances, Scenes, and
Decals tab, then click Decals E .
Scroll down in the lower pane to view the available decals in the
library.
Find the DS SolidWorks Transparent image and drag
it onto the outside face of the Cup.
35W
mmmummmplm
150
_
entree Cup Handle
10 Decal properties.
In the PropertyManager, select the Mapping tab.
mm A
{mm-int
.
In the Mapping options, change the angle About
Axis to so the image faces to the right. Change
the Along Axis value to -15mm to move the
image vertically along the face.
For the SizeIDrienlation options, clear the
checkbox for Fixed aspect ratio.
ghee "Denim
Change the width to 37.5mm and the height to H mm m minim
35mm. “we seiemon
W
Hm
E mum
Click OK J .
in mm a
”when m i
Q mum i i i
3
ei
mimmmwi,
Dmmiwmnw
Duel Sale
Note Existing decals can be accessed and modified

from the DisplayManageL
151
Fun wllh Splines
Exercise 15: In (his exercise you will use splines to

Fun with imce a sketch picture of your chausing.
Splines This exercise reinfurces the following
5 s:
- Curm m Sketchm on page 98

- Mung Sketch Pic-lures on page 100
Units: millimeters
Procedure
1 New part.
Open a new part using the FartiMM template.
2 New sketch.
Open a new Sketch on the Front Flame. Name the Sketch Picture.
3 Skelch picture
Click Sketch Picture a.
Browse to (he Zodiac Signs {Older in the LessDDOS\Eer‘cises
folder. Selecl one of the 12 zodiac symbols and click Open.
Q?
Aries Taurus Gemini
March 21-April 19 April 20—May 20 May 21-June 21 June 22-July 22
if? Leo
July 2&Augu5122
Virgo
Augu5123»Seplember 22
Libra
6
Seplembei 23-06%! 23
5/, Scorpio
Celebs! ZS-Navember 21
ESagiimius
November 22-Deoember 21
I
Capricorn
December 22-January 19
t
I
Aquarius
January ZO-Febmary 18
Pisces
February 19-March 20
152
Fun wmt Splines
4 Transparency.
All ofthe images have a black background. Make the background
transparent.
ln theSketch Picture PropenyManager, under Transparency, click
User defined.
with the eyedropper cursor 1,
sample the black background.
Set Matching tolerance to 0.00 and Transparency to 1.00.
Toggle offthe eyedmppcr to switch back to selection mode.
5 Scale and position.
Make sure Lock aspect ratio is checked.
Scale and position the image as desired. You can use the
PropenyManager or you can drag and resize the image in the graphics
area.
If the image has symmetrical elements in it. Gemini for example, you
should center the image on the Origin.
With an arbitrary shape like such as Virgo, there is no compelling
reason to position the image in any particular spot relative to the origin.
6 Exit the picture sketch and open a new sketch.
Open a new sketch on the From Plane.
7 Trace.
Trace the sketch picture using splines and other sketch entities as
necessary.
Tips I Sketch long curves as a single spline, then sketch the intersecting
entities and trim. This ensures a consistent tlow along the long
curve. For example, sketch the crown oftlle head ofTaums as a
single spline, then trim at the horns.
. Remember you can use other sketch geometry. For example, use a
line, instead nfa spline, for the arrow in Sagittarius.
8 Check sketch.
Check the sketch for any gaps or intersecting contours. Repair any
errors.
9 Extrude.
Extrude the sketch.
153
Fun mm Splines
154
Lesson 4
Introduction to Sweeping
Upon successful complenon ofthls lesson, you will be able m:

I Creme boss and cm features by sweeping.
I Understand (he Plerce rclmion.
I Create a sweep with guide curves.
I Creme :1 muhthckness shelll

I Use me SelecllmlManageL
155
Lesson 4 sounwoRKs
lnlmducfinn ta Sweeping
3
Sweeping A swept feature, either a boss or a cut, is created by moving a profile
alung a path. A sweep can he simple or complex.
Not to scale
To generate the swept geometry, the system creates a series of

intermediate sections by repl ating the profile at various pos ons
along the path. The intermediate sections are then blended together.
Additional parameters can be included in the sweep feature such as
guide curves, profile orientation options, and twist to create a wide
variety of shapes.
in this lesson, we will review basic sweeping using a 2D path and a

simple, sketched profile. ln later lessons, we wi explore more
advanced and complex applications of sweeping including using SD
curves as paths or guide curves.
155
sounwoRKs Lesson 4
lntrodulalan to Sweeplng
Sweep The following is a description ofthe two required Components used in

Requirements sweeping: the sweep path and profile.
Sweep Path
A sweep path can be 2D or 3D and made up ofsketch ent curves,
.
ctr model edges. The path provides direction for the profile and, by
default, also controls the orientation ofthe intermediate sections
throughout the feature. (Options for controlling sweep orientation will
be covered in detail in Lemon 7: Advanced Sweeping.)
in most cases, it is best to create the path for a sweep feature first so
that the profile sketoh can include relations to the pnth.
Profile
The sweep profile can be a sketoh profile, a selected taoe, or ifa simple
oireulor profile is required it can be automated from the Sweep
PropenyManager.
For sketched profiles, elements must be contained within a single
sketeh and must include a olosed, nonrselfrinterseeting boundary. The
sketch can, however, eontain rnultiple contours , either nested or
disjoint.
When creating the profile sketch, it is best to include sketch relations to
the intended sweep path. Any relations included between the profile
and path wtll be retained in the intermediate sections throughout the
sweep feature.
Path
Falh
esleti contours
Disjmnt contours
Where to Find It Swept BossIBass:

I
I
CommandManager: Features > Swept Boss/Base
Menu: Insert, Boss/Base, Sweep I
Swept Cut:
- CotnmendManuger: Features > Swept Cut Hi
I Menu:lnsert,Cut,Sweep
157
Lesson 4 sounwoRKs
lmroaueiiun ta Sweeping
Case Study: Traditional raised panel doors are assemblies 0f

Faux Raised five companents: two rails, two stiles, and a raised
Panel Door panel. Lower eost alternatives mimic the look bm
are made from a single pieoe of material, usually
medium density fiberboard.
1nthe folluwing ease study, we will create the
design out into this door using a sweep feature.
1 Open an existing part.

Open Faux Raised Panel Door from the Lesson04\Case Study
folder.
Examine the part. it consists ora rectangular extruded buss, a user—
defined reference plane, and two sketches: the path (in blue) and the
profile (in orange).
158
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 4
lnlmdufllnn to Sweeplng
2 Sweep a cut. fl («rs-«v iv 0

Click Swept Cut 3. ¢ x
This will be a Sketch Profile sweep. ”Imam- A

#1ka Me
For the Profile, select the sketch named 321:3?!“
Profile. thl:
For the Path, select the sketch named Path.
hum v
m... In rm v
E m M... y
rm...” rm», V
Click OK J .
3 View the resulls.

Simple sweeps arejusi like extrude features, except the profile can g0
in multiple directions as defined by the path.
159
Lesson 4 soLIDwoRKs
lnlmduclinn to sweeping
Sweep with Additional elements called guide curves can be incorporated i o a

Guide Curves sweep to further control the shape ctfthe feature. As the protile is
swept, the guide curves can eontrol the pmfile's shape, size, or
orientation. One way to think of guide curves is to visualize them
driving a parameter such as a radius. In the illustration below, the
profile is attached to the guide eurve using a sketeh relau‘on. As the
profile is swept along the path, the intermediate sections must also
include the relation to the guide curve, so the radius ofthe circle
changes.
D
r sou. 0:71:6ka
‘.
"attractant
Case Study: Modeling complex shapes require some techniques

Bottle Body for creating features that are quite unlike the
extruded or revolved shapes built in the basic
course. Throughout this course, we will go through
the steps of creating the molded plastic bottle
shown here. We will start by building the basic
shape of the body. Other details and features will he
added later.
The basic cross section of the body of the bottle is
elliptical. We will create a simple vertical path for
the sweep and use an ellipse for the profile. The
shape ofthe ellipse will change based on guide
curves. The guide curves will be based off of sketch
pictures that represent the intended bottle shape
from the from and side.
160
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 4
Inlroflunllan lo Sweeplng
Open Bottle Body from the LessonO4\Ca.se Study

folder.
This pan includes 2 sketch pictures on the Front and
Right Planes.
2 Sweep path.
Select the Front Flame and open a
Sketch C.
Sketch a vertical hne, smmng at the Origin.
Dimension this line to a length 0f9.125".
Exit the sketch and name it Sweep Patna
3 Sketch first guide curve.

Since we want the profile sketch to include
relations to the guide curves, we will create the
guide curves first.
Sketch a Spline N using Picture Front as a
»
guide
Add Horizontal — relations between the ends
ofthe spline and the ends ofthe sweep path
Add a 0.5" dimension between the end ofthe
sphne and the path
Exit the sketch and name it first Guide.
151
Lesson 4 soLlDwoRKs
Introduction to Sweeplng
Sketch the second guide curve.

Open a new sketch on the Right Plane and sketch a
spline this time using Picture » Side as a guide.
Again, add Horizontal — relations between the ends
ofthe spline and the ends oftlle sweep path.
Add a 0.5" dimension between the end ofthe spline
and the path.
Note The dimensions at the top W|ii ensure the end of the
sweep will circular and the proper size for the bottle
neck.
Exit the sketch and name it Second Guide
Hide sketches.
Hide the sketches that hold the sketch pictures
Sweep profile.
Select the Top Plane and open a sketch.
sketch an Ellipse 9 With its center at the Origin.
Position the ellipse's axes at any location for now.
i‘
Pierce Relation The sketch relations added between the profile and other sweep curves
will be included in each replicated section throughout the feature. To
properly size the intermediate sections ot‘the sweep by the guide
curves, the relation we will use is Pierce “t
A Pierce relation is always between apoml in the active sketch and a
curve that intersects the sketch plane. This relation will locate the point
at the exact location where the curve pierces the plane, hilly defining
the point. The curve used can be a sketch entity, 2 curve feature, or a
model edge. in cases where the curve passes through the sketch plane
in multiple locations, it is important to select it near the desired pierce
location.
162
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 4
introduction Io mplng
It is impomnt to understand that making a point Coincident to a Curve

dues not fully define the point. To be Coincident, the point can lie
anywhere along the curve or even a projection ofthe curve.
in the case ofthe Bottle, the poinls ufthe elliptical profile could he
fully defined by adding a co cident relation to the endpoints ufthe
guide curves, but this would not be the relation we would want
included in the intermediate sections ot'the sweep feature.
By using Pierce, we will be fully defining the points and also ensuring
each replicated section will resize properly since they will also he
pierced by the guide Curves as they fallow the vertical oath.
7 Add 3 Pierce relations.

Select the point at the end ofthe major axis.
'
Press the ctrl key and multi~select the first guide curve.
Click Pierce from the Context toolbar or PropertyMznnger.

Repeat this procedure for the minor axis and
the second guide curve.
8 Fully defined.
The profile is now fully defined and its size and orientation are driven
by the guide Curves.
9 Exit the sketch.
Name the sketch Sweep Profile.
We are now ready to sweep the body of the bottle.
153
Lesson 4 soLIDwoRKs
tmroauetipn ta Sweeping
Sweep with Guide As a sweep feature is generated, relations to the guide curves control
Curves the shape, size, or orientaticm of the intermediate sections of the
feature. In this example, the guide curves control the length ofthe
major and minor axes of the ellipse.
10 Sweep wlth guide curves.
11
Click Swept BosslBase
Select the profile and path.
I.
Use the appropriate PropertyManager fields
to select the Sweep Profile and Sweep
Path.
The preview displays the result without the
elrect of any guide curves.
12 Gulde curves.
Expand the Guide Curves group bux to activam the Guide Curves
selection box.
Select the First Guide curve.
As the guide curve elements are introduced, the relations to those
elements must also be included in the feature. Because of the Pierce
relations, each intermediate elliptical section throughout the sweep will
have its axes endpoints pierced by the spline curves, effectively
changing the size ofthe ellipse as is follows the path.
Select the Second Guide.
snot {umblmndfmmd .
wwllliwewmfllal . Wlielxwun purity .
164
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 4
introduction to Sweeplng
Showing wtien sweeping a feature which includes guide curves, you can
Intermediate preview how the intermediam sections are being generated by clicking
Sections the Show Sections 9 option in the Guide Curves groupbox. A spin
box is displayed listing the number ufthe intermediate section
currently being viewed. You can click the up and down arrows to
display the different sections.
13 Showing Sections. A
Click Show Sections Q and
ml
,
use the spin box (0 display the 0
intermediate sections. C
Notice how the shape of the
ellipse is driven by its
relationship with the guide
curves.
’ WWW”
I
Note Make sure the options for Start! l
I ’15
End Tangency are set to None.
For more information on this
_
setting, see Additional Sweep
Settings on page 265.
/
Mlliwnpvaw ,
Click OK .
14 Optional: Change the colon

Add a pan level appearance to the Bottle Body.
15 Add the neck
Select the top face ofthe bottle and open a sketch.
Use Convert Entities ® to copy this edge into
the active sketch.
Extrude the sketch upward a dismnce of nr625".
165
Lesson 4 SOLIDWORKS
Inlmducfinnta sweeping
Mum-thickness The next step in creating the Bottle Body is to add a shell feature. ln
Shell the case ofthe bottle, all faces are 0.020" thick except the neck, which
is 0.060". The Shell command gives you the option of creanng a multiv
thickness shell, in which some walls are thicker (or thinner) than
othels. You should decide what thickness represents the usual case ,
applied to most faces. Then, you should determine what thickness
represents the exceptions , applied to fewer faces.
Note The multirthickness shell requires a sharp edge between faces to define
the boundary between the different thicknesses.
16 Shell command. when 9
I:
Click Shell cg. « x
SettheThicknesstoOtOZfl" m
as the default.
:Wnirfl
earlieeasssraesm,
select the 10p face of the 31:21:
bottle neck.
17 Multiple thickness.
Activate the Multi-thickness Settings selection box.
5
Face selecfiuns made here will use the multi—thickness value specified.
18 Select thicker facest
Select the outside face ofthe
umm_
am m
bottle neck.
3
Set the thickness m 0.060".
Click OK
shell.
J tn create the
19 Results shown in section View.
The seeticm view at the right shows the
two different wall thicknesses.
20 Save and close the part
166
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 4
lnlrofluclian lo Sweeping
The Selection when working with features that require muitipie eiements such as
Manager sweeps, lofis, and boundary features, a special SelectionManager tool
available to assist in making the required selections. When making
is
selections for a sweep's profile, path, and guide curves, for instance,
plelng items in the graphics area wtll default to select the entire
sketch. But at times. you may need to select only a pm‘llon ofthe
sketch. or perhaps combine the sketch entities with other elemeiiLs in
the tnodel to achieve the desired result. This s where the
SelectionManager is useful.
The SelectionManager can be used to select only a
portion ofa sketch. select entities across multiple «x [113*
sketches, nick inuitipie noneiangem edges, or combine CI#

edges with sketch entities to form a selection “group".
The dialog associated with the SelectionMaiiagercontains several
selection options as described below:
Tool Dc ription
\/ 0K Accepts the selection.

Cancels the selection and closes the
x Cancel
selectionManager.
Clears all items in the selection set being
m3 Clear All created or edited.
Selects the entire closed loop when you select
D 58'9“ 0°59“ '-°°P any segment otthe closed loop.
Selects all chained entities when you select
t" Select Open Loop one entity.
Selects one or more individual entities.
DI} Select Group Selections can propagate to include tangent
entities on both ends ofa selected entity.
' se'ec’ “99”“
* 5"""3'" 59'9"“
Selects parametric regions in the same way as
Contour Selection in a 2D sketch.
Uses regular selection, the same as available
when the SelectionManager |S not activated.
Where to Find ll I Shoncut Menu: When working in the PropenyManager for Sweep.
Lofl, or Boundary features, iighirclick in the graphics area and
click SelectionManager.
167
Lesson 4 soLIDwoRKs
lnlmduclinn ta sweeping
Case Study: 1n the following example, a model of

Hanger Bracket a Hanger Bracket has been set up
with all the required information for
the sweep feature needed to bridge
the existing bodies together.
However, the curves for the path and
guide curve exist within the same
sketch, so the SelectionManager
will he required to specify the
difierent elements of the feature.
Open the part Hanger Bracket from

the Lessono4\0ase Study fulder.
Examine the FentureMnnager design
tree.
A sketch named Sweep Curves (in
mange) contains both the path and
guide curves we will use for the
sweep.
Sketeh4 will be the sweep profile and
has been created with Pierce relations
to both curves.
Note The path and guide curve were created in the same sketch simply for
convenience since they lie on the same plane and there are relations
between them.
Swept BosslBase.
Click Swept BosslBase ’.
Choose Sketch4 for the profile.
The selection box for the sweep path automau'cally becomes active.
16!
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 4
lntroduetian Io weeping
3 SelectionManager.
Righteclick in the graphics area and
click SelectionManager from the
shoncut menu.
Click Select Open Loop r’ on the
dialog and select une ofthe entities
that makes up the path (pictured in
pink)
The system selects all the connected
entities.
Click OK t/ on the
SelectionManager or by using the
right mouse button ”8
An “Open Loop" is used to define the path selection in the
PropenyManager.
Note in this example, we are using the inside area as the path because we
want the intermediate sections t0 follow this curve's urientztion. By
default, the primary function ofthe path is to provide the direction or
the feature and control the urientation of the intermediate sections,
while guide curves generally are used fur resizing and shaping. For
more information an orientation options, see Sweep ()piinm‘ 0n
page 264.
4 Select the guide curve.
Repeat the above process to
select the guide curve.
159
Lesson 4 SOLIDWORKS
Intmductinnm Sweeping
Resulting swept boss.

Use the Merge result option to
combine all the solid bodies.
Click OK J on the Sweep
PropertyMznager.
Optional: Add finish features.

Add two through hole cuts to the
model: 925mm and fl16mm .19
shown.
Add 3mm fillets and rounds, shown

here in red, to Complete the model.
fin Filleting by feature works best.
Save and close the part.
17a
Oval rear Drawer Full
Exercise 16: The main feature ofthe

Oval Foot pictured drawer pull Is a
Drawer Pull swept boss. The path fur
the sweep is a
symmetrical spline.
Create the path using
construction geometry to
achieve the necessary dimensions and a style spline to create the
symmetrlcal Curve.
This exercise remferces the following skills:
- Sly/c Splme on page 124

- Sweeping on page 156
Units: millimeters
Procedure
1 New part.
Create a new pan using the FarLMM template and name it
Drawer Pull.
2 Sketch construction geometry.
Open a sketch on the Top Plane.
Sketch two centerlines and dimension them is shown below. The
horizontal centerline is centered on the Origin.
3 Sketch a style spline.

Sketch a Style Spline N by placing the control vertices similar to as
shown.
171
mel Foot Drawer Full
4 Add relations.
Add a Coincident Arelation to the curve and the endpoint of Ike
vertical construction line.
Add n Vertical | relation to the left line orthe control polygon.
To make this a symmetrical s line, add n Symmetric la’ relation to the

2 control venices and the vertical centerline.
This will fully define the spline.
172
Oval root nmwer Full
Symmetrical Style splines are very useful for making symmetrical splines due to
Splines being able to use the polygon geometry tor sketch relations. When
working with regular splines, however, symmetry can be a challenge.
Here a some techniques that can be considered to build a symmetrical
standard spline:
1. Sketch a spline and mirror it.
This is the easiest way, but because it creates two separate splines,
geometry created from the mirrored spline will have edges on the
model face corresponding to the endpoints ofthe splines.
2. Build symmetrical construction geometry and
tie the points of the spline to the symmetrical
framework.
Results in a single curve, but can be very time
intensive for complex splines. And it
directional controls (spline handles) are
activated, the spline may end up not being
exactly symmetrical.
3. Mirror a spline, then use Fit Spline L to
trace the 2 separate curves with one spline.
This technique results in one continumls curve without the heavy
setup required with construction geometry
Add control pains.

To modify the shape ot‘the style spline, add some control points.
Rightrcllck the style spline or control polygon.

Click Insert Control Verlex ?.
click the lower line of the control polygon to create a control vertex on
each side ofthe line ofsymmetry.
Press Est: when done placing points.
Add Symmetric relation.
Add a Symmetric p’ relation to the new points and the vertical
Centerline.
Bra—Tr 77 77
173
max Foot Drawer Full
Add Coincident relation.

Add a Coincident /\ relation between the horizontal line of the
control polygon and the endpoint afthe venical centerline. This will
cause the curve to flatten out in this area,
Wm—‘I
Fine lune the spline.
Move the control venices to adjust the shape ofthe spline.
lt‘you Wish, you can add a dimension to the control polygon to fully
define the curve.
Exit the sketch.
10 Sketch the profile.

Sketch an ellipse, dimensioned as shown, with its center coincident
with the end ofthe spline.
174
Oval Fual Drawer Full
11 Insert Sweep ’.
Sweep the profile along the path.
12 Oval fool.
()fl‘set the profile skewh a distance of4mm to the
ctutside.
Exlrude a bass to 2 Depth of 3mm.
13 Fillels.
Apply a 4mm fillet to the top
edge, highlighted in blue, or
the exlruded boss.
Apply a 0.5mm fillet tn the
edge between the extruded
bass and the swept boss.
14 Mirror.
Mirror ill] the extruded boss and both fillets with respect to the
Right. Plane.
175
Tire Imn
Exercise 17: Create the Tire Iron pictured

Tire Iron at the right.
following skills:
- Sweeping on page [56
- Cin'ular Pm/i/c Sweep on
page I77
- Dame Feamre on page I78
Units: inches
Procedure
1 New Part.
()pen a new part using the Pal-LIN template and name it Time Iran.
Challenge
2 Optional: Use the drawing views provided to create the part.
As a challenge, create the Tire Iron from the drawing views below.
Alternatively, the steprby step instructions on the following pages can
be used.
Note The main body oflhe “fire Iron can be created with a Circular Profile
Sweep. This can be automated from the Sweep Property Manager. For
more information see Cin'ulur Pmfilc Sweep on page 177.
The bottom of the hexagon cut uses a Dame 0
feature to create the
concave faces. See Dame Feature on page [78 for more information.
/W0
W\ V
/
‘i
W150
l
[m
anus
DEYAALA
176
me iron
Slep-by-Slep
3 Create the sweep path.
Create the path sketch as sown on the Top Plane.
”MM
L
R2250
5000 ‘I user
Tip When you want to dimension (0 the virtual sharp in a sketch, consider
creating the lines first, dimensioning, then adding a fillet. sketch fillets
are a good way to automate tangent relations and will also retain the
dimensions to the virtual intersection.
Circular Profile When a sweep feature requires a circular profile centered on the path, it
Sweep can be automated from the Sweep PropenyManagen Circular Profile
sweeps are common tor creating features for piping, tubing and wire. A
thinewalled circular profile sweep can he created by using the Thin
Feature option, ifdesired.
4 Insert sweep.
since the pmfile otthis feature is a simple circle centered on the path, it
can be automated from the Sweep PropenyManagen
r. E {a
9
’ 5"”
I;
Click Circular Profile. a ‘7’
~/ x
Select the path sketch.
Wiener... A
Set the Diameter ® ofthe profile circle to :iffiCTSSQL
0.625". Click 0K «. C
9 ionn
ovum-i c
1
murmur: v
(immense, V
177
rue Iron
5 Revolved featuret
Create a revolved feature ns shown by sketching on the Top Plane.
hp Consider adding some radii as sketch fillets nfler dimensioning.
aRlSO
6 Hexagonal cut.
Create a hexagonal cut using the
Polygon G) tool.
Dome Feature The Dome feature lets you deform the face of a model creating either a
convex (default) or concave shape.
To create a dome, select the face or fnces you wish to deform. Specify a
distance and optionally, a direction. By default the dome is created
normal to the selected faces. You can select faces whose centroid lies
outside the face. This allows you to apply domes to irregularly shaped
faces.
Where to Find It I Menu: Click Insert, Features, Dame 3
Tip When a command is not easily at Q'?~_E|Zlfi'x
accessible from the available
toolbars, consider activating it legs. a
“El
from the command Search.
17:
In: Iron
7 Round the bottom of the cut using the Dome feature.

Click Dome a .
Select the hexagonal face at the bottom of the cut.

Specify a Distanoe of 0.25".
Click Reverse Direction {5 to make the dame
concave.
Clear the Continuous dome check box.
Click OK ./ .
8 Through all cut.
Create the flat end ofthe part using a sketch and a thmugh 211 cm.
11p
9
>1” Vmali
Use the path sketch to create n new plane in the correct urientation. Use
a centerline in the sketch to create symmetry between the upper and
lower contours.
179
Exercise 13 soLlDwoRKs
snarsmp Fuselage
Exercise 18: [n lllls exercise you will creme the fuselage ofthe model smrship
Starship plclured below. The remainder onlle slarshlp wlll he cnmplcled in
Fuselage Exmm 26: 5mm”; Conn/med on page 252.
ThlS exercise reinforces lhe following skills:
I
-
lee Relation on page [62
Sweep mm Gum Curvev on page [64
Units: cenlimelers
Procedure
1 New Part.
Open a new part using the Far'LMM lemplale and save il as
Starship Fuselage.
2 Unils.
(‘hallgc llle pun ulllls m (268 (centimeter, gram, second).
130
Starship Fusetage
3 Sweep path.
Tap Plane.
Sketch £1 Vemcal hne 1525cm
long, as shown.
Name the sketch Path and exit
the sketch.
4 First guide curve.

Open a new sketch on the Top Plane.
Select the line In the Path sketch and Click Converl
Entities @.
Change the convened line to Construction
Geometry Iii.
Sketch a hne and tangent are as shown at the right.
EX“ the sketch and name it Side Guide.
5 Second guide curve.
Open a new sketch on the Right. Plane.
Select the line In the Path sketch and click
Convert Ent es 8.
Change the convened line to Construction
Geometry |:§.
Sketch a line and three tangent ems as shown. The
are without a dimension has an Equal = retotion to the R762 etc.
R762
Rl525—\
Exit the sketch and name it Top Guide.
181
Stamp Fuselage
Sweep profile.
()pen a new sketch on the Event Plane.
G as follows:
Sketch a Partial Ellipse
I The centerpoint is Coincident A

with the end ofthe Path.
I The major axis has a Pierce
relation with the Side Guide.
fl
I The minor axis has a Pierce
relation with the Top Guide. ‘
I The two endpoints have a Horilontal — relation to each other.
I The start point has a Coincident A relation with the major axis.
Tip A partial ellipse IS used because the 10p ofthe starship has n difi‘erent
shape than the bottom.
Bottom half of sweep profile.
Continuing in the same sketch, sketch a
second partial ellipse as follows:
I The centerpoint is Coincident

the end ofthe Path.
/\ with
I The major axis is Coincident A with
u
the endpoint ofihe first ellipse.
The minor axis is as yet undefined.
X
1
I Both endpoints are Coincident A with the endpoints ot‘the first
eiiipse.
Construction lines.
Sketch two construction lines from the center to the end ofthe minor
axis, and then to the end ofthe major axis.
Add an angular dimension and set the value to 60".
Tip The angular dimension forces n constant aspect ratio ofthe major axis
to the minor axis.
Exit the sketch and name it Profile.
132
soLIDwoRKs Exemise 1a
Starship Fuselage
9 Sweep with guide curves

Salem the pmfile, path, and bath guide curves to Create the sweep
feature as shuwn.
. mmmumel
(Wm (Mae!
183
Shrship Fuselage
Quality of the There are two imponznt options in the sweep command that affect the
Resultlng Faces quality of the resulting faces. They are Merge tangent faces which is
located in the Options box, and Merge smooth faces which is located
in the Guide Curves box.
If the sweep profile has segments that are tangent, Merge tangent
faces causes the faces resulting from the sweep to be merged into a
single smooth face.
Merge smooth faces acts similarly with guide curve segments. If
there are tangent entities along the guide curve, the resulting faces will
he merged at the tangent areas to produce a single smooth race.
Clearing this option improves performance ofsweeps with guide
curves, however, it will cause the faces to break inm segments at all
points where the guide curve or path is not curvature continuous.
Results with Merge tangent races Results with ham Merge tangent faces
selected and Merge smooth faces and Merge smooth laces cleared
desired
Results with both Merge tangent races

and Merge smooth faces selected
10 Rename.
Name the swept feature Fuselage.
The remainder otlhe starship will be completed in Emma 26:
Sta/ship Continued on page 252.
134
Build Your mm some
Exercise 19: Using sweep wilh guide curves, design your own bottle. The shape is
Build Your Own not critical. The imem is m pieciice and undcismiid haw guide curves
Bottle control the shape crilie profile as it is swepli The images below are jusl
examples in give you same ideas. Use your imagination.
This exercise reinforces the fallowing skills:
- Sweep wl/h Guide Curves on page [60

umis: yDur clicice
185
sum: Your own Bum:
136
Lesson 5
3D Sketching and Curve
Features
Upon successful Cnmpletmn oflhis lesson. you will be able m:

Identify curve features.
Creme :1 3D skelch.
Creme a helix.
Creme :1 3D curve from onhogonal views.
Create a composne curve from multiple emiuesl
187
Lesson 5 soLIDwoRKs
3D Sketching and Curve Features
Curve Features [n this lesson, we will introduce several ofthe curve features available
in SOLIDWORKS These are curves that are created outside of the
sketch environment. Curve features ofien create 2D and 3D curve
geometry tllat is hard to duplicate usirlg sketcll commands. They are
Very useful tor creating complex features and can he used directly for
sweep paths and guide curves The available curve features are
summarized in the table below:
Helix and Spiral Creates a 3D helical curve or a 2D spiral. This is a sketched based
feature it requires a circle sketch entity be created at the starting plane
l8 and starting dialneter of the curve.
For more information: see [Ielir Curve on page 195
Projected Curve Creates a curve by projecting either a sketch onto a face, or a sketch onto
a sketch. This tool is very useful for creating complex SD curves that can
fill he described from orthogonal Views.
For more information: see P/‘(J/Eclt’d Curve Feature on page 199
Composite Curve Creates a single curve resulting from joining different elenlerlts together.
This tool can combine entities from multiple sketches, curve features,
[:4 and edges into one continuous curve.
For more information: see Cam/)(JSL/L' Curve Feature on page 200
Curve Through Creates a curve through specified XYZ coordinates. Coordinate data for
XYZ POMS the curve can be saved to an external file to be reused The coordinate
information can be inserted from a saved SOLIDWORKS curve file or
25" text file.
For more information: see Curve Through XYZ on page 351)
Curve Through Creates a curve through userrdefined poirlts or existing vertices. A

Reference Poinls clieckbox can be used to create a closed curve.
® For more information: see the SOLID WORKS Help Flies
Split Line Splits races ot‘a model by creating additional edges. This command can
make use oi sketch geometry, faces, surfaces» or planes. lt splits model
@ faces by projecting geometry, producing an edge at an intersection, or
adding a split line at a silhouette edge
For more information: see Split/mg a Face on page 236
13E
sounwoRKs Lesson 5
an Sketching and Curve Features
Case Study: In this example, we‘ll create

Spflng the pictured coil spring. The
pan is symmetrical, so we'll
take advantage of this by
modeling halfthe spring and
‘
mirroring the body to
complete it. The primary
7
feature for this part WI“ be a
\
sweep. Several curve features
will be used to produce the
path as well as a 3D sketch to
generate the area at the center.
Sweeping In Lesson 4: [almanac/ion to Sweeping, we worked through a couple of

Along a 3D Path simple cases ofsweeping using a 2D path. In this lesson, we will look
,
at a more complex case using a 3D path. 3D paths can be constructed
in many ways including making use of3D sketches, projected curves,
helixes, or existing model edges.
3D Sketching As the name implies, the entities in a 3D sketch are not constrained to a
single plane as they are in a traditional 2D sketch. This makes 3D
sketches very useful for applications such as sweeping alld letting.
However, freerhand 3D sketching can be a bit ofa challenge. To be
successful, understanding the onscreen feedback and relations in the
3D sketching environment is key.
Using Reference One easy way to control 3D sketch entities is by making use of planes
Planes within the model. While in a 3D Sketch, sketch entitles can be created
by switching between planes that exist in the model.
orthe model, press Tab
\
To switch hetween the default planes
while a sketch tool is active. Feedback from the cursor will K
indicate which standard plane you are sketching on by
displaying:
I ,
xv Front Plane
vz : Right Plane
I
I xz : Top Plane
if there are existing faces or planes in the model, they can also
X
be chosen as sketching surfaces. To orient 3D sketch entities to
a reference plane, press the cm key while clicking the face/
‘
plane. A Face/Plane icon will then appear next to the cursor.
Additional Additional techniques for making use onD planes within a 3D Sketch
Techniques include ‘activating' a plane or creating a Plane Internal to the 3D
i
sketch. For more information on these techniques see Etemtsc 21; 30

sketching wi/Il Planes on page 207.
189
Lesson 5 soLlDwoRKs
Space Handle Besides the cursor feedback, SOLIDWORKS
/
provides another on screen tool to assist in
keeping, track nfyuur orientation Wlthin the a
/
3D sketch enVlronlnent: the Space Handle. 5
The Space Handle shows in red and its axes

indicate the directions ot‘the currently
selected face or plane. The space handle
follows the points that are placed within the
3D sketch to help you identify your
orientation. Inference lines from the space handle show where
automatic relations can be captured
Subset oi Sketch There are fewer entities and sketch relations available in 3D sketches
Entities and compared to 2D sketches. when working in a 3D sketch, Vertical and
Relations Horizontal relations are replaced with the relations Along X, Along Y,
and Along Z. Since there are more than just 2 dimensions available in
the 3D sketch environment, these relations allow an entity‘s orientation
to he fully defined by aligning it With the axes ot‘the model's
coordinate system.
Where to Find it - ColnmandManager: Sketch > Sketch Flyout C > an Sketch E
I Menu: Insert, 3D Sketch
The thst ponion oftlle Springs 4
path will he created as a 3D
sketch. We will start with some
construction geometry to assist
in positioning the sketch lines.
‘
ms
New part.
Open a new part using, the FarLMM template.
Name the part Spring.
Open a new 3D sketch.
Click an Sketch E.
Centerlines.
Click Centerline gr".
Press Tab until the cursor displays the YZ symbol. >4,
190
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 5
Start the first centerline at the Origin Use the sketch inference lines
and cursor feedback to create the line in the Y direction, capturing the
I
Along Y relation.
Sketch the second centerline in the Z direction. Use the sketch
inference lines and cursor feedback in caprure an Along z relation.
Dimension the lines to lengths of3.25mm and 3mm respectively, as
I
shown.
pt?” Agor
.. A»,
b“ ‘
)L
Flrsl oenlerline Semrld oenlefilne Dimensions
Skelching a line.
Click Line
/.
Press Tab until the cursor
displays lire xv symbol.
Sketch a line similar to as
shown.
Use the sketch lnference
lines and cursor feedback to
create the lille in the X
direction, capturing an
Along X
I relation.
Conlinue sketching.
Sketch the next line at an angle
similar to as shown.
Notice lhe parallel relation
shown next to the cursor ls
displayed in wbite \\This
indicates that we are sketching
parallel to the XY plane, but the
lack ofa yellow background
means this is a reference
indicator only. No sketch m
relauon is being created. We will his
add the Parallel relation ln step
1 I).
191
Lesson 5 someoRKs
an Sketchlng and Curve Features
6 Switch sketch planes.

Press the Tab key to switch to the YZ plane.
Sketch the next line in the Z direction similar to as shown, capturing the
I
Along Z relation.
7%
7 Viewports.
When 3D sketching, multiple viewpom can ofien help determine the
freedom of movement still available within the sketch.
()n the Head. up View toolbar, click View Orientation @,
Four Wew .
Note Viewpom can be displayed in Third Angle shown), or First Angle.

(19
This setting is found in Options 439, System Options, Display]
Selection. There is a drop down menu to select Projection type for
four view viewport.
192
sounwoRKs Lesson 5
an sketetting end Curve Feetutes
8 Drag.
Drag the endpoint that is shared between the two blue lines, with
multiple viewpntts, it is easy to see how the angled line can he moved
;
out ofalignmem.
, wemsenwtuni 4a a El V
9. .3
H3“ \in
vim. ‘Ilgm
Tip Standard orthogonal Views can be used to limit movements made by

dragging. For instance, when in the Front View, you will only have
the ability to move entities in the x and Y directions when dragging.
9 Single viewporl.
Renlm to viewpon by accessmg the \fiew Orientation
a single E
menu again and selecting Single Wew DA
193
Lesson 5 soLlowoRKs
an Skelcnmg am Curve realms
10 Add relations and dimensions.

Select file
relation.
Front Plans and the angled llne. Add a Parallel \\
Select the Front Plane and the endpoint oflhe last line, the one going
along the Z axis. Add an On Plane IE relation.
Dimension the sketch as shown below.
11 Fillels.
Use lhe Sketch Fillet '1 mo] to apply two fillets: one radius 2mm and
one radius 1.25mm as shown.
Note Adding these fillets in difl‘erent directions would not be possible will
2D sketches.
194
soLIchiRKs Leslon 5
3o Sketching and Curve Features
12 Exit the 3D sketch.
Helix Curve The next portion ofthe sweep path for the Spring will be a helix with
varying pitch and diameter. We will start by creating a plane where the
helix should begin. Next, the required circle sketch will be created and
we will use the helix properties to define the helical curve.
Helix and Spiral The Helix and Spiral feature creates a helical 3D curve or 2D spiral
Feature based on a circle and definition values such as pitch, number of
revolutions, and height. The circle sketch for this feature defines the
starting diameter and the starting locancn ofthe curve.
where to Flnd It I CommandManager: Features > Curves U > Helix and Spiral B
I Menu: Insert Curve, Helix/Spiral
13 Create an offset planer

Create a Plane
to the
.parallel
Front Plane at the ’ /
endpoint ofthe 3D sketch
as shown.
Tip Shortcut to creating an offset plane:

1. Select the exi ing plane so its preview is visible in the graphics
area.
2. Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and drag the plane's border. This
will create a “copy" ofthe plane and open the Plane
PropertyManager.
3. Use the Plane PrupertyManager to further define the plane.
14 New sketch.
Insert a Sketch C on the newly created reference plane.
195
Lesson 5 soLIDwoRKs
an Sketching em Curve Fealums
15 Sketch a circle.
Sketch a circle centered on the Origjri, and Coincident to the end of
the 3D sketch.
,7
Tip You can automatically capture the Coincident relationship to the 3D

sketch when placing the circle's diameter.
16 Create a variable pitch helix. g Hui-[Swim a)
Click Helix and Spiral 8.
>
.1 x
y 1 ”m
7‘ me,
firm-mammoth»
A
.
v
m iremrm
smeem
”senseless.”
else it in.
em t inn um
inn r 5125 this
my is n75 {rm
ism
v
”w a s
s new A MW.
in.
m e new 7
A i
(larkwlve
.i {mmluzlnzlvmz
The first pull down in the Helix Property Manager allows you to
choose which parameters you want to use to define the helix. A Spiral
can also be selected from these options.
We Will be defining the Pitch and number of Revolutions for the
Springs helix.
The helix we will be creating else has a variahle pitch and diameter. To
have access to modify these values within the curve, select the Variable
Pitch radio button.
196
sounwoRKs Lesson 5
an sketching and Curve Features
Use the table to define the values for the pitch and diameter at
revolutions throughout the curve. The values in the tirst row are gray
because they are determined by the circle in the sketch. The height
values are grayed out because we have ehosen to detine the helix using
pitch and revolution parameters. We height will be driven by the other
values we add to the table.
For the Region Parameters, use the Settings below for Pitch,
Revolutions, and Diameter:
Revolution Diameter
0 6.5mm
4 65mm
5 4.5mm
4.5mm
The first 2 rows indicate a constant pitch of 2mm and diameter of

6.5mm from revolutions 0 through 4. Between revolutions 4 and 5 the
helix transitions to a 1.25mm pitch and a diameter of4.5mm. These
values continue to the end nt‘the curve which has a total of 7.5
revolutions.
The preview will update as you ehnnge the values and flags will
indicate where you've defined the helix dimensions. Modifications can
be made directly in the graphics area using the flags.
The Reverse direction cheekbox controls the direction the helix is
going from the sketch plane. This helix should be in the positive 2
direction.
The Start angle should be at 90“ to begin at the top ot‘the sketched
circle and the helix goes Counterctockwise.
Click OK ./ .
Hide "1 Plane}.
197
Lesson 5 soLIDwoRKs
an Sketching em Curve Features
Creating a 3D The ends ofthe spring have loops to connect to rods. The loups are
Curve from curved in two difiperent directions which are easy to describe from
I
Orthogonal orthogonal views. The illustration below shows a close up view of the
Views loop we want to create.
fiflfiifirfl~w~i~fir
x
tie
;
:1
H... mm.
.J
y
I.”
m mm
From the Front View, the loop matches the diameter oftlie erid ufthe
helix. From the Right view, Ihe loop is en upsidedown “U" shape.
The Projected Curve command is 2D sketches
well suited to create the curve needed
for this area orthe sweep path. Since
we knnw what the loop looks like
from 2 orthugonal views, we will
create sketches that represent these
views, then project them unto each
ether to produce a 3D curve.
This command can also project a
sketch onto a complex face to create a
Projecled Curve
curve frum their intersection. This
uption will be demonstrated in a later lesson.
1%
sounwoRKs Lesson 5
Projected Curve The Projected Curve feature creates a 3D curve using one ofiwn
Feature techniques:
I Sketch onto Face(s).
Projects a sketch onto a face or group of faces.
I Sketch onto Sketch.
Projects sketches (hmugh space and creates a curve where they
intersect. The sketches are usually at right angles to one another,
but this is not necessary.
Where to Find it I CmnmandManager: Features > Curves U > Project Curve a

I Menu: Insert Curve, Projected
17 Front view of loop.

Open an new sketch on the
Frunt Plane and sketch :1
semiecireie as shown.
18 Exit the sketch.
«234300
19 Side view of loop.

Open a new sketeh on the Right Plene, and sketch the side view otthe
loop as shown.
Connect the right most end ofthe sketch til end ofthe helix using a
Pierce é relation.
Note Because the helix pierces the Right Plane in multiple locations, it is
imponaht to select the curve near the pierce loention you are intending
to use when creating Xh|S relation.
R175 125 p /l ' '

/ /.
A
\ \\\/\\J//\
Hi
I
20 Exit the sketch.
199
Lesson 5 soLIDwoRKs
an Sketching and Curve natures
21 Create projected curve. EB "MAME @

Select the from and side view sketches crthe loop
and click Project Curve mi.
, X
Use the Sketch on sketch t panama

Opant , ”WWW
lfyou preselect items, SOLIDWORKS attempts

C 3,33%“
Tip
to select the appropriate type of projection. was
You will see a preview ofthe projected curve.
Click UK s/ t
Combining ()ne ofthe requirements ofthe sweep path is that it must be a single
Curves entity type: model edges, sketch entities, or a curve feature. Therefore,
to sweep the entire spring as a single feature, we will need to combine
the 3D sketch, helix, and projected curve. ()ne way to achieve this is to
use a Composite Curve
Composite Curve A Composite Curve enables you to combine reference curves, sketch
Feature geometry, and mode! edges into a single curve. All entities lnust touch
endetoeend with no gaps or overlaps. This curve can then be used as a
guide or path when sweeping or lofimg.
Where to Find it I Cmnmansznager: Features > Curves U>
Composite Curve at
I Menu: Insert, Curve, Composite
22 Composite curve.
Click Composite Curve ['71. gimp".
q x
a;
Select the 3D sketch, the helix, and the projected

curvel
mm,
U
A
Click OK ./ .
200
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 5
23 Circular Profile Sweep.

Since the pmfile oflhis feature is a simple circle centered On the path, it
can be automated from the Sweep PropenyManager.
Click Circular Profile.
I. .r 5m.
" x
L! K»
“-
,
Select the compuslte curve as the path.
mum». A
, m... M.
§ mm m.
Set lhe Diameter ® ofthe profile circleto 1mm. c
Q ”rm
om, V
arm.“ V
(men-may y
24 Evaluate the geometry.

Notice the transitions at the ends
ufthe helix are not tangent. This
is a problem for 3D eurves, since
the SD curves cannot be filleted
like 2D sketches.
2m
Lesson 5 soLtioRKs
Smoothing ()ne way of smoothing the transitions in the Spring's sweep path is to
Transitions use the Fit Spline tool to make the entire composite curve into a single
spline. Because a spline is an “interpolated" entity (meaning the
software fills in the parts of the curve between the user specified spline
points), it will smooth out any tangency problems in this model.
However, you should be aware that because splines are interpolated
geometry, it also means that they are approximations and will not
exactly match the original entities.
The Fit Spline ean be used for 3D entities in the same way it can be
used in a 2D sketch, but the curve must first be convened to sketch
entitles.
25 Convert composite curve

to sketch entities.
Delete the Sweepl feature.
Open a new 3D sketch E.
Use Convert Entities ® to
conven the composite curve
into sketch entities.
Notice that the composite curve is convened into several entities of
ditl‘erent types: lines, ares, and splines. We want to join all otthese into
a single spline.
26 Fit Spline.
. . . L my“ (9
Window select all the sketch entities in the 3D ,, x ..
sketch and click Fit Spline Ll
mm A
Clear the Closed spline option, if necessary. #:2232235”

Verify that the Constrained option is selected. 35:33:35;
This leaves the spline eonstrained to the original :m
sketch entities which will be convened in "‘ 'W" U
construction geometry.
Increase and decrease the
Tolerance Valuer Notice how
the Tolerance effects how well
the spline fits the original . .
entities. To more accurately fit
the geometry, the tolerance can
he decreased (tightened).
202
sounwoRKs Lesson 5
an sketetttng and Curve Features
Set the Tolerance to

04mm and click
OK J .
Exit the 3D sketch.

Hide the composite
curve. ~
27 Recreate the sweep.

Recreate the circular profile
sweep with the fit spline as
the path and a 61mm
profile
Notice that the sweep is one
continuous face, rather than
being broken up intu several
faces 5 it was before. Also notice that it is much smoother al the
transition areas.
28 Mirror the body.
Selecl the flat face nearest the Front Plane and Mirror Hi] the solid
budy.
Note The model pictured above has a part appearance of polished steel and
is displayed as Shaded
29 Save and close
i
the part.
.
2n3
3D Sketching
Exercise 20: Create this mode] by

3D Sketching following the steps as
shown.
This exercise reinforces
the following skills:
I 30 Sketching on
page 189
- Circular Profile
Sweep on page 177
Units: millimeters
Procedure
New part.
Open a new part using the Far'LMM templme and name it
3D Sketching.
New 3D sketch.
Create a new so Sketch [in and change the View orientation to
Isometric ..
/
Sketch lines.
Click the Line tool and
sun the first line at the
(high. Sketch the line in the
x direction.
evm o~
x
u.
Switch planes.
Press the Tab key in switch from the
default Front (XY) Plane to the
Right (YZ) Plane urientmion and
sketch along the z axis.
an Sketching
5 Conlinue lines.
Continue sketchlng lines and
swnching planes so that you are
always sketching along x, Y or z to
produce the line segments as
shown.
6 Relalian.
Add a Coincident A relation
between the endpoint and line
shown at lhe right.
7 Dimensions.
Dimension the lines as
shown to fully define the
sketch.
8 Fillels.
Add 20mm fillets al the
vertex polms.
205
an Sketching
9 Thin circular Profile Sweep.

Click Swept BosslBase f. l. .snug: (11 (D
Click Circular Profile. —.._......

mm...
.
A
For the Path C, select the EDSketch. c

Set the Diameter ® ofthe profile circle to a 2mm
II:
20mm Saw V
Click Thin Feature. m”... A
Set the Thickness Q to 2.5mm applied to the a anumm
inside.
Click OK ./ .
mm v
206
soLIDwoRKs Exemise 21
an Sketching mm Planes
Exercise 21: Create the pan by following the steps as shown.

3D Sketching This exercise reinforces the following skills:
with Planes
I 30 Stelehing on page [89
n Uxirlg Reference Planer on page l89
- Circular Pmfile Sweep on page I77
Units: millimeters
Planning Ahead ofen times when 30 sketching you will need reference planes other
than the three default ones. Whenever possible, it is a good idea to
create these before you start 3D sketching. This usually requires some
pmvplanning as well as some construction geometry.
Planes [a can also he created within a 3D skelch as lung as the

required references already exisL
207
an Skelchlng vnm Planes
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing part named snaketchAngle from the
Lesson05\Exercises folder.
Relerence plane.
Create a reference plane at a 15° angle to the Right Plane, passing
thmugh the left must [00mm construction line as shown below.
Name the plane Angle 1 5.
20:
sounwoRKs Eitercise 21
3|: Skelclung wllll Planes
3 Second reference plane.

Create a second reference plane at a 60° angle to the Front Plane,
passing through the rear most 150mm canslruclion line as shown
below.
Name the plane Angle eo.
Tip Planes are infinite, but their previews can he manipulated to resize or
reposition them in the graphics area. You can resize the plane preview
by dragging the grab handles that appear when the plane is selected, or
reposition it by dragging the plane horder.
4 New 3D sketch.
Create a new 3D Skelch [7.“ and change the view orientation to
Isometric ..a line.
5 Sketching
Click the Line /‘
tool and stan
sketching at the Origin.
Create the line, capturing an
I
Along X relation and make
the endpoint Coincident A
with the end ot‘the construction
line.
209
an Skelchlng wltll Planes
Switch sketch planes.

Press the ctrl key and click the plane named Angle 15.
The space handle is now aligned with the reference plane named
Angle 15.
Note When sketching, on a selected race or plane (indicated by the
cursor feedback shown at the right) an on Plane a relaricn is in A
automatically created for entities. Additionally, they can be
\
controlled with the familiar 2D sketch relations such as vertical and
horizontal.
sketch 3 line.
Use inference lines and cursor
feedback to create the next line
as Vertical
plane.
I
on the active
Continue sketching.
For the next line, use inference lines and cursur feedback to capture :1
Horizontal
I relation.
210
an Skelclllng wlm planes
9 Add relation.
Cancel the ine tool.
Add an On Plane a relation between the end ofthe horizontal line

and the Angle 50 reference plane.
Activating a Plane Another technique to make us nfexisiing planes in a 3D sketch is to

“activate" a plane. Visible planes can be activated by doublerclicking
the plane preview. When a plane is activated in a 3D sketch, it appears
with a grid across the plane preview.
All entities created when a plane is active are tied to the plane with an
0n Plane [3 relation and 2D sketch relations such as horizontal and
vertical are used to constrain them.
Note Horizontal and Vertical are interpreted with respect to the active sketch
plane, not model space.
To deactivate a plane, doublesclick outside the plane preview.
10 Activate the Angle 60

plane.
Doubleclick the Angle so
reference plane. This becomes
the active sketch plane,
indicated by the grid
displayed.
211
an Skelching wllll Planes
11 Sketch lines.
Sketch a Horizonlal — line starting Coincident A with the endpoint
ofthe previous line.
Sketch :1 Vertical | line with its endpoint Coincident A to the
setup sketch.
Tip You can inference the
endpoint from the
previous sketch by
“waking it up". Wake up
an area ofa sketch that
you wish to reference by
hovering the cursor over
it.
Add another Horizontal — line ending at the Midpoint

in the setup sketch. \ of the line
12 Deactivate plane.
Deactivate the Angle 50 reference plane by doubleclicking an empty
nren ufthe graphics window.
212
sounquKs Exercise 21
w Sketchlng wllh Planes
Creating a Plane one additional technique to make use ()le planes within n 3D Sketch
within a 3D Sketch is to create one internal to the sketch, The Plane
Sketch toolbar uses the same PropertyManager as the Plane
Feature Cummznd to build a new plane as an entity within an active
I
3Dsketch. Once the plane is created it will automatically became
activated.
Where to Find It I Commansztnager: Sketch > Plane _
I Menu: Tools, Sketch Entities, Plane

l Rightrclick while in a 3D Sketch and click Sketch Entities, Plane
13 Create a plane within the 3D sketch.

To control the orientation ofthe last line for this sketch, we will create a
plane Within the 3D sketch.
Click the Plane , command on the Sketch tonlhar.
Define the plane te be Coincident A to the last line's endpoint and
Parallel \\to the Right Plane.
113
an 5mm“ mm Planes
14 Sketch a line.
Cream 21 line from the last endpoim «hm IS Perpendicular J_ m the
Angle 60 plane.
Deacnvzte the plane by doublerclickmg an empty area ofthe graphics
area. ms plane is an element ofthe sketch.
15 Add dimensions.
Add 100mm and 125mm
chmenslons a: stowa
This fully defines the
skemh.
16 Fillet.
Add 30mm fillets m an six comers.
214
sounwosz Emcise 21
an Skelcllmg mm Planes

Click Swept Boss!
Base ’.
For the Path

SDSkemh.
c, selectihe
Set the Diameter ® othe
profile circle to 20mm.
Click OK v/ .
215
D-cell rrashhght Sprlng
Exercise 22: Using a helix with a Variable [Mich and

D-cell Flashlight diameler, create a spring for a Dreell
Spfing flashlight.
This exercise reinforces the following
skills:
- [1(1le Curve on page 195

- Cirrular Pm/ilv Sweep On
page 177
Units: millimeters
Procedure
1 New part.
Open a new part using the FarLMM lemplme and name it
FlashlighLSpring.
2 Create lhe helix.
Use the image othe finished model's Isomelrie View above along with
the table below to set the appropriate options for the helix.
Fitch Revolution Diameter

0.5mm
2.0mm
5.0mm
5.0mm
0110me
3 Sweep lhe spring.
The Wire diameter is 1.25mm.
215
sounwctRKs Exercise 23
Water Battle cage
Exercise 23: In this exercise, you will model the wire portion ofa
Water Bottle water bottle cage for a bicycle using a sweep feature. . t
The sweep path will represent the centerline ot‘the

Cage bent wire. Vertically, the cage must maintain a
constant diameter to hold the water bottle and the
general shape ofthe cage from the from View is also
known. With this information, you can create two
orthogonal sketches and project them onto each other
to produce the 3D curve for the sweep path.
I Splines on page 103

I Creating and Manipulating Splines on page 104
I Projected Curve Fen/m on page i99
I circular Pm/i/c Sweep on page l77
Units: millimeters
Procedure
New part.
Open a new part using the FaPLMM template and name it Water
Bottle Cage.
New sketch.
Top Plane.
Sketch and dimension a circle
as shown.
The vertical construction line
represents the minimum
opening, for the water bottle
cage. We will reference this
geometry in the next sketch.
New sketch.
Create a Second sketch on the Front Plane.
117
Waler auntie Cage
4 Construction geometry.
Create the construction geometry as 4.,
shown. The 3rd line is constrained

using 3 Pierce
(relation.
These lines will be used to control the
Jr._
splme pmnle. Inu" I!

‘,
l'
‘r.
5 Sketch second profile.

The sketch consists ofa
short, horizontal line
starting at the bottom lefi, a
tangent arc, and a spline.
A spline or style spline
could be used here.
21B
Waler Bultle Cage
6 Projected curve.
Create a Projected Curve fin using the
two sketches.

’.
For the Path (‘_’
, Select the 3D Curve feature.
Set the Diameter ® ofthe profile circle to 4.75mm.
Click OK J .
8 Optional: Fit Spline.

Smooth out the transitions in the sweep
path and generate one continuous smooth
face in the model by using the
Fit Spline L tool.
11p The curve will first need to be convened to
sketch entities.
119
Waler some Cage
22!)
Lesson 6
Threads and Library Feature
Parts
Upon successful complenon ofrhis lesson. you will be able m:

- Creme and use Library Feature Pans.
I Mode] threads
I Understand how m improve performance wirh complex pans.
I Use rhe Spln Line 100].
- Sweep along model edges.
221
Lesson 6 soLIDwoRKs
Threads and Llhmry Feature Pans
Bottle Features In this lessen, we will be adding a thread feature and

label outline to the Bottle that was started in a
previous lesson. Bath of these features will make
use of Library Feature Part tiles (".SLDLFP) in
different ways.
Libmry Feature Library Feature Part files (*.SLDLFP) save feature information to be
Farts reused. The feature information can be as simple as a single sketch, or
can include multiple sketchebased and applied features. Library feature
files can be added directly to a model to automate cemmon sketches or
features, or they can be used to automate profiles for features such as
Thread (see Thread Feature on page 222) and Structural Member
(See the SOLIDWORKS Weldmcrlls course).
Case Study: The first feature we will add to the Bottle

Modeling will be a Thread feature.
Threads Models can contain two types of threads:
standard threads or nonstandard threads.
Standard threads are not modeled in the
part. Instead, they are represented on the
model and associated drawing using thread symbols, drawing
annotations, and notes. These thread representations are referred to as
cosmetic threads.
Nonstandardthreads .r/lauldbe modeled. These threads, like the threads
on the neck ofthis bottle, cannot simply be specified by a note.
Threads may also need to be physically represented in the model if
downstream applications such as Nc machining, rapid prototyping, and
FEA require it.
Thread Feature The Thread feature automates a helical sweep to create cut or extnlded
threads. By default, thread profiles for lnch, Metric, and SP4xx Bottle
smndards are included for use. If a custom thread profile is required, it
must be created as a sketch and saved as a Library Feature Fan. Profiles
must be saved to the proper file location as defined in Options {35},
System Options, File Locations, Thread Profiles.
Where to Find It - CommandManager: Features
Thread
> Hole Wizard Flyout a >
I Menu: Insert, Feature, Thread

SOLIDWORKS Lesson 6
threads and Library Feature Pzfls
1 Open an e 9 part.
Open the part Custom Thread from the
This part contains a sketch of the thread profile ~
we wish to use for the Battle.
Thread Profile The design nra Thread profile will determine how it behaves in the
Thread feature. Some things to consider when designing a thread
profile include:
I The Origin location will be the default pierce location for the
automated sweep path.
. Configurations can be used to create multiple sizes ofa similar
profile ifapproprime.
I To define the pitch to be used with the profile, a vertical centerline
from the Origin can be created and dimensioned to match the pitch
length.
2 Define the pitch.
‘
Edit Sketehl [2.
‘
4m
Sketch a vertical Centerline a"
M
L
—
from the Origin. ISO
Dimension (" the line to be 015". x

Optional: Rename the dimension
Pitch.
Exit sketch C.
3 Identify required file location.
To use this profile for a thread tum
feature, we must save it as a Library 5"
Feature Part in the proper file
location.
Click Options (:2, System Options, File Locations,

Thread Profiles.
The file location displayed is where the profile must be saved in order
to be recognized by the Thread feature.
Click Cancel.
223
Lesson 5 soLlDwoRKs
Saving a when using the Save As command to create a Library Feature Part,
Library Feature first preeselect the features you want included in the file. Only the
pan features selected will he recognized when the file is used.
4 Select Sketchl.
Click Sketchl in the FeamreMauager Design Tree.
The features to be included as Library Features for reuse should be
selected prior to saving.
5 Save as Library Feature Parl.
Click Save As.
Change the Save as Type to Lib Feat Pan (‘sldlfp).
Note Changing the file type redirects the file location to the Design Library
folder. This has the same parent directory as the default location for
Thread Profiles.
Browse to the Thread Profiles folder. The default location for
Winduws is C: \ Progl'amData.\SOL]DWORKS\
<SOLIDWORKS versiun>\Thread Profiles.
Click Save.
GResuils.
The open document is now Custom
Thread. SLDLFR
‘Eifl9. )
ii] Custom Thread (dehuDd-ubj

The library books icon .1] at the top
ofthe FeatureManager indicates the
library feature part file type.
The “L" overlaying the Sketehl
feature icon indicates this is the r m Annmarie
library feature. W M5
E Mm"
Tip lfyou forget to preeselect the library 'H WWW
features, they can still be added to the
L31 ""“P'm
EU ”WW-f
Library Feature Part by righteclicking
the feature and selecting Add to
El “'9'“th
Library.
L. orig...
G, skate»
7 Close the Library Feature Part.
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 6
Threads and Library Feature Pzrts

Open the pan Bottle from the Lesson06\
Case Study folder. This is the model as it was
saved at the end ochssrm 4: Immduclirm lo
Sweeping.
9 Thread feature.
Click Thread
-.
10 Thread Location
For Edge of Cy inder (b, click the top outside
edge ofthe Bottle neck.
Click Offset and set the value to 0.100". This is
the offset for the start ofthe thread from the top a Ii1 omel
Edge'
E him in
For Start Angle lg , type 27ndeg. m issued

11 Thread End Conditi nl rmmm A
Define the Thread End Condition by E Wm -

Revolutions. a hs
l: Mum mind use.»
For Revolutions C', type 1.5.
12 Thread Specification. km My! A
Under Specification, the Type is Custom Z revue-uni .
Note
Thread. This is the profile we saved.
If there were multiple configlrations for the
a is
EM“”‘“"‘“""““'"
:
profile they could be selected from the Size
(“31d-
Empe
A
.
e
[—ltu3un.. mum
l7
The Diameter @ is determined by the
cylindrical edge that was selected.
.5.
l ovum
The Pitch a: is defined in the profile sketch. in:
These values can he overridden by selecting the
icons and typing a value. »
a mdemma
For Thread Method, select Extrude Thread.
225
Lesson 6 sounwoRKs
rhieads and Library Feature Parts
13 Thread Preview.
Zoom in on a Right
of the thread.
5 view to see a preview
The profile will need to be rotated to be
Correct.
For Rotation Angle H, type 180deg.

Because we designed the thread profile with
the proper Origin location, the profile is now
located correctly. lfa different pierce location
was required, the Locate Profile button could
be used to select another vertex in the sketch.
Click OK t/ .
14 Add revolve to end of thread.

An easy way to round err and finish the ends of
the thread is to create a revolved feature. Do this
for both ends of the thread.
Tip Conven the edges of the face at the end of the
thread into a new sketch. Use the vertical edge
where the thread meets the body of the neck as
the axis of revolution.
15 Save the part.
Performance Performance is always something to consider when working with

Considerations complex parts such as the Bottle. As geometry gets more complex,
performance tends to slow. Sweeps and multiathickness shells as well
as features such as, threads, lofis, boundary features, and advanced
fillets all have an impact on system resources and performance. There
are, however, some steps you can take to minimize this impact.
Performance In Options, System Options, untieeemammcmmnam

Settings in System
Options
Performance, there are
several settings which afiect all
at:mmI;17:?“
H): “mi
We sung comm
documents. D "*7 W'W‘W" "W “-M can lmlu: omit.

E minor mite mimmat
Turning omhe default setting
for shaded previewing can improve performance.
Also be sure Verification on rebuild is turned off to increase rebuild
times. This is a valuable tool to check complex models for intersecting
faces, but it should only be turned on when needed (this setting is
covered in detail in the Surface Modeling course).
225
sounwoRKs Lesson 5
Threads and Library Feature Paris
Performance For individual documents, cream morirncueimimivioeidon

Settings in the settings that afiect M“ ”WW"
Document performance are
mum lumAmasn
Properties contained in the Image
l
Quality options. The aim aw
23::
amp n mini
Image Quali settings gX-vettuellxtlmmh marinara
‘
/
for Shaded and
Wireframe also have an WiS'KZTL'CW" MMWVMW"
no» lslwrell
impact on graphical
regeneration
Use the lowest possible
l/pnrthgl‘iuuslmérl
Emmaarm.iennprnreaper
settings mm 5“" give lamamarmemmrsrtwrwairsamrarnew
. . Doom mviangemedgedelmmnn
acceptable image quality, quid mime
Since these are Dnmmenl
Properties, they are saved in document templates.
Suppressing Performance can also be improved for models by temporarily
Fealures suppressing features that are not required for fiinher operations.
Suppressing a feature causes the system to ignore it during any
calculations. Not only i it removed from the graphic display, the
system ireaLs suppressed features as ifthey are not even there. This can
significantly improve system response and performance when working
with complex parts.
When suppressing features, however, keep in mind you cannot access
or reference any ofthe geometry ofa suppressed feature. it is also
imponant to recognize the parent/child relations within the model.
when a feature is suppressed, its children will automatically be
suppressed as well.
Accessing the There are several ways to access theSuppress command:
Suppress Command 1'
- Shortcut Menu: Righirclick a feature and Click Suppress
I Menu: Edit, Suppress
Accessing You can unsuppress features in the same way they are suppressed, but
Unsuppress with there is an additional option available ifyou wish to unsuppress a
Dependant: feature along with all its child features.
I Menu: Edit, Unsuppress with Dependanls

Parent/Child Creating parent/child relationships is also something to consider ifyou
Relationships are trying to achieve optimal performance. Essentially, the more
dependencies a feature has, the more complex it is and the slower it will
be to rebuild.
127
Lesson 6 soLIDwoRKs
means and Library Feature Pzns
?.
Using the Freeze An alternative to suppressing features to )
Bar increase performance would be to utilize the
Freeze Bar. The Freeze Bar can be moved §’ We lW-u~<<v=~-vl»w-yw
from the 10p ofthe FeatureManager tree to any ”m”
location in feature history. Any feature that .
precedes the freeze bar is "frozen" and will not * ram panes-l
be rebuilt. Frozen features are still visible in E :‘filu:mwm>

the model and can be referenced, but they 5] YupPline
cannot be modified. E mint
Plum
an a
To use the Freeze Bar, it must he turned on »
C Show; in
.
from Options
»
C 3 Flows in:
System Options,
_
{Q , , I‘ E MW“,
General. Click the option to Enable Freeze ,
q a M mum
barto enable this function. ' 8 B Mum
.r a We;
not.
' 31mm
, 3mm
. MM
16 Image (In .
The Battle is not so complex that is slowing
graphical performance, so we will increase the
Image Quality to make the neck ofthe Bottle
appear less segmented.
Access Options En), Document Properties,
Image Quality and move the slider for Shaded
and drafl quality HLRIHLV resolution toward
the right until the circle preview is acceptable.
Click OK.
Note Image Quality settings effect graphical regeneration time, while model
features contribute to rebuild time.
228
sounquKs Lesson 5
rmaas and Library Feature parts
. Mmm was"
—
17 Evaluate rebuild time.
()n the Evaluate tab ot‘ the
CommandManager, click
m.
Parkman“ Eva'flfit’" 19- yiffi’itiifiil‘fthiifii‘tii
The Performance Evaluation
dialog shows the totzl‘time to ‘;':;:‘°:; 2;: 1‘1““
rebuild the part. The teatures are airman 25m in.

listed in order according to which 3:17;; 3; :3;
is Contributing most to the rebuild Lima m no
time 0mm 5u m
gum ru m
bum in in
steepm find no
lusm mm m an
1a Evaluate Thread Feature.

lfwe wanted to increase the performance ofthis model, we could use
the Performance Evaluation dialog to access ParenIIChild relations
and Suppress features listed high in the feature order. These options
are availahle by rightxtlicking selections In the dialog.
Rightrclick Threadl in the
dialog and choose Parent/Child . pmmmmw mm
mm,
from the Shortcut menu. i. m We“ a m mm
m his; mum amt
Since this feature and its C‘”’"‘"‘”"“‘ ”“7”"
children features . Revolvel mm
and Revolvez . are not needed
for future operations, it can be
temporarily suppressed to
increase the rebuild time.
19 Suppress Threadl.
Rightrclick Threadl m the
dialog and click Suppress 1'.
Close the Parent/Child dialog.
Notice the rebuild time has decreased.
20 Suppress Shelli.
Repeat the previous steps to evaluate and suppress Shelll.
21 Close Performance Evaluation.
129
Lesson 5 someoRKs
rnreeds end Llhmry Feature Pans
Case Study: The outline ofthe bottle label is a swept feature with a
Adding the circular profile. We know what the label border will
Label Outline look like from the Front, so have created a sketch to
represent the profile. sinee we plan to use this profile
in many bottle designs, we will save it as a library
feature part so it can easily be applied to multiple
models.
Designing a When a library feature is applied directly tn a model, external

Library Feature references from the original features are prompted for new references
Part in the Library Feature PropertyManager. nrerefdre, when designing a
Library Feature Pan it is important to be aware of external references
that are being created.
All 2D sketches have at least one external reference . the sketch plane.
Other external references for a sketch include any relation or dimension
to elements outside the sketch. The Display/Delete Relations la tool
is useful for evaluating external relations for an active sketch.
For features any geometry that is referenced when defining the feature
will require a new reference in when the library feamre pan is reused.
22 Open an exi ing part.

()pen the pan Label Profile from the Lesson06\Ca.se Study folder.
23 Evaluate External references.
Edit Sketchl [2.
Click Display/Delete Relations Jo.
Select External from the menu.
#5 IMQOQ
Mmdckm
Jag
H.003
Loco
The Coincident relation to the Origin is the only external reference ill
the sketch.
230
sounwoRKs Lesson 6
rureads and Literary Feature Pans
24 Exit Sketch C.
25 Select Sketch].
26 Save as Library Feature Part.

Click Save As.
Change the Save as Type to Lib Feat Part (*sldlfp).
Changing the file type redirects the file location to the Design Library
location. Click Back
folder.
6
to return to the Lesson06\Case Study
Click Save.
Library Feature Library Feature files are added to a model by using drag and drop. They
File Locations are generally applied from the Design Library m but can also be
dragged and dropped from File Explorer b feature
or Windows Explorer.
In a production environment, custom library pans should be
saved to a library location outside of the default library. To define a
custom library location to be the default save location, add the location
in Options {it , System Options, File Locations, Design Library
and use Move Up to position the new location first in the list.
mm our»:
General
Dmumvgl
we, we
Are:
Pefiermnu
our,
Sketzh
—i—m
Hun/Fill
r magnmmmxolianmiolmwakxi ”lawman rum a“
mean/ear:
airplay/genera"
Mama:
samuin
Emu Minnie)
Ddzulrlemiluel
Frmszunlgu
Alternatively, Library Feature Pans can be saved to any folder and

added from File Explorer B
or Windows Explorer.
231
Lesson 5 soLIDwoRKs
27 Evaluate the Label Profile.

The open document is now Label
’. 5‘ I! 91 ,
7 lane mate
ProfileSLDLFF. lDfliuhttDfliutlthw
I We“
[11
r
The library books icon [I] at the top ofthe

FeatureManager indicates the library fearure
part file type i m inmate";
m an one
r
the Skerehl feature ioon
,
The “L" overlaying E Mm. NM”)
indicates this is the library feature. lgJ
Emma“
l: “prune
There are also 2 additional folders appearing m nines"
in the FeamreManager tree: References and L W"
[1 Swan
Dlmenslons.
. V
Anatomy of a Library Feature Parts eontain special FeatureManager folders which are
Libmry Feature used to customize the information in the Library Feature
Part ProperryManager when the file is used.
I References Folder
This folder lists the entities that will require new references These
references can be renamed from the folder to make them easier to
identify.
I Dimensions Folder
This folder lists the dimensions that will be transfered. Dimensions can
be renamed directly from the folder to make them easier to identify
Dimensions that appear in this top level folder will be available to be
overridden if desired. Dimensions can be moved to Locating
Dimensions and Internal Dimensions suhefolders to control their
function in the Library Feature PropertyManager.
I Locating Dimensions
Users will be prompted to define the values for dimensions in this
folder when inserting the library feature.
I Internal Dimensions
Users will not be able to access dimensions in this folder when
inserting, the library feature.
232
sounwoRKs Lesson 6
means and Literary Feature Parts
28 Modify References.
Expand the References folder.
’. Ellfi$ >
7
Ill ubdpmfile (Ddauhunaaumrmw
Tm
Rename Sketch Pointl to be Base Location. .
FeatureMrmager tree elements can be renamed
I f :1?"ij
Home,
using standard Windows functions such as a

slow doubleeclick or selecting the item and
. . nmm
6‘ meanest..."
{" weanesmrm
pressing F2.
e urgdhdlusuflmem
6‘ Wlmosmm
29 Modify dimensions.
Expand the Dimensions folder.
V
I :3::3:::mao
The sketch dimensions have already been
- .mrannmwm
F.“ Fillet maiusoaedem
given descriptive names. amp
Move Dimension from Base to the Locating , gmxm
Dimensions folder using drag and dmp. B said Boers
Move Fillet Radius to the Internal
i:[j] Mlhmllflw‘smfllefi
Frnmlfllirle
Dimensions folder. [3 haw-n:

[3] Ram Ilene
30 Save and close the library feature part. L Unau-
[1 5mm
File Explorer We Will be adding the Label Profile to the Bottle from File Explorer.
File Explorer Bfileis used toFiles
search drives and folders for
SOLIDWORKS types. can be
opened from File
Explorer hy
doubleeclicking or added to existing models using drag and drop. Drag
and drop can be used to add components to assemblies, automate the
Insert Part command, or add Library Features.
233
Les-an 6 sounwoRKs
Threads and Library Feature Park
31 F e Explorerl
Click the File Explorer E tab of l I wuflwmfmnmgrnu
the Task Pane. ‘
fffgjg‘mm
Doublevclick the falders »
I LBW
Lessonoe and Case Study to
r
I mam}
find the Label Profile library
p
I rm,“
t I new
feature part. ‘
Il ‘9‘“
I mm
Note The default location for the I
I Wm mm
required file is: on
*
{133;
somwoaxs Training Files\ .(mmrwaslwfl
Advanced Part Modehng\ humming“! \m mwmiumm
’
Lesson06\Ca.se Study wrrmtemv

. | Eran:
32 Drag and drop. . mm
Drag the Label Profile from emu
mm;
File Explorer and drop it into the m mallet/om
Vllelmdwnied m
mm
gmphics area cf the Bottle Madelmghesmuflfitu: Ingstptlla
mmmn wile mm
document window. m Mamie rum/lull
SIX: 1.? KB
33 Placement Plane.
Use the
m mam m
unmet”,
PropertyMznagerto
.4 x ‘
”(MM
_A
WM—
A
define the Front. Plane
as the Placement
“3'”- L
34 References.
The preview window of
the label feature is
highlighting the Base
Location sketch paint 7 "SW-“'-
that needs a new
reference.
Click the part’s Orig]: W1“; '2‘?
as the new reference.
Shem: A
L cinnaeaimnmhn
New Vllur
n mm in
4 25m
Nelwhl
new
mum
an
“in
soLIchlRKs Lesson 6
rhreaus and tiarsry Feature Parts
35 Dimensions
Under Locating Janetnuunn
Dimensions, select the
value cell for Dimension
tanrncantmm
from Base. N... that
rnemnmmrn. arm
Type 05"-
Note The other dimensions from
the sketch are shown in a
”we below and can be
an...”
Llovtmflrfllmemwnv-luu
a
overridden. However, the ”31;.” V3"

Fillet. Radius dimension is “"313; 5:
not accessible. “ml 3 2‘"
Click OK \I .
as Results. . m Label Profile<1>(Ddiun)
There is now a Label Profile< 1 > library
‘
G. 5mm
feature appearing the tree. This feature
contains the information reused from the library feature part file. In this
case, there is only a sketch.
Dissolve Library Library feature parts can remain in the tree as a library feature to allow
Feature access to the Library Feature PropertyManager, or they can be
dissolved. Dissolving a library feature moves the reused features to the
top level in the tree.
Dissolve Library Feature removes the library feature and shows each
child feature as ifthey were created directly in the model using
smndard methods.
Where to Find It a shortcut Menu: Righteclick a library feature in the FeatureManager
tree, click Dissolve Library Feature.
37 Dissolve Library Feature.

Right~click the Label Profile feature and click Dissolve Library
Feature.
The label profile now appears as a standard sketch.
235
Lesson 6 soLlDwoRKs
Threads and Llhmry Fealure Pans
Creating the The label profile will be used to create a Split Line curve feature. This
Sweep Path will split the face otthe Battle eddy and produce an edge that can be
used as the sweep path.
Splitting a Face A Split Line feature creates additional edges on exisllng faces nr
surfaces ofa model to split them into multiple selectable areas. Split
lines can be generated on a silhouette edge 0le face, by projecting a
sketch or curve onto a face, or at the intersection ofa plane or surface
body With faces oftlle model. A Splll Line is considered a curve feature
because it results in additional edges in the model, but does not
generate any additional surface nr solid geometry.
Split Linc Types
Silhouette Prnjccfinn luterscctinll
5..
A face may need to be split to create the proper selectable area for
operations such as applying appeamnces or a Shell feature.
Additionally the edges produced by a Split Line can he used as
elements for features such as sweeps.
Where to Find ii I ComlnandManager: Features > Curves U > Split Line @
I Menu: Insert, Curve, Splil Line
236
soLIDwoRKs Leila" 6
“leads and mm Female Pans
38 Split Liner
a m” a)
Click Splll Line a. 4 x
For Type of Split, click Projection. trout:-new.“
A
,
For Sketch to Project C, select the label sketch. :WW
mum
'5
For Faces to Split 3, select the face of the E I MW
7
Bottle Body.
Click Single dlrecflon and Reverse direction to a
only split the faee at the from of the Bottle.
a 5mm: new
li Rum: mm
Click OK .1 .
39 Results.
The system projects the sketch onto the front
snr—faee of the bottle and splits the face by
ereahng new edges. These edges will he used as
the sweep path ta Create a boss ta outhne the
label axea on the bottle.
40 Hlde Q the label sketchr
237
Lesson 5 soLlDwoRKs
rnresds and Llhmry Feature Pans
Sweeping To create the label outline, we will sweep a profile along the Split Line
Along Model edges in the model. Edges can be selected directly for use ofa sweep
Edges path, without copying them into a sketch. When using this technique,
an additional option for tangent propagation becomes available.
lfyou wish to use nonstangent edges ofa model for a sweep path, use
the SelectionManager to choose the “group" of edges you wish to use
(see The Selection Manager on page I67).
Propagate Along When you select a model edge as a sweep path the option for Tangent
Tangent Edges propagation serves the same function as the similar option in filleting.
If you select a single segment ofthe edge, this option causes the sweep
i
to continue along lhe adjacent, tangent edges.
41 Circular Profile Sweep.

sincetheprofileofthlsfeatureisasunple
, . r
circle centered on the path» it can be

Qt
"s
E ..B 9
W" .
or a
4 X
automated from the Sweep ProperlyManager.
hum-mum a
I. _ 232%;
For the Path

Llne.
c , select an edge ofthe Split Ereneentuveptemen
lzaeurommm
Set the Diameter Q ofthe profile circle to Momma
0.125". MMemrrrrulr
Lampoon”
42 Modify Sweep Options.
‘7‘".” ru m N V
Expand Options.
mmmemwlly e
Click Tangent propagation to propagate the
sweep along the tangent edges ofthe path.
Click Merge tangent faces to create the sweep as one continuous face.
Click OK t! .
43 Unsuppress features.
Select the features in the tree that have been suppressed.
Click Unsuppress T'.
238
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 6
threads and Library Feature Pzfls
44 Analyze results.
Click Section View
aand section the
model using the Right Plane ‘ib.
The order ofthe sweep feature needs to
be modified so that it is shelled. It can
he moved within the FeztureMznager
tree before the Shell to accomplish this,
but first Parent/Child relationships
need to be considered.
45 Enable Dynamic Reference \fisualizalion. ,

Righteclick the top level of the
FeatureManager tree. Ml: (Dd-m<<Dd-ull>,l)~plny§n
Click Dynamic Reference Visualization

g Hmw
5W
(Parent) g; in the contexl toolbar. : $373:ij
46 View Relerences. 5,5 M"""""“'>"‘““>
[:1 Hum vim
Hover the cursor over the label outline sweep [3 WM
feature. Dynamic Reference Visualization m naming
uses arrows to indicate the features parent E?” F
reterenees. , CW _
W
The Sweep feature has a dependency on the : {1:33:31
Split Line feature so cannot proceed it in . {a mum
feature order. The Split Line feature will need Pi N“
to be moved first. I E :23:
’, M”
47 Reorder. ‘ WW
Drag and drop the Split Linel feature before
the Shelll feature in the tree.
Drag and drop the Sweepl feature between Split Linel and 81169111.
48 Resulls.
The Sweep is now included in the
Shell.
239
mum s
Tmads and Libmy Fume Pans
sauuwoRKs
49 Save and close (he part.

We are finished with lhe bottle at this time. Additional features will be
added in complete the design in exercises tluoughout the course.
To add a hp at the neck of the bottle, see Exemire 25.- Adding the Bottle
Lip on page 246.
The fillets are applied to the Bottle in Exercise 41.- Bottle Fillets on
page 445.
Warm Gear
Exercise 24: To build the Worm (iear pan pictured

Worm Gear at the right, the plan is to nverbuild
the features and then trim to the
proper size. For the thread feature, a
custom thread profile will he
required
This exemi e reinforces the
following sk' s:
I Lilrmrv Fen/um Parts on
page 222
- Case Study: Mode/[rig Threads on page 222
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open the pan Gear Tooth Profile from the Lesson06\Exercise
folder.
This pan contains a sketch ofthe thread profile we wish to use for the
Worm Gear.
2 Evaluate the sketch.
The Gear Tooth Frufile includes a centerline to define the pitch.
Additionally it has heen designed so the Origin is located at the proper
pierce locaiimh
The pmfile is overbuilt so (hai ifit twists during the automated helical
sweep it will still be in contact with the faces ot‘the pant For more
information on twist in sweep features, see Profile ()rtenmltrm on
page 266‘
i
/fi
l
f
l 19
latch)
9.400 5270 29W

[DI l (05)
’ [Ovemuldl
241
Worm Gear
Exit sketch 5.
Identify required file location.
To use this profile for a thread feature, we must save it as a Library
Feature Fan in the proper rile loeation.
Click Options (é), System Oplions, File Locations,
Thread Profiles
The rile location displayed is where the profile must be saved in order
to be recognized by the Thread feature.
Click Cancel.
Select Sketch 1.
The features to be included as Library Features for reuse should be
selected prior to saving.
Save as Library Feature Parl.
Click Save As.
Change the Save as Type to Lib Feat Part (‘sldlfp).
Note Changing the file type redirects the file location to the Design Library
folder. This has the same parent directory as the default location for
Thread Profiles.
Browse to the Thread Profiles folder. The default location for
Windows IS C: \ ProgramData\ SOLDDWORKS\
<SOLIDWORKS Version>\ Thread Profiles.
Click Save.
Resulls.
nie open document is now Gear
Tuotih FPDf'ile.SLDLFF.
‘E if}:
9 o )
[i]
II
GearTnmh Pvnflle (Drinuh<<Ddiult>
The library books icon m at the top , Rdumcs
of the FeamreManager indicates the V
Dimensions
library feature part file type. i Hm”
The “L" overlaying tlie Sketehl 5mm
feature icon indicates this is the Maui-ens
library feature. El Solid Bodies
Tip lfyou forget to prerselect tlie liinary
”“9"“ ”“9“”
features, they can still be added to the
Library Feature Part by riglitelieking
‘5]
T?“
m
°P
the feature and selecting Add to

E
j "lamb":
'
Library.
L. Ongm
E Simon
2A2
mm Gear
Close the library feature part.
Exit the sketch if necessary and close the Gear Tooth Profile.
New part.
Open a new part using the FBI'LNDM template and name it
Worm Gear.
10 Extrude a cylinder.
Use the Mid Plane end
condition to create the
cylinder pictured at the right. lea
11 Thread feature.
Click Thread Q.
0340
12 Thread Location. @ W a, a;
For Edge of Cylinder Q, click the right v x
[Ll
cylindrical edge. W A
13 Thread End Cond n. G

Define the Thread End condition by Up to 0 ll l
Selection. ”m“
[g ninth,
For End Location a, select the lefi end face. WWW A
when“.
I—
Damn
14 Thread Specification.
59mm A
Under Spe cation, for Type select Gear Tooth Me
Profile. This is the profile you saved.
m
in
Note lfthere were multiple configurations for the mm .
profile they could be selected from the Size field. l6
The Diameter @ is detennined hy the cylindrical
edge that was selected. The Pitch a: is defined In
‘55
Hui
nine mm
mm
.
the profile sketch. These values can be overridden a Extmdemread
by selecting the icons and typing a value. lw-iwmvie
, in n "on
For Thread Method, select Extrude Thread. Mlv'mvrlrell/
in net;
For Rolation Angle E, type 180deg.
2L3
8‘
Worm our
15 Thread Options. meow“. A
For Options, select Left-hand thread. .7 wt rundown:

Cheek Trim with start face.
.3 MM mum
L New. :tm
Cheek Trim with end face. li mm mm mm
E mm m and m.
Click OK ./ .
16 Trim the threads.

Select Sketchl from [he FeamreManzger tree.
Use this sketch for a new Extruded Cut E .
Offset the cut to start 50mm from the sketch plane as shown.
Set the End Condition to Through All in one direction.
Use Flip side to cut to cut away everything outside the profile.
@ mum. m
v x a
h. ‘3‘
‘2'
W.
I’ I
A
limwtmuamt
on mm:
m
H
an
mm”.
v
V
Wnnn Gear
17 Mirror the feature.

Mirror H4] the cut feature over the
Right Plane to trim the other side
nfthe threads.
18 Shaft cut.
Use an Exlruded Cut If to create the feature shown below.
/&
we
19 Mirror.
Mirror M1] the cut yuu created in the previous step using the
Right Plane.
245
Afldlng me Home Llp
Exercise 25: Create 2 library feature pan that includes 2 bottle lip and fillets which
Adding the can be reused on multiple pans.
Bottle Lip
- Library Feamre Parts on page 222

- Designing a Library Feature Part on page 230
- Artammy a/a Library Fearare Parr on page 232
- Dismlve Library Feature on page 235
Units: inches
Procedure
Create a new part.
Open a new part using the Pal-LIN template.
We will use this document to build the library feature pant
Base Feature.
Create the Extruded Boss fl
is shown
by sketehing on the Top Plane.
Note This feature will not be included as a
library feature, but is required to hold the
Lip feature and Create the desired the“
\L
references.
2‘41;
245
Adding the Bottle Llp
3 Lip profiler
Create the sketch for the Lip feature by
sketching, on the top face.
Use Convert Entities ® and Offset
Entities E
to create the profile as
shown.
.Im
4 Lip leaturer
Create an Extruded Boss fl fur the Lip feature.
The thickness ofthe Lip is 0.100".
offset the feature to start 0.500" from the sketch plane as shown.
.
‘3] owner... a)
o x
:l
rut-r E
M...
I‘
a
Ii
a run" +
E 7‘
I
Note Recall that all external geometry references will require new geometry
to reference when the library feature is reused. Therefore it is important
to create the appropriate dimensions and relations in the library feature
part. By following the steps above you have created references to the
top face ofthe base feature by using it as the sketch plane, and a
reference to the top edge by converting it. These references will require
new selections when reusing the library feature. It is best practice to
keep external references to a minimum when designing library features
Click OK J .
Rename the feature Lip.
:47
Afldlng me Home Lip
Add filleIsi
Add R033" fillets to the Lip feature as
shown.
Rename the fillet feature Lip Fillet.
Select the library features.

Use the Ctrl key to select both the Lip and Lip Fillet features from [he
FeatureManager Tree.
Save as Library Feature Pan.
Click Save As.
Change the Save as Type to Lib Feat Part (‘sldlfp).
Changing the file type redirects the me location to the Design Library
location. Click Back 6 to return to the LessonD6\ExePcises folder
Change the File name to be Bonle_Lip. Click Save.
Evaluate the Label Profile.
The open document is now 7
Elf I:
‘" ,
BomeJdpSLDLFP. m semen, (unauhuwaumrnispm

I em...
.
»
Meme
The Lip and Lip Fillet features are displayed .
with an “L" overlaying the tennire icon.
There are 3150 2 additional tenders appearing »
murmurs
‘
in the FeamreManager tree: References and E :fij‘jfi’ww
Dimensions. [3 Mir...
m rep in":
m hymn.“
L. cm
. immune
, in up
anemic
Adding the we Llp
Rename refereneesr
Expand the References folder.
V
CER$C>
Rename Edge 1 to be Top Ouside Edge [in menu menumoennneesun
Tlp
of Neck.
FeatureManager tree elements can be
~
I News
I is. Mirage
Pixemml’lim
sweet
I
l
renamed using smndard Windows —
amnion
functions such as n sluw double~olick or Q“ thckllswhfl
selecting the item and pressing F2. 9 mm [mm Tapblrp
10 Rename dimensions. 0(N mm wmmsmenz
Na mop
II rm. 9mm;
film
Expand the Dimensions folder.
ism", nnmnr
Give the dimensions descriptive names as
shown at the right.
11 Drganixe dimensions.
Move the dimension Offset from Top to
. I (‘mnemn
Thigh-mun
the Locating Dimensions folder using Q“ Diner wmhosmrnz
drag and drop. a ma mupminimum
I a MyallmnVanlJp
film
. lo<nlng
12 Save and close the library lealure part.

I new. lawn.“
The next step win he to test the library features on the model of the
Bottle.
Open the part Bottlejxercise from the
LessDnOG \ Exercises folder.
249
Afldlng me Home Lip
14 File Explorer.
Click the File Explorer
me Task Pan a
3 tab of A
I. munwuwmmrils
. a twin
AmmuvD-n Mvdefing
r
Doubleitlick the folders ‘
= :5”:
Lessonoe and Exercises In
find the Bottlegdp library
E] ‘
.l was
LN“
. I (mm
i
i Lament
feature pan.
E D
Note The default location for the El . I am

required file is: on f
:;::j;:1:':‘“‘
SOLEDWORKS Training Files\ .mgbllmkslbpl“
Advanced Part Modeling\ mugs-Irv Emehasmw
Lesson06\Exercises
,,
Warrw‘fimw
.sea.
Q aenrmn mm. SanR
new. new
seam
petisninwem ml"!
Ynlmngfllelmdvmzedhfl
Mtameuemiiemn
\Emflulpslmrv
Mn
DmeMadihzd nan/nit we T ml m 5
an as xa
15 Drag and drop.

Drag the Bothlejdp from File Explorer and drop it into the graphics
area ofthe BottleiEXeI‘CiSE document window.
1G Placement Plane.
Use the PrupenyManager to define the top face erthe heme neck as the
Placement Plane.
17 References.
renetrmnw
The preview window is
highlighting the edge that needs a
new reference.
Select the mp, ouLside edge othe
battle neck as the new reference.
,Jw
'Irlmuvl:
250
soLIDwoRKs Exemize 25
Adding the Home Lip
18 Locating Dlmensions.
Under Locating Dlmensions, select the value «run one: Eda: m m
cell for Offset from Top, type 0.44.
Click OK J . itnririrnimmum
“W
m Hum-1K dimmer true,
A
M-rl Vin.
mnmm
mama “L
i in
mm i in"
19 Resulls. . m mjjpdflwiuk)
There is new a BottleiLip<1>
library feature appearing the tree.
, fl hp
This feature contains the information
m up W
reused from the library feature part
me.
20 Optional: Dissolve Library Featurer
lfyou would prefer to show the Lip and Lip Finet as standard features,
right—click the BottleiLip library feature in the tree and click Dissolve
Library Feature.
251
snarsmp Canlmuefl
Exercise 26: [n nus Exercise. you‘ll complete me starshlp from Ere/use 12::
Starship Slam/111) Fuselage on page 1an
Continued
ThlS exercise reinforces rhe following skills:
- Sweeping on page [56

- LAl>mrv FEM/um Parts on page 222
- Sweep mm mm Curves on page 164
- Pummmg Radio on page 17
Units: cenlimelers
Procedure
1 Open part.
0an [he exisnng pan named Starship from rhe Lesson06\
Exercises folder or use me Starship Fuselage model cremed in
Exmm I8: 3mm”; p s‘eluge on page |80.
252
SOLIDWORKS Elemise 2s
starsnip continued
New sketch.
Open a new sketch on the .3
Top Plane.
Sketch a line for the sweep path as
~
shown.
Exit the sketch and name it
Wing Path.
3‘,
53/
Guide for trailing edge.
Sketch a line as shown.
Exit the sketch and name it Wing
Trailing Edge. "
152
Wing section.
4”
Open a new sketch on the 11
Right Plane.
Sketch three lines and an are as
i
shown at the right.
Dimension and constrain the sketch
according to the illustratictn.
Exit the sketch and name it Wing
Section.
Sweep with guide curves.

Create a Swept Boss
f
as shown.
Under Options, clear the Merge
results check box.
Because of the symmetry in the
model, our plan is to huild the wing
and engine and then mirror them.
However, patterning complex .
features such as a sweep with guide
curves can he problematic, even
with the Geometry Pattern option. A much better approach is to create
the wing and engine as a disjoint body and then mirror the body.
Rename the feature Wing.
:53
Surship Ennllnued
6 FilleIsl
Add a 91.5mm radius fillet id ilie leading edge ufthe Wing.
Add a Isflcm radius fillei id the ire ng edge er the wing.
7 File Explorer.
Click the File Explorer b ml; v Imwmnmne
ofthe Task Fans. 3
I:Sfi
lmm’mmma
V
imam]
Doubleeeliek ihe fulders E,
v
I mm
LessonOG and Exercises id :
find ilie library feature )

I new
Mn;
Engine Profile.
- -
e I 'cmmy
,
v I Liam em
)
I We
IQ whammy:
)
hum:
seine SLDPKT
a Drop and drone n ”rennin

Drag and drop the library pan renew-em» m ins-15min?-
on ilie planar face at Ihe end of I emmnlenw
“WW."
dieng. I ,
em
mm
Tip Dropping a library feature pan mm
omo a planar face automates imaginmsm mm
dieseleeiionorilre Placement
Plant
3mg“:
DM: Mnmicd
in 45 re
was/2W
WWW
v
254
Starship cununued
9 Edit the sketch

Under Location, click Edit Sketch.
Note When a library feature contains no external references, Edit Sketch is
used to locate the profile.
In the sketch there is a small,
vertical construction line. This will
be used to locate the profile.
we
\
10 Add relations.
Add a Midpoint relation between the bottom end ofthe
construction line and the bottom edge of the wing.
Drag the other end of the construction line and make it Coincident A
with the upper edge of the wing.
/.
Click Finish to exit the sketch.
255
51mm; Cnllllllued
11 Revolve.
Select the sketch and click Revolve Boss/Base ’-
Be sure Merge result is selected so the revolved feature merges with
the Wing.
Rename the feature Engine.
Hide ’% the Engine Profile sketch.
12 Fillel.
Create a 15cm radius fillet between the Wing
and the Engine. Fillet bath the upper and lower
sides of the Wing.
Name the filler ng/Engjne Blend.
13 Mirror.
Mirror the wingrengine body with respect to the Right Plane.
ref}
255
Starship Cummued
14 Combine.
Click Combine
'.
For Operation Type, click Add and select all three sulid bodies.
15 Fillets.
Create 120cm fillets between the Wing and the Fuselage
Name the fillel Upper Blend.
16 Sketch for an section.

Open a new sketeh on the planar face at
the afi end of the Fuselage.
Expand the Fuselage feature and select
the Profile sketch.
Use Convert Entities fl to copy it into
the active sketch.
Sketch a hne through the minor axis and
trim away half of the profile.
257
Exercise 26 scLlDwoRKs
swamp cunlmuea
17 Revolve.
Create a revolved feature wilh an Angle of
1 80".
Name the feature Aft Dome.
Optional The remainder of lhe exercise is optional. It focuses on appearances,

lights, and hackgmund images.
18 Edil color.
Change the overall part eolnr to medium gmy. The R, a E values are
128, 128,128.
Select the two pointed films ((he engine exhausl) and change their color
lo red (255, o, 0).
19 DisplayManager.
Click lhe DisplayMnnager0 tab in the Manager Pane. Then click
\fiew Scenes, Lighls, and Cameras fl.
25B
Starship eunlinuea
20 Lighls.
g I Q
Expnnd the Lights 33 folder. e x -.
Rightrclick Ambient and select an A
on in SolidWorks from the shoncm menu. EZZRZU‘ZZj’jjwm

Doubleeclick Directionall.
Adjust the senings to match the illustration nt
S
ON“
the right. i"
l
. .
The color is light cyan. The R. q B values are 02‘1“” 44

123, 255, 255. .i i
21 Add two spotlights. “WW

Rightrclick the Lights folder and click
Add Spot Lighl from the shoncux menu.
‘
. i
j7
”1th
LWW“
s
Repeat this to add n second spot light.
m
22 Adjust settings. 27am
Adjust the settings efthe two spot lights to

3 ‘
match the illustratiens below. The colur of e mm

Spetz is dark ninmhn. The R, B values areq '
‘
123, o, 64.
\swu w ‘34: L9
—,...
4 x I: e x n
m s s
giiistseiismss usssmssssos
.-
7‘
‘:
.sssiess
:lnintiiiis
isisss
[if 7 7 s lji
. .
‘ ‘
isissss sissiis
‘ii
y i ii 77175:!
. Miss .
l—‘
issuissi
l’
iiisiems
i A
. .
fl
ihsimnis A
331.3
m
i: isssisii
y minis s sinisiis
missiisiiissii missing.“
A
/
‘isiiiss s / lisiiiss +
lisiiiss
Aiming"
e
e
/ l
Alissiiss
units
.. ..
A
/
A
"9“. “
if i
ins
A "“1
b: ‘mdcw
7
259
surenip cumin-red
Inserting Image You can import an image file and use it as a background afa pan or
Files as assembly. Supported file types include:
BF°k9'°“"d
””95 . Winduws bitmap (*.bmp)
. Pcnable Network Graphics (*.png)
. l-ligh Dynamic Range (*.hdr)
. Tagged Image File min
. Adobe PhctcShcp (*.psd)
. Joint Phomgmphic Expert Group [JPEG J (*jpg)
Background images are static pictures that appear behind a model. The
environment is the 3D environment [hm surrounds the model. The
perspective ofihe animrlmcm in the graphics area changes when the
model is rotated. A background image will always appear the same
when moving and mlating.
23 Scene editor.
1n the DisplayManager Q, doubleeclick the Scene Q felder to Edit
Scene.
260
Slarsmp Continued
24 Add a background picture.

0" (he Basic tab. in the Background groupbnx. choose Image from
the drop down menu. Click Browse and select Nebula.tif from me
Lesson06\Eer’Cises\Nebula Images folder. Click OK ‘ J
261
sursmp Canlmuefl
25 Change me view.
(‘lrck Perspective
‘ m mm on a perspectlve View.
Rolale me view until you are sarisfied wirh rhe appearance.
Tip To mm offlhe reference triad, click Tools, Options, System Oplions,

DisplayISeleclion and clear me Display reference lriad check mark,
26 Save as .IPEG
Save a picture oflhe Slarship as a JPEG. Then save and exil me pan.
Optional Try using some oflhe olher TIFF images mm are Suppllcd in rhe
Nebula Images folder as backgrounds.
252
Lesson 7
Advanced Sweeping
Upon successful completion ofthls lesson, you will be able to:

Understand sweep options,
Apply profile orientation options to achieve the desired results
when sweeping
Understand and apply the path twtst options when sweeping.
Understand the role ot’guide curves in controlling [wish
263
Lesson 7 soLIDwoRKs
Anuneen Sweeplng
7
Sweep Options [n this lesson, we will be focusing on the am. A
advanced options in the sweep command for W i, "mm

WW!“ .
controlling sweep orientation and sweep end a
conditions. These settings are found in the
Options groiipbox iii the Sweep 7 Wm mention
PropenyManager and will vary depending on the r Merge hriwmttuu
[7 Know WM
types of sweep elements that are selected. A mamas
summary of the these options is listed below. rammed“
Profile Controls how the intermediate sections ot‘a sweep arc orientated, Options
Orientation include:
- Follow Path
The intermediate sections maintain the same angle with the path as the
initial profile. This is the default sweep setting.
- Keep Normal Constant
The intermediate sections maintain alignment with the initial profile
plane.
For more information: see PWJ/HL’ Orientation on page 266
Profile Twist Controls how the intermediate sections ot‘a sweep twist along the path.
Options include:
- None (2D Paths) or Natural (3D Paths)
No twist is applied. The intermediate sections tWist with the curvature of
the path.
Minimum Twist (tor 3D Paths only)
Applies a correction to minimize the twisting of intermediate sweep
Sections.
- Follow Path and First Guide Curve (page 280)
The twist will be based oil of a vector connecting the Path and First
Guide Curve elements.
Follow First and Second Guide Curves
The twist will be based OH 0ft) Vector Connecting the First Guide Curve
and Second Gulde Curve elements.
Specify Twist Value (page 292)
Allows the amount ot‘twist to be defined. TWist can be defined by
Degrees, Radians or Revolutions.
Specify Direction Vector (page 275)
Aligns the profile in the direction rit'a selected Direction Vector.
Tangent to Adjacent Faces (page 299)
When the path includes adjacent faces, this option forces the sweep
profile to be tangent to the adjacent face wliere geometrically possible.
234
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 7
Advanced Swuplng
Tangent Allows a sweep path to continue along tangent edges. This option is only
Prepagalion visible when an edge is selected as a path.
For more information: see Pmpugach/nng Tlmgfi/ll Edges on page 238
Merge nngenl With this option mi, faces resulting from tangent entities in the profile sketch
faces are merged together, creating an approximation.
For more information: see Quality ”film RL’Su/llrlg Fares on page [84
Show preview with this option (m, n shaded preview otthe sweep is displayed, changing as
elements otthe sweep are added. Complex sweep previews may slow
performance.
Merge result with this option (2/7; generates a separate solid body. This
a swept boss
option is not available when the sweep is the first feature in the part.
Align with end With this option mi, a sweep will continue beyond the geometric end ofthe
faces path through the end faces to the part. This option is not available when the
sweep is the first feature iii the part.
For more information: see Case Study: Aiigti Wil/X End Faces on page 285
[E
Additional Some additional sweep settings include
mm“ M “mg A
Sweep Settings
_
Curvature Display options for the sweep
preView and SnrllEnd Tangency controls.
““1“”le
SanIEnd Tangency settings will begin or spa tangena tyne
end the sweep normal to the path, regardless None .
of the other curves included in the feature.
Curt/Mme nanny A
Mexh preview
Zebra 3!"sz
: (mature tombs
265
Lesson 7 SOLIDWORKS
Advanced Sweeping
Profile Sweeps are created from a series of intermediate sections which

Orientation replicate the protile at various positions along the path. The
intermediate sections are then blended togethert When creating sweeps,
especially those with a 3D path, it's important to understand how to
control the orientation oftlie intermediate sections to get the desired
result
The sweep sections have degrees
of freedom that you control With
the with guide curves, and options
in the ProperryManager. To
understand these degrees of
freedom, consider the attitude of
an airplane.
By default, pitch and yaw are
defined by the orientation oftlie
profile's sketch plane to the path.
As the sweep progresses, it is the
path that controls pitch and yaw.
Roll is the twisting or spinning ofthe profile around the path. Generally
the challenge is to either induce twist (roll), or prevent it. This is done
using options or guide curves.
Intermediate Intermediate sections are referred to several times in this section in
Sections situations where SOLIDWORKS does not actually display thern.
intermediate sections can only be displayed for sweeps with guide
curves. l-lowever, visualiZing the intermediate sections is a good way to
understand the final geometry and reasons for why a sweep might fail,
such as selfeintersectinn.
266
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 7
Advanced Sweeping
Follow Path The default Profile Orientation setting for sweep features is Follow
Path. with this option, intermediate sections for sweeps using a planar
path maintain the relation ot‘the initial profile to the path throughout
the feature. Iftlie profile sketch is perpendicularto the beginning ofthe
sweep path, then the rest ot‘the intermediate sections are also
perpendicular to the sweep path. li‘the proiile is at an angle, so are the
intermediate sections.
Keep Normal The Keep Normal Constant option keeps the intermediate sections
Constant parallel to the original profile.
167
Lea-on 7 SOLIDWORKS
Ammed Sweeping
whlch to Use? The default orientation option, Fallow Path, is appropriate and geod
for many sweeps, especially simple ones. For example, consider
sweeping a simple tube. As you can see in the illustraticm below, the
circular profile stays normal to the centerline (path) of the tube. This
results in a constant diameter throughout the feature.
However, when the Profile Orientation is set to Keep Normal

Constant, the tube is dismned. Clearly this is not appropriate for this
type of sweep.
-5
’-
Q\¥+‘lfl-r
soLIchlRKs Lesson 7
Advanced sweeping
Case Study: One situation where Keep

Keep Normal Normal Constant is the
Constant correct choice is
demonstrated in the swept rib
or the part pictured. The
design intent of this model
includes that the entire part
base, bosses, and rib 7 is to
,
have 5“ ofdrafi.
1 Open part.
Open the part Keep Normal Constant from the
Lesson0’7\Case Study folder.
2 Evaluate feature. 10
Edit the Sweepl feature.
The Profile Orientation is
set to Follow Path.
Note the path connects the
top ofthe 2 bosses and the
profile sketch has the proper
amount crdran built into it.
To evaluate the drafi angle
in the center of the rib, we
will add an Intersection Curve.
Click Cancel x.
Intersection The Intersection Curve command generates a 2D or 3D sketch entity

Curve Feature where surfaces of a model intersect. A combination of faces, planes,
and surface bodies can be used to generate intersections curves.
When working in a 2D sketch, the sketched curve is cream/:1 where
selections intersect the current sketch plane. Ifno sketch is active when
using this tool, a 3D sketch will be created resulting from the
intersection of 2 selected surfaces.
Where to Find It I CummzndManaget’: Sketch > Convert Entitles Flyout 8>
Intersection Curve a
I Menu: Tools, Sketch tools, Intersection Curve
3 New sketch.
Create a new sketch on the Right. Flame.
269
Lesion 7 sounwoRKs
Advanced sweeping
4 Intersection Curvel
Click Intersection
curve 3.
select the 2 faces
highlighted at the right.
Click OK J .
Sketch entities are created

where the faces intersect the
Right Plane. They are constrained with a relation unique to this
command: At intersection of two faces.
5 Add a dimension
Add the angle
dimension shown by
first selecting the angle
vertex point, then
clicking the endpoints
ofthe line and spline
resulting from the
intersection curve.
Click OK to make this a driven dimension.
To meet the design intent of this part, this dimension should be 95deg.
Exit the sketch.
Visualizing As the intermediate sections of the sweep follow the path, they tilt with
Sweep Sections the arcs radii and cause the variance in the drafi angle. Since the
intermediate sections ofa sweep are only available to preview if guide
curves are used, we can illustrate them using another available sketch
curve: Face Curves.
Face Curves Face Curves generate sketch curves along a selected face. A number
can be specified for a mesh of curves, or curves can be created from a
specific position or point along the face. When this tool is used outside
ofan active sketch each curve is created as a separate 3D sketch in the
model. Altemately, when working in an active 3D sketch, all curves
will be contained within the sketch.
Where to Find It l Menu: Tools, Sketch Tools, Face Curves Q
6 Hide sketch.
Hide «V the previous sketch.
2m
soLIchlRKs Lesson 7
Advanced sweeping
7 Face Curves.
Begin a
3D sketch E.
Click Face
Curves O.
Select the side face of
the swept rib. The
previewed curves
make the curvature of the face easy to visualize.
Clear the check box for the curves for Direction 1 and increase tlle
number of curves for Direction 2 to 7.
Direction 2 represents the intermediate sections of the sweep. As the
sections follow the path, they are forced to tilt causing the change in
draft angle.
Click OK \/ to complete the Face Curves command.
click OK to the message regarding convening entities.
Exit the sketch.
Edit feature.
Edit the Sweepl feature.
Set the Profile Orientation to Keep Normal Constant.
Click OK v to rebuild the feature.
Evaluate result.
Notice the face curves
update indicanng the
change in the curvature
of the face. Each
intermediate section for
the feature now remains
parallel to the profile
sketch plane.
Doubleaclick the 2D sketch containing the intersection curve to see the
angle dimension. The required dmfi angle is also new correct.
211
Lesion 7 sounwoRKs
Advanced Sweeping
Controlling Twist The concepts of Follow Path and Keep Normal Constant also hold
tnie for sweeps with 3D paths. However, with a so path, there is an
,
add anal degree of freedom how the intermediate sections mtzte or
spin umimd the path. A 2D sketch entity has curvature that is tied to the
2D sketch plane, but a 3D entity has curvature that can twist thmugh
space.
fiVl‘SlHtJ-htOI-C‘
A ,
an, rim-hr ‘
m min a mum
3\
Qfiiflfl~ J~wr0l~l~
A
w 1.. 'lumnM‘
2 Hunt 1‘ ‘lllM
272
soLInwclRKs Lesson 7
Advanced Sweeping
Case Study: In this next case study, the gunl is to make the sections ufa swept ring
Controlling remain aligned with Axis. This means eliminating the twist
Twist throughout the feature.
—>
1 Open part.
Open the part Controfljngva—ist frum the LessonO’flCase Study
folder.
Notice how the sweep twists. If the profile had been circular, this may
nut have been noticeable.
wunwrsvwa.
Arm
'nlm-uk
Ann
it: 1...... a 1.9...
213
Lesson 7 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Sweeplng
2 Predicting twist.
The twist ofthis pan may not be intuitively clear, but by using
curvature combs we can magnify the curvature ofthe 3D path to help
understand why we are seeing this result.
Show at the path sketch and the profile sketch.
Show Curvature Combs
Since the sweep options are
Jcurrently
for the path spline.
set to follow the paths curvature
the relationship between the curvature combs and the profile remains
constant throughout the sweep.
QQKIW-D-fir-A~E~
Axel
'[mnnric
Aml
e» 'nnm m Wet-I
Turn off the curvature comh display and hide the two sketches.
Using a Direction To control the twist of this feature we can use the Profile Twist option
Vector to specify a Direction Vector. When a Direction Vector is used, the
profile will remained aligned with the vector lhmughout the sweep.
This can be an effective way to eliminate twist resulting from a 3D
path.
3 Edit the sweep feature.

Select Sweepl and Edit Feaiure fl.
274
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 7
Advanced sweeping
Specify Direction Vector.

Under Options, Profile Twist, Choose Specify Direction Vector.
Select Axis1 as xhe vecmr.
Isa-:1
, .
M...»
4 mm new
(um-l- Will:
a lsmm)
C mum,
mm
0....”
w my
[we-m
“vacuum-1mm
7xmuwe~
mutant—way
mm
Click OK « .
Examine the resulti g sweep.
The feature new maintains the desired alignment with the center axis.
am VsIS-J- ‘41-;
my , V
. m, mum
» w... » an,»
215
Lesson 7 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Sweeping
An Alternate Using a direction vector works well for eliminating twist or limiting it
Technique to a single directiun. But anether strategy is to make use ufan alternate
sweep path. since the twist within a sweep is controlled by the path by
default, developing an alternate path with the desired orientation can be
another way to modify twist.
For instance, in the case ofthe
previous example, we can
achieve the same result by MW
modifying the sweep to use a
2D path and then use the 3D
sketch as a guide curve.
This technique may be
required in older versions of
SOLIDWORKS (pre72016)
which do not include the
Specify Direction Vector
sweep optian.
This technique can also be valuable if the desired twist is multi~
directional.
Check out the model Contromnngst7Mme m the
mneference folder for an example ofthis technique.
Additionally, for detailed instructions on using this technique, see
Bremise 31): Mouse cm page 300.
276
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 7
Advanced sweeping
Case Study: So far we have seen how to control twist using a direction vector or an
Controlling alternate path. Next we will explore additiunal options in the Sweep
Twist with Propertylvlanager which allow twist to be controlled using guide
Guide Curves curves.
1 Open partl
Open the pan Guidepurves from the 1esson07\Case Study folder.
The part includes a profile Sketch and three curves.
///__:\\
</
Sewnd guide curve
fi\
\
/fi
First guide curve
We know the sweep feature may twist due to the 3D path.
Predicting twist
We can predict twist by showing the curvature combs of the path.
However, curvature cumbs are not available for curve features, so we
will first need to convert the curve feature into a 3D sketch.
Open a 3D sketch E.
Select the Path curve feature and click Convert Entities ® . This
creates a copy ufthe curve as a spline.
277
Lesson 7 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Sweeplng
Righteclick the spline and click Show Curvature Combs J.

This graphically shows how the paths curvature twists which in turn
will cause the sweep feature to twist ifthe default options are used.
(liven the angle between the combs at the profile sketch location, this
twist will cause the end section to be almost vertical.
$1in ~5~5¢~A~§~
‘knmetrir
s, 'Frnnt an arm
Cancel X the sketch discarding the changes.
Sweep Profile When creating a profile sketch for a sweep that will have a tendency to
Sketch Relations twist, it is a good idea to avoid Horizonnl and Vertical relations as
well as any external sketch relations other than Pierce. This is
especially true for profile entities between the path and guide curves.
When a sweep section twists, Horizontal and Vertical relations may
cause the intermediate profiles to fail because they can not he solved "I
one or more positions
Instead of Horizontal and Vertical, consider using relations such as
Parallel and Perpendicular to achieve the design intent. lf relations
like Parallel and Perpendicular are used, the sketch is allowed to
move and rotate independently from the sketch plane itself. This otten
makes the difi'erence between a sweep that works and one that does not.
17B
soLIDwoRKs Lesson 7
Advanced Sweepmg
3 Evaluate the profile sketch.

Edit the Profile sketch.
The line across the bottom of the profile is
constrained with Pierce relations to the
curves, but the construction lines inside the
profile are defined as Vertical.
We will see how this affects the sweep and
look at alternate ways to resolve issues in the
resulting feature.
Exit the sketch.
4 Start the Sweep feature.
Select the Profile and Path.
f.
5 Natural twistl
Expand Options and set the Profile Twist to Natural.
The sweep follows the path, twisting as predicted.
Ptvfilrfwhlsl .
6 Minimum Twist.
Set the Prafile Twist to Minimum twist.
This eliminates same of the twist but we still need tn add guide curves
to the featuxe.
m
Leann 7 sounwoRKs
Advanced Sweeping
7 Select the first guide curvel

Select the first Guide curve feature.
Gulfltww arctic
Notice how the end of the sweep is distened. This is being caused by
the Vertical relations included in the profile sketch.
Delete the guide curve fmm the PropertyManager te take another look.
At this point, the
orientation of the
intermediate sweep
sections is already
defined. This means
the vertical direction of
each replicated section
is set. Adding in the guide Curve forces the relations to that entity to be
solved, piercing the hctrem lett point but does not change the direction
of vertical for the sections or the sweep, causing the distortion.
Add in the guide curve again.
There are two ways to fix this problem:
I Change the Profile Twist uption.
I Edit the profile sketch and remove the problematic Horizontal and/
or Vertlcal relations, replacing them with pamllel or perpendicular.
8 Change the Profile Twist optinnl
Expand Options and under Profile Twist, click Follow path and First
Guide Curve.
Note This optictn will only be visible if a guide curve has been selected.
rurumm
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 7
Advanced sweeping
This straightens out the sweep because the intermediate sections are no
longer relying on just the path to determine their orientation.
Using the Follow Path and First Guide Curve option, the twist
orientation of each intermediate section is detennined by a vector
between the path and the first guide curve.
—>
Vector tha| controls
orientation
Note The option Follow First and Second Guide curves uses the same
concept, except that the alignment is defined by a vector between two
guide curves instead ofbetween the path and first guide curve. This
option will only be visible when multiple guide Curves are selected.
Add a second gui e curvet Meta
Add the Second Guide curve.
Note The order ofthe curves listed in the list box is
important, especially itusing one of the Profile
Twist options that include guide curves. The order ammo
can be changed by using the arrows on the lefi side .
1
of the selection list.

The Second Guide curve controls the height ofthe sweep as it moves
along the path. In this example, the height ofthe section affects the
radius ofthe arcs on the top ofthe profile sketch. This is done with
construction geometry and an Equal relation.
»
(gouactwrtdoorot
pfi a to I1 s
, s .
gs
V g promo;
”.1
arm ’lnmm:
Click OK t/ .
281
Lesson 7 SOLIDWORKS
Advanced Sweeplng
10 Results.
Alternative Method An altemate method for

straighmning out the sweep is to
edit the Profile sketch, remove
the problematic Horizontal and
Vertical sketch relations, and
replace them with Parallel and
Perpendicular as appropriate.
With this approach the default
options would work to achieve the
desired result.
11 Delete sweepl.
Undo or delete the existing sweep feature.
282
sounwoRKs Lesson 7
Advanced Sweeplng
12 Edit sketch.
Edit the Profile sketch.
Click View Sketch
Relations 1;.
Select the two Vertical relations
and delete them.
13 Add relations.
Select the construction line and
the bottom sketch line as
shown in the illustration at the
right.
Add a Perpendicular _L
relation.
14 Add relations. . «
/ \
Select the two construction lines
as Shawn.
Add a Parallel \\ relation.
15 Exit the sketch.
Selecl these lines
183
Leslon 7 sounwoRKs
Advanced Sweeping
1G Swept BossIBaser
Recreate the sweep feature using the default option of Follow Path and
Minimum Twist.
mums: s. 514ml]
Best Practice Neither mchnique is really better than the other. For sweeps that follow
39 paths, best practice is to...
I ...aveid using Horizontal and Vertical relations in the profile
sketch, using Parallel and Perpendicular instead,
I ...ami use guide curves together with the Profile Twist options to
control twist 7 either to induce it or to eliminate it.
To really master sweeping alang 39 paths, you need to be comfortable
employing both techniques.
17 Optional: Add shell and fillet features to complete the part.

I Wall thickness 7 0.150"
I Fillet radius ’ 0.150"

sounwoRKs Lesson 7
AdvaMM mplng
Case Study: Align with End Faces is another available

Align with End uption for sweep features. This option is
Faces used to Continue a sweep feature thmugh
the end faces of a model. When creating a
swept cut, this is the default nptien, when
creating a boss, this option is deselected.
To demonstrate the effects of this option,
we will create the simple swept cut
pictured.
1 Open part.
Open the part Align End Faces from the Lesson07\0ase Study
folder.
Swept cut.
Click Swept Cut Di.
Select Circular Profile and set
the Diameter .® to 0.500".
Select the top, front edge as the
Path.
Under Options, check
Tangent propagation and
Show preview.
Tip You can refresh the preview by
toggling the Show preview
checkbex ifnecessary.
Align with end faces.
lfyeu use Align with End
Faces, the cut continues all I]
the way through to the end
face ofthe model. This is W‘
similar to the Through All end
condilinn used in extruded
features.
This is usually desirable when
producing a cut, so this is the
default option with the Swept
Cut feature.
Clear this checkbox to see the
affect in the preview.
285
Lesson 7 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Sweeplng
lt‘you do not use Align with End Faces,

the cut terminates when the profile reaches
the end of the path, leaving a small lip of
uncut material.
Sweeping Along what if we want to run this sweep feature

Non-tangent along all the ten edges of the model?
Edges Since they are not all tangent, we will
need to use the SelectionManager to
define the “group" ofedges we wish to
use as the path.
For more information, see The Selection
Manager on page m7.
4 SelectionManager.
Delete the edge from the Path
selection hux in the
PropertyManager.
Righteclick in the graphics area
and click SelectionManager from
the shoncut menu.
Click Select Group Db and select
the top, front edge once more.
When using the
SelectionManager, tangent edges can automatically be added to the
group by using the tangent icon in the graphics area.
Click the Tangent icon.
The system selects the tangent chain of edges.
286
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 7
AdvaMM sneepmg
5 Remaining edges.
Select the remaining edges to
complete the path.
Click OK w on the
SelectionMannger.
This completes the definition ofthe
group.
Tm Pay attention to cursor feedback.
()fien, a shuncut to complete a
command or move the next selection
box will be provided for the right
mouse button.
”8
6 Preview and resuls.
Click OK « to complete the sweep feature.
287
Lesson 7 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Sweeping
Solid Profile For truestorlife representation of a cutting tool following a tool pnth,
you can use the Solid Profile option in the Swept Cut cummzlnd. This
option sweeps a solid tool body along 2 path to remove material.
The Solid Profile option has some specific requirements. These
requirements are listed in the Message groupbox in the
PmpertyManager when using a solid profile:
l. The tool body must:
I Be a revulved feature or a cylindrical extruded feature.
.I Contain only analytical geometry (lines and nrcs).
Not be merged with the model.
2. The path must be tangent continuous and must begin al a point on
or within the tool body's profile.
Case Study: In the next example, we will use n solid profile to out the grooves for a
Drill Bit drill hit.
Open the part DfllLBit.

The pan consists oftwo
disjoint solid bodies:
. ()ne representing the body

of the drill bit.
- ()ne representing the tool
that will cut the flutes. Dnll body
Examine the geometry.

The path is a helix beginning at
the tip orthe drill hody.
Patti
28!
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 7
Advanced sweeping
The sketch for the revolved tool body

was created normal to the helix path
and coincident in its endpoint.
There are two relations on the
Iowerntost end 0f the construction line:
I
l
Coincident to the are.
Pierce to the path.
The angle orthe sketch is eontroued by
‘ x
the 1mm dimension between the

constructian line and the venex 0fthe
drill budy.
Sweep the cut. m a

Click Swept Cut fl. 1. :5”.
Under Profile and Path, click Solid Profile. in... A
Select the tool body as the Profile.

Select the helix as the Path.
Under Options you can click Show
preview, if desired.
u teenertnnn
ta mum
Click DK .1 . Wt». v
Results.
The results or the sweep are
shown at the right. The too1
body is absorbed into the
resulting sweep feature.
289
Lesson 7 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced sweepmg
5 Circular pattern.
Make a cncnlar pancrn onhc cut sweep feature, Use the cylindncal
face at‘lhe dull bn body as the Pattern axis.
Use two \nslances evenly spaced through 360“.
The resuhs shown below use a pan appearance of polished steeL the
smdm scene Reflective Floor Black. and ReulView graphics.
290
mist Along Fall!
Exercise 27: In this exercise, a small

Twist Along circular profile will twist as it
Path follows the path to create the
helical groove pictured at the
right.
following skills:
- Defining Twm on page 291
Units: inches
Defining Twist Use the Specify Twist Value

option to twist any sweep. It can
also be used to prevent sweeps
from twisting, by setting the
amount oftwist to zero.
Specify Twist Value can be used
on complex 3D spline paths (far
right image) as well as on straight
line paths (near tight).
The twist can be defined by a
value of Degrees, Radians or Revolutions along the entire length of
the path.
Frncedure
Open part.
Open the existing pan Twist Along Path fmm the Lesson07\
Exercises folder.
lt cnntains two sketches: Profile and Path.
Profile
291
Twist Along Path
2 Sweept
Click Cut Sweep fl and
create a Sketch Profile cut
sweep using the default
Follow Path optiun.
3 Edit Gut—Sweep! feature

Edit the Cuwaeepl feature.
Expand Optians and set the Profile Twlst to Specify Twist Value.
For Twist Control, select Revolutions and set the number of
revolutions w 15.
Click 0K «.
W A
mm
NW
m A
mmm
H Mew:
m “mm"
mom J
4 Completed
Complete the model by
adding R0013" fillet to the
71
edges of the cut feature.

292
Controlling rwismim Gulde chives
Exercise 28: Using equation driven

Controlling curves, you can create
Twist with splines that are defined by
Guide Curves equations. In this example,
equation driven curves Will
he used as the path and guide
curve for a Wave Spring
Washer.
following skills:
- Equation Driven Curve on page 293
u The Salerno/r Manager on page 167
- Case Study: Comm/ling Twist wnn Guide Curves on page 277
Units: millimelers
Equatian Driven Equation driven curves are sketch entities resulting from specified
Curve equations. The equations rm equatien driven curves can be either
Explicit where Y is a function an, or Parametric where X, Y, and Z
are functions of T. lfyou create a paiainetne equation driven curve in a
2D sketch, only X and Y can be defined.
3D sketches support parametric equations unly.
You can use any functions that are supported in the Equalions dialog
box. For exampie: “D 1@Sketch1 ""sin(t),
Where to Find it - CornmandManager: Sketch > Spline Flyoul Menu N >
Equation Driven Curve \fi
I Menu: Tools, Sketch Entities, Equation Driven Curve
Procedure
New part.
Open a new part using the FaPLMM template.
Name it Wave Spring Washer.
3D sketch.
Create a new 30 Sketch @ and change the view orientation to
Isometric ..
293
Cnmolllng Twlst wltll Gulde cums
3 Equation driven curve. "*9

”m“ ”mm a)
Click Equation Driven Curve %. Enter the
,
¢ x
following parametric equations.
um ivl
- xii 14*sinit) mm A
- vr 1t25*cos(5*t) W
- Zr 14~cus<t) Xi
I '1 7* o y, WW7
- '2 2.1:?“
Click OK w. t, a
t, a
Add 21 Fix 29 relation.
What do the In a 3D sketch. X“ Y‘, and Z| are interpreted with respect to the model
Equations Mean? coordinate system. The equations for x| and z| together define a circle.
The value IA is the radius ofthat circle.
The equation tor v. defines a cosine curve. (The only ditterence
between a sine curve and a cosine curve is the phase 7 the cosine
curves is shified 90° out or phase compared to the sine curve as
illustrated below.)
Cosine curve
\ Sine curve
In the equation for Y1, 1 .25‘cos(5*t), the value 1.25 is the amplitude
oftlle curve. As written, the amplitude is centered with respect to YiO.
lfyou wanted to nfiset the amplitude you would add an offset value.
For example, 1 .25*cus(5"t>+2 would center the curve with respect to
Y’Z causing, it to oscillate between Y’0.75 and Y’3.ZS.
ConlmHing lwistwmt Guide Cuwes
The value 5 is the angular frequency. A sine curve is a periodic curve

completing one oscillation in 2*“ radians. The value 5 causes the curve
to complete tive oscillations in 2*11 radians.
The parametert1 defines the start oftlre curve and t2 defines the end, in
radians.
Second curve.
Create a second Equation
Driven Curve % using the 1‘
following equations:
A 7 17.5*sin(t)
v‘7 1.25*cos(5*t)
zr l7.5*eos(b)
t, 7 o
12 7 pi
Add a Fix 9; relation.
Exit sketch 5.
Profile sketch. I
Open a 2D skexch on the
Right Plane.
a!”
Skeieh n recmngle and
dimension it as shown. I
Add Pierce
‘
relations
between ihe midpoinis ofihe two
I
Vertical lines and the equaticm
driven curves.
295
Cnmolllng twist with Guide curves
7 Swept BossIBase ’.
Select the 2D sketch for
the profile
emiiiemtmn
Using the
SelectionManager,
select the inner Curve for
the path and the outer
curve for the guide Curve.
For Profile Twist select
Follow Path and First L
Guide Curve.
Click OK \I .
a Mirror.
Mirror HQ the body with
respect to the Right Plans to
complete the part.
Note Why didn't we create the two
equation driven curves through
a full 360° (2"n radians)?
There is n limitation in equation driven curves thnt does not allow

closed curves; curves where the starting and ending points are merged.
We could have Created a secund set of equation
driven Curves but that would have been more
work than simply mirroring the swept body.
295
Makeup Case
Exercise 29: This is a concept model for a cosmetics case such as one that powder or
Makeup Case rouge would be packaged in. As such, it is a single, monolithic solid
with no internal components or details, much like the use flash drive
you worked on in Exercise 9.» Split Pm and Save Bodies on page so.
mm m Keith Pedzm n lerpnmn'nkldad Products, hie ror rimming I'm eiaiiiple

- Fit Spline on page 130
- Spliliing a Face on page 236
I Library Feature Paris on page 222
I Controlling Twist on page 272
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing part named
Makeup Case from the
Iesson07\Exercises folder.
This part represents the
conceptual design ofthe product.
Edit sketch.
Edit the Groove Path
sketch. w .75
Use Flt Spline Lto
convert the two lines and
the arc to a spline.
297
Makeup Case
Split line.
Click Split Line 8
Use the active sketch t0 split the
uppermost face of the solid.
This edge will be the sweep path
for the groove.
The challenge is to sweep the profile and maintain the correct

orientation with respect to the uppermost face ufthe part.
New reference plane
Create a Plane
. normal to the
end of the split line.
Library feature.
Add the library feature pan
named Groove Profile from the
Lessono'? \ Exercises folder.
Use P131191 as the Placement
Plane.
Click Edit Sketch.
Add relation.
Add 3 Pierce
‘ relation between the
split line and the sketch point in the
groove profile.
Add relatianl
Add a Coincldent A relation
between the center of the arc and the
split line to align the prclfile.
Click Finlsh.
Sweep a cut.
Create a Swept Cut fl using the settings:
I Profile Orlenlation = Follow Path
I Profile Twist = Natural
29:
Makeup Case
9 Vlew the results.

The results are not good. The profile
twists as it muves along the path,
distorting the shape of the groove.
10 Edit featurer
Edit the sweep feature and change the
Prafile Twist to Tangent to Adjacent
Faces.
This option will modify the
orientation of the intermediate
sections to retain their alignment with
the races thathighlight in blue.
11 error.
Because of the complexity of this sweep, the system may not be able to
minor the feature. We cauld recreate the feature on the other side, but
an alternative would be to mirror the body geometry. Since this is a
symmetrical parL it is well suited furthis technique.
Use the Front Plane to Cut with Surface
half of the part.
8 and cut away the back
If necessary, try using the search
field to find this command. a methfitfizu D a
aii cinnamon
emotion
error Ht] the remaining body over the Front Plane to complete the
part.
299
Mouse
Exercise 30: This is a concept model

Mouse for a computer mouse. As
such, i s a single,
monolithic solid with no
internal components or
details. The task is to
create 3 reveal using a
swept cut feature.
Attempt to create the feature on your own firsk but if you need help,
you can follow the steps on the following pages.
This exercise reinforces the fallowing skills:
- Sweep Options on page 264

- Cammllirig Twisi on page 272
- Sweep Pmfile S/(fllC/l Relaiiam on page 27);
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing part meor'ted Mouse from the Lesson07\
Exercises folder.
This part represents the conceptual design of the product.
Swept cut.
Sweep a n.5mm square profile along the edge of the model to create the
reveal, shown in orange below. The edges ufthe profile should remain
parallel and perpendicular to the Top Plane.
Try to complete this exercise wiihout referring to the steps on the
following pages.
301i
SOLIDWORKS Eureise 30
Mouse
Available Because ofthe shape ofthe path, you can anticipate that the profile will
Techniques tend to twist when it is swept. There are 2 techniques to eliminate the
twist.
I Use the Profile Twist option Specify Direction Vector or

I Create a planar path and use the 3D curve as a guide Curve.
For newer versions of SOLIDWORKS,using the Specify Direction

Vector option is the simplest solution. But it is useful to be familiar
with bath techniques.
To gain experience with the technique using an alternative sweep path,
follow the step by step instructions below.
3 Create a planar path.

Use Convert Entities ® to copy the edges of the mouse imo the
sketch.
Exit the sketch and name il Sweep Path.
3m
mouse
4 Sketch the sweep profile.

Open a sketch on the Right Plane.
Sketch a 3 Point Corner Rectangle 9.
Make it a square by adding an Equal =
relation between two adjacent sides.
Note This type of rectangle uses Parallel and
Perpendicular relations rather than
Horimntal and Vertical. Horizontal and
Vertical relations can be problematic in
sweeps with multiple elements.
5 Add a Pierce relation to the path
Sketch a Centerline a." that is
Collinear
profile. / with an edge of the
Add a Pierce flrelation between its

endpoint and Sweep Path.
6 Add a Pierce relation to the guide

curve.
Add 3Pierce
J relation between the
corner of the square and the edge erthe
mouse.
7 Dimensionr
Add a 0.5mm dimension to one side of
the square.
8 Exit sketch 5.
Exit the sketch and name it Sweep
Profile.
302
Mouse
9 Swept cut.
Create a Swept Cut m usmg the Sweep Path and Sweep Profile
sketches.
Use the SelectionManager to pick the 2 edges at the parting line .19 the
guide curve.
3n3
Blmr Houslng
Exercise 31: With some models, where you

Blower Housing should start is not very
obvious. When working with
sweeps, you may find it
tempting to start building your
sweep by drawing the sweep
profile first. It is best practice,
however, to create the path and
guide curves first so that the
profile appears at the right
point in feature history to apply
Pierce relations (for more
information see Pierce
Relation on page 162).
1n the Blower Housing model pictured, the overall swept shape is a
flat spiral, but the cross section ofthe involute shape changes in two
directions as the sweep progresses. Making the profile grow taller
around the sweep will require a spiral for the path and a spiral ofn
slightly larger pitch for the first glide curve. Making the sweep grow in
width will be the work ofa helix.
To shell the model properly, we will use Split Line features to create
the faces that will be removed from the shell.
[latte Curve on page 195
Pierce Relation on page 162
Sweepmg Along Model Edges on page 238
Splitting a Face on page 236
Units: millimeters
Procedure
New part.
Open a new part from the FaPLIN tetnplate and name it
Blower Housing.
Create the path. (D4000
The path should be the smallest spiral. It
is best pmctice to sweep to the outside
ofa curve when possible. Sweeping to
the inside ofz curve can create self»
intersecting geometry iflhe curvature of
the path is too small.
Sketch a circle on the Front. Plane with
a 4 inch diameter centered at the
Origin. as shown.
Blower Housing
Use the HelixISpiral )2 tool with the sketched circle to create a spiral
with (he senings helow:
I For Defined By click
. mm:
Spiral.
- For Pitch enter 0.750". »
/
I For Revolulions enter 1. #W "
I For sun angle enter 0° D“

A
and click \
counterclockwise.
\ p
m
m
i
m
..
/
Creale [he first guide curve.
Draw a second circle again on (he Front Plane. ihis time with a5 inch
diameter centered at [he Origin.
Use the senings below to create a
second spiral which will function
as 2. guide curve:
For Defined By click Spiral.
For Pitch enter 1.500". I.
For Revolulions enier1. /
For sun angle enter 0° and
’
click Counterclockwise.
Creale lhe second guide curve.

Create a new plane with an Offset Distance of 0.200" from ihc Front
Plane.
Name ii HeljxiPlane.
Draw a iliird circle on HelixiPlane, with a 4.5" diameier, again
cemered ai ihe Origin.
ans
Exercise 31 soLlnwoRKs
Blower Houslng
Create a HelixISpiral S with the settings shown.

For Defined By click Height and Revolution.
Constant pitch.
For Height enter 0.500".
For Revolutions enter 1.
For Start angle enter I)“ and click Counterclockwise.
Instead oftrying to make a tapered helix to compensate for the

increasing diameter, we will accommodate forthat in the pmfile sketch.
5 Draw the profile.
Open a sketch on the Top Plane, and sketch a rectangle with two
tangent arcs on the horizontal ends. Turn the two nt‘the lines ofthe
rectangle to construction geometry as shown.
306
Blower Housing
Pierce Midpoints.
The spirals will drive the X dimension ofthe profile. That
way, as the spirals get progressively further apart from one
another, the intermediate sections will become wider.
To relate the profile to the spirals, add
to the mldpoinis ofthe vertical lines.
Pierce
‘ relations
Remember to select the curve

near the appropriate pierce
location.
Note The helix has been hidden for
clarity.
Add a sketch point to the profile. \\ \

The Y dimension ofihe profile will be controlled \\
(
l
by the helix. To create the necessary Pierce

relation, a sketch point must be created.
Add a Sketch Point - to the construction line as
shown.
lmpomnl! Do not place the point al the midpoint nfthe line,jllst(m the line so that
it only gets a Coincident A relaticm. Since the helix does not increase
in diameter with the spirals, we need this point to be constrain d m the
line in eeatrol lhe v dimension, but not necessarily touching it in eaeh
intermediate section ofthe feature.
307
Blower Houslng
8 Add Pierce relation to helix.

Add a Pierce
arelation between the new sketch point and the helix.
Make sure to select the helix in the gmphics window near the end
where we want the poim to touch it. There are three locations on the
plane where the pierce could be correct; either end and the midpoint of
the helix.
9 Create the sweep.

Click Swept BosslBase to Ie s—u
x
a: 0
Use the small spiral as the path, the large spiral as mm... a
the first guide Curve, and the helix as the second ”new
New
”7:th
.7
1%
guide curve. l
Check the intermediate profiles to see how the C

profile sketch follows the guide curves. one...“ a
Notice that the helix on one side drives the feature
symmetrically.
(lg: "imam has
. wwrlximum
tunic Em Inna-wry v
E Inn Fianna v
mm y
Gum: trimmers/saw .
308
Elm! Houslng
10 Extrude the outlet.

Open a sketch on the outlet end of
the involute, select the end face, and
click Convert Entities ©.
New extrude the sketch 2.25".
Rename this feature Outlet.
11 Offset.
Front Plane.
Seleet the smaller spiral from the
I.
FeatureManager design tree, and m,
Offset Ent s [E_ 0.200".
12 Complete the sketch.

Complete the sketch with horizontal and Vertical lines as shown.
Trim the lines and the spline to create a closed profile.
3n9
almr Housing
13 Extruded BossIBase.
Create a Mid-Plane extrusion with 3 Depth 0f0.900".
14 Draw outlet ring sweep profile.

Create the pmfile as shown.
Add 3 Fierce
‘ relation between
the endpoint of the arc and the edge
0f the Outlet.
Notice the sketch penetrates the
solid body. When working with
sweeps and other interpolated
features, it is best practice to avoid
creating lineflneline geometry and
instead, slightly overbuild features
to ensure they merge eorrectiy.
310
soLlnwclRKs Euerciee 31
Blower Housing
15 Sweep the outlet ring.

Select the sketch from the
previous step as the profile and
the pierced edge as the path.
Use the option Tangent
propagation so the sweep will
continue along the mngent
edges, much like a fillet.
For more information on sweep
uptians see Sweep Upila/IS on
page 264.
The result of the sweep is shown
in a diil‘erent color for illustratiun purposes.
16 Create extrusion.
Open a sketch on the flat face as shown.
Sketch a circle centered on the Orign with a diameter of 4.75".
Extrude m the sketch a Depth of 0.550" with oral! of 5°.
N75,
17 Mirror the feature.

Mirror Hi] the extruded boss abuut the Front Plane.
311
em” Houslng
Prepare for shelling The Blower Housing will be
thin walled. Before creating
the shell feature, fillets will
be added and also the faces to
be removed in the shell need
to be created. For this
example, a Split Line feature
will be used to divide the
faces and create the areas we
want to remove for shelling.
18 Split line.
Open a sketch on the Front Flame.
Draw a circle centered on the Origin with a diameter of 315".
Create 2 Split Line
flat faces as shown.
8 feature by projecting the sketch onto the two
Make sure the Single Direction option is cleared.
19 Split the Outlet: face.

Open a new sketch on the end face of the
Outlet.
Select the flat face, and offset the edges by
0.05" m the inside as shown.
Create a Split Line E feature on the face of
the Outlet.
312
am" Housing
20 Add filles.
Add fillem as Shawn.
313
3mm Housing
21 Shell.
Shell Q! the part using a Thickness of “.050".
For the Faces to Remove, select the three faces that were created by
the split lines in step 13 and step19.
314
Lesson 8
Introduction to Loft and
Boundary Features
Upon successful completton otthis lesson. you will be able to:

Create and compare Inn and boundary features.
Use faces for loft and boundary profiles.
Understand how to use constraints for loft and boundary profiles.
Reuse sketch geometry by copying and creating denved sketches
315
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
Introduction to Lot! and aauudary Features
Comparing SOLIDWORKS has features such as sweeps, lofis, and boundary

Complex because some shapes simply can not be made with lines, arcs, extrudes
Features and revolves; the trajectories are not linear, the curves are not constant.
You only need to look at a few consumer products to see examples.
Each of these complex features has specific strengths and limitations:
Uses only one profile; it can vary in size

(using guide curves) but a circle can not
become a square.
For more information: see Sweeping on
page 156
Allows for multiple profiles ofdifferem

shapes to be blended together. Lofis can
make use of guide curves to shape the
feature in between the profiles, or
centerline curves to provide direction in
between profiles. Constraints can be
added to the start and end of the feature.
However, there are no controls for
intermediate profiles, and curvature
controls in the trajectory direction (guide
curves) are somewhat limited.
For more informatio : see Loft Feature on page 319
Boundary Similar to the lofl, but can define
constraints for any profile within the
@ feature and is not limited tojust the
start and end. It also allows for
curvature control in both the direction
ofthe profiles and the direction of
secondary curves. However, the
Boundary feature cannot be used with
centerline control and will ofien result
in greater rebuild times than lofi
features.
For more information: see Boundary Feature on page 325
315
soLIchiRKs Lesion a
introduaiouto Lott and Enumhry Features
With these three teature types and their respective strengths and
flexibilities, designers have nearly total control aver complex shapes.
Which should you use? That will depend primarily on what type 0f
input data you have, and on the limitations described above. As a
simple example, let's rev t the bottle body:
Starting with this? Starting with this?

Use Sweep. Use Loft
ctr Boundary.
If we were given information regarding specific cross secnons or the

bottle, it might be better suited for Lofi or Boundary. But since the
profile of the bottle changes i size only, and we were able to easily
create Curves for the side and from profiles, sweep is probably the more
emcient method.
317
Lesson 8 SOLIDWORKS
imam.“ ta Lam and Humidity Fealures
How Lofling It may be helpful to think ofextrudes and revulves as being comparable
and Boundary to lines and arcs, and boundary features and lofls being akin to splines.
Work in the same way that splines interpolate Curves between points,
4%.!
buundary features and lafis inteipolate surraees between profiles.
Spline inlerpulaled mmugh paints Snflaoe lulled mmugh profiles
This explains why ifyou stan with

four profiles like this:
You and up with this (by default):
Inst/sad of this:
318
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
lntroduaron to Lott and Buundzry Features
Case Study: The Loft and Boundary features are very much alike with a few
Defroster Vent exceptions. To help understand each, we will create the model ofa
Defroster Vent pictured using both techniques. This will help you
recognize the differences and assist in deciding which tool to use in
different modeling situations.
Lott Boundary
We will begin by using a Loft feature to generate the model.

Loft Feature Lott feanires are defined by multiple cross~sectional profiles. For best
results, profiles should be made up ofthe same number of entities and
selected from the graphics area near Corresponding points. Guide
curves can be used to shape the feature hetween profiles and/or a
centerline curve can be used to provide direction between the profiles.
Constraints can also be applied to the first and last profiles.
Where to Find It Loned Boss/Bass:
I Commansznager: Features > Lolted BassIBase 3
I Menu: Insert. BossIBase, Lott
Lofled Cut:
I Commansznager: Features > Lolted Cut 3
I Menu: Insert. Cut, Loft
1 Open the part Defroster

Vent.
Open the existing part from
the Lessonoa \
Case Study folder.
It contains three profile
sketches and a reference
sketch as shown.
319
Lesson 8 soLIDwoRKs
lnlmuclmn to Lolt and Boundary Features
Preparation of the When lofiing, as with boundary, you should give special consideration
Profiles to the way you create the profiles, and how you subsequently select
them in the command. in general, there are two rules to follow for good
results:
I Each profile should have the same

number of segmenE.
Profiles are mapped together using connector
points between vertices. when profiles
contain the same number of entities, the
system can easily map in between the points.
If necessary, control points can be manually
manipulated to produce the desired result or
sketch entities can be split to create additional
vertices (see Adding Sketch Segments on
page 363). V
Note The profiles for the Defroster Vent each (,

have 4 lines and 4 arcs. \_
I Pick the same corresponding spot on each
profile.
The system connects to points you pick, so select
points on each profile that you wish to map
together. By picking appropriate points, you can
prevent twist in the feature or induce it.
np lftlie profiles are circles, there are no ends to pick
such as there are on rectangles. That makes picking
corresponding spots tricky at best. In this situation,
put a sketch point on each circle and use them to
line up the connector points.
2 Insert a loft.
Click Lot’ted Boss/Base
j.
320
soLIchiRKs Lesion a
Introduamn to Lott and aim-men, Features
3 Lot! PropertyManager.
_
Click the profiles in order, near corresponding
at... c)
points.
Note When lufiing three or more sketches they have to
be in the proper sequence. Ifthe profiles are not 3 “(<th
Sim!
in the correct order in the list, you can reposition ‘
t i
them using the Up and Down buttons.

4 Lnfl connectors. sen/mum e
As you select the sketches, the system generates
a connector showing which vertices are mapping A
together. w
IT]
The connector helps identify twist within the
lofi. Connectors can he dragged to remove or add
twist t0 the feature. News ~
remnant-m V
were. A
which. n,
W
Eoehimeimm
[E
Denim
Esmmeo
E "shrew. A
(,s, iron" ;
5 Thin Feature.
Click Thin Feature.
Set the Thickness to 0.090
inches. Make sure the
thickness is added to the
outside 0f the pmfiles.
Under Options, make sure
Merge tangent laces is
selected.
Click OK w to create the

feature.
321
Lesson 8 soLIDwoRKs
lnlmuclmn te Lnlt and Summary Features
Merge Tangent With the Merge tangent faces uption if there are tangent segments in
Faces the profiles sketches, the resulting races will he merged together, rather
than separated with edges. This produces smoothly blended faces,
rather than tangent edges. The result is an approximation varying
slightly from the prefiles, similar te what is seen when using Fit
Spline.
6 Display curvature.
Tum on Curvature
display.
I
Notice the colors are
indicating a smooth blend in
curvature across the lofied
faces of the part.
7 Edit the feature.

Edit the lott feature.
Under Options, clear the
Merge tangent faces option
and click DK «.
Notice there are new edges
and separate faces of the
feature and the colors
displayed show the jump in
curvature at the tangent
points.
8 Turn of! Curvature display.
322
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 8
introdinaion to Lott and aaundery Features
Start and End W'hen lofiing, you can control the shape at the ends ofthe lofi by using
Constraints options that influence the direction of the lofi at the first and last
profiles. You can also control the length and direction ofthe influence
at each end.
The start Constraint applies to the r t profile listed in the Profiles
selection box and the End Constraint is applied to the last.
Constraints can be applied to create the faces of the loft Normal to the
profile plane, in the direction of a specified Vector, or use the Default
constraint or None.
The oerauit tangency condition approximates a parabola scribed
berween the first and last profiles. The tangency from this parabola
drives the loft surface, which results in a more predictable and natural
shape than when matching conditions are not specified.
Stan/End Constraints = Default Stan/End Constraints = None
when there is existing model geometry at either end ofthe lone there
are additional options to create Tangency or Curvature constraints to
the existing faces.
Tlp If more control is needed than can be provided by these constraints,
consider incorporating guide curves and/or centerlines into the lofi (see
Carlie/line Lnfling on page 358).
9 Edit the feature

Edit the lofi feature.
Click Merge tangent faces to rerenable this option.
323
Lesson 3 sounwoRKs
lntmduclmn ta um and Boundary Features
10 StartIEnd Constraints.
Expand the semen
Constraints group box.
To Create a better [fa an to
matching parts at the ends of the
Defroster Vent, change the
Sh?! and End constminis to be
Normal to Profile.
The tangent vector arrows
should point in the directions
shown.
If they do not, click Reverse Direction 6 to reverse the direction.
The tangent length value can be used to modify the tangent intluenee
on the shape of the lofi. For this example, use the default value of 1.
Note The Draft Angle W1 amuse : option with Normal to Profile

applies limfi with respect to the planes ofthe profiles. [fit is used with
the Direction Vector option, the dmfi is applied wilh respect to the
direction vector.
Click OK v.
11 Save the part.
324
sounwoRKs Lesson 3
Introduction to Lott and Boundary Features
Boundary The same profile information in the Defroster Vent model can be
Feature used to generate a Boundary feature. The Boundary feature is really
designed for features that have curves in 2 directions or for use where
constraints are required for intermediate profiles. However, sinee
boundary features are calculated ditrerently, the results will vary
slightly, so they can provide an alternative for lnfiing. We Will save a
copy ofthe Defroster Vent part and recreate it using a Boundary
feature to compare the results.
Inserting a Boundary feature creates a boss or cut using profiles and
optionally, secondedireetlon curves. When using the boundary feature
the profiles and secondedlrection curves have equal influence over the
shape nfthe feature, versus the lnfl, where the profiles are the primary
intluence ot‘ the shape. Boundary features include controls that can be
applied to any protile within the feature and In either direction.
Where to Find lt Boundary Boss/Base:
I CotntnandManager: Features > Boundary Boss/Base @
I Menu: Insert, Boss/Base, Boundary
Boundary Cut:
I Menu: Insert, Cut, Boundary a
12 Save as copy and open.
Click File, Save As.
In the Save As dialog, click the radio button to Save as copy and
open.
Name the file Defroster VenLBoundary.
Click Save.
The copied file is opened and becomes the active document.
13 Delete the loft feature.
325
Lesson 8 SOLIDWORKS
Inlmdmmn ta um and Enundary Features
14 Boundary feature.
Click Boundary BosslBase @.
EVE
gnu—r
mun (v0)
For Direct' n 1, select the profiles in the same
way you did for the lofi feature: in order, near
corresponding vertices.
Click Thin Feature.
Add the wall thickness of mm inches to the
outside of the profiles.
So far the options are very much the same as the
lofi command. The biggest difference will be
how the constraints are added to the profiles.
anii
lnstead ofa groupbox for start and end
arm .a m... A
constraints, there are pull down menus for m Mukhrllkrllfizu
Direction 1 and Direction 2 in the a Una: aunt!
PropertyManager. These apply constraints to tag than v
whichever profile is currently highlighted in the a mm W,
selection hax. n new" a
Alternately, there are flags in the graphics area
l» i
Emmet“.
7c
where the constraints can be selected as well.
rim nae,
Dtlzman wort
Dmun
Nam-ii n. more
325
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
Inlrodufllolno Lott and anundnry Features
15 Add constraints.
Add Normal To Profile constraints m the start
e: E IE 0 I]
and end profiles. a G, a)
«x
Use the default Tangent Length of 1. E
l—ltmunm .1
fi
IX} Tins :
V‘ 1
int ;
mum“: In
Click OK st .
Compare parts.
w?)
16
Tu compare the 2 versions ofthe pan,
_
tile the open document windows.

To match the illustration below, tile Defroster VeIlLBouIldar'y to
the ngm and the Defroster Vent document to the Lefl.
Lon Baundary
When a feature is made up ofcnly a small number efprdfiles, such as

the 3 in the Defroster Vent, there is very little difference between the
result The most noticeable difference is the start and end tangent
cond ans seem to have more influence in the lefi feature. However,
you can adjust this in the boundary feature by lengthening the tangent
vectors. When a feature is made up oftwo sets of curves (profiles and
guides in the case oflofl) the difference between lufl and boundary is
more pronounced.
327
Lesson 8 soLIDwoRKs
introductionto um and saundary Features
()fien the quality oftlie surfaces can be better evaluated using

Curvature and Zebra Stripes. Try using each ta compare the geumetry
ufthe 2 models.
Which result is correct? They both are. It's up to the designer to decide.
When you are modeling features that are not analytic (such as extrudes
and revolves), but rather are created by interpolating between cross
sections, there is virtually an unlimited number of correct answers.
Boundary with Boundary features are an especially powerful tool in surface modeling.
Surfaces Because both sets ofboundary curves have equal influence, and
continuity conditions can be applied to any side or profile, Boundary
Surfaces are a great tool for patching open areas in a surface model.
For additional information on the Boundary feature, in particular how

it pertains to surface mudeling, please refer to the Surface Modeling
course.
32E
sounwoRKs Lesson 3
lntrodueuan to Let! and aoundary Features
SelectionManager The SelectionManager tool is availablewhile working

in Loft and within loft and boundary features in the same way as
Boundary when creating sweeps. with use nfthe
SelectionManager, multiple profiles and guide curves can exist within
the same sketch.
Examine the pan Defruster Vent. 5D Sketch to see an example of
»
lofiing using all profiles from within a single 3D sketeh.
Tip sinee use Select

a solid model requires closed sections, you should
Closed Loop 0button from the SelectionManager toolbar for
selecting lofl profiles.
Case Study: Lou and Boundary features are well

Lofted Merge suited to create smooth transitions
between features ot‘a model. In the next
example, we have a multibody pan
representing the shafi and head ofa golf
club. We will merge together the
separate bodies using a lofl feature as a
bridge between them. This will also demonstrate how faces can be used
for profiles and the additional options available when there are adjacent
faces to the feature being created.
‘
1 Open the part [rotted
Merge.
Open the existing pan from the
Lesson08\Case Study
folder.
It contains two solid bodies.
329
Lesson 8 soLIDwoRKs
lnlroflucllanto La“ am Boundary Features
j
2 Lot! using faces.
Click Lofied Boss/Base
Select the planar faces ofthe
model as the profiles for the
lofi, clickmg thorn in similar
areas.
3 StartIEnd Constraints.
Activate the group box for Start/End
Constrainls and click the drop down menu.
Additional options appear here that allow
tangent and curvature conditions to be created
to the existmg geometry ofthe model.
Change the constraint at the head body to be
Tangency To Face. The faces that the feature
WWW...
Eng
a
will be tangent to highlight. The Next Face
button allows the tangency to he created in the .
other direction. to the profile face in this case.
Clear the Apply to all check box. With this g g :
option cleared, the tangent length can be
adjusted individually at each control point
Notice there are several drag arrows now
[amtamt j;
at
available in the graphics area. Adjust the
g
W
'-
:
tangency as desired.
Change the constraint at the ska/i body to be Normal to Profile.

Make sure Merge result is checked,
Click OK u t
330
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
inireduehen lo Len and Boundary Feennes
Evaluale Results.
()nce ihe feature is added, the pan coniains
only one solid.
Oplional: The opiion Curvature To Face
could be used in place ofTangency To
Face to make ihe faces match in curvature
Save and close the file.
Case Study: Lnfi and Boundary features may include many skeiehes “1 describe rhe
Reusing Profiles, Guide Curves, or Cenlerlines. Many ofihe required
Sketches skeiches may be Similar or exactly ihe same. Making use of derived
skeiches and copied skeiehes can help reduce ihe amollm ofskelchiiig
required
I Derived Skelches are exaci duplicates nfilie original sketch and
reiaiii a link m ihe original. They can nnly be placed, noi changed.
I Copied Sketches are also duplicaies ofihe original skeich bui can
be changed in any way. There is mi link back to the original.
331
Lesson 3 soLIDwoRKs
lnlmuclmn to um and soundsry Features
Consider a model like the one Original Sketch

shown in the illustration. The
Copied Sketch
first and last profiles ofthis
feature are the same and the
design intent is to have them
always to remain equal. Creating
a derived sketch will ensure if
the parent sketch is ever updated
the derived sketch will update as
well.
The middle profile is similar, but
not identical. We will create a
copied sketch here so it‘s
Derived Sketch
dimensions can be modified.
In this case study the Modify Sketch command is also inuoduced.
Modify sketch is s common tool used for working with copied and
derived sketches.
1 Open the part Derivekcopy.

Open the existing port from the
it contains a single sketch nnmed
Source.
Copying a To create another profile ofsimilar shape, copy and paste the existing
Sketch sketch onto the desired sketch plane. Copied sketches can be edited in
any way and are not linked hook to the original.
In this example, the sketch Source will be copied onto the
Right Flsue and edited.
2 Select sketch.
Select the sketch Source in the FeatureManager design tree. The
sketch geometry will highlight on the screen.
3 Copy sketch.
Use cone, or Edit, Copy, to copy the sketch to the clipboard.
332
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
lntmdumlan to Latt and saundary Features
4 Select plane and paste.

Select the Right Plane from
the FeatureManager design
tree and press ctrl+v, or click
Edit Paste.
The sketch will be pasted
from the clipboard to the
selected plane. It will appear
0n the screen In the plane‘s
arientatinn.
Modify Sketch The reason for the copied sketch's orientaticn is because ofthe
coordinate system ofthe Right Plane vs the Top Plane. When
sketching on the Top Plane, vertical is along the z axis ofthe part,
while on the Right Plane, vertical is in the Y direction.
Rather than try to redefine relations in the sketch to reenrientate it, we
will use the Modify Sketch tool to rotate the entire sketch, redefining
which direction is vertical.
The Modify Sketch tool can also be used to translate, scale, and mirror
an entire sketch to suit your needs. A dialog box can be used to define
scale and discrete movements of the sketch, or the cursor can he used to
dynamically move and rotate the sketch in the graphics area.
Mirroring is accomplished by utilizing the black manipulator I. on

screen when the command is active.
Where to Find It I Menu: Tools, Sketch Tools, Modify 03
5 Edit sketch.
Select the new sketch
and click Edit
Sketch [2.
Click Modify
Sketch 0:.
Type 270 into the Rotate
field ofthe Modify
Sketch dialog and hit
Enter.
333
Lesson 8 SOLIDWORKS
lmdmmli tn um and Buundary Features
6 Add relations.
Notice the cursor feedback when using this
tool. The icon next to the pointer represents
functions for the mouse butmns.
The leh mouse button will move the sketch
while the right mouse button can be used to
dynamically rotate the sketch in the a“
graphics area.
Use the lefi mouse buttonto drag the origin
_
of this sketch to the parts origin.
A dialog appears warning you that ifyou keep the automatic
coincident relation that is being created, firnctions of the modify
sketch tool will be limited. click Yes to accept the relation.
click Close to close the Modify Sketch dialog.
1 Make changes.
The dimensions shown in red need to be mudified for this profile.
Start by changing the properties for the 2 lower dimensions to have
them displayed as radial dimensions. While it makes sense to have
dimensions symmetrical over the Cenmr line in the lst profile, this
profile should not.
TIP Display options can be modified from the dimension's

PropertyManager an the Leaders tab, or by using the shortcut menu.
a Exit Sketch [2.
Exit the sketch and rename it Copied.
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 8
lntrodutatcn to Lott and aaundary Features
Derived The final profile for this part will be a derived sketch. A Derived
Sketches Sketch is used to create a copy of the Source sketch at a different
location that is linked to the original sketch. The derived sketch will
automatically update if changes are made to the Source.
Derived Sketches are dependent on the original for size and shape but
not location and usage. You cannot edit the geometry or dimensions of
a derived sketch. You can only locate it with respect to the model.
Changes to the original sketch propagate to the derived copies.
Important! To access the Derived Sketch command, both the source sketch and
the plane it wiIl be copied to must he preselected.
Where to Find It I Menu: Insert, Derived Sketch
9 Select sketch and plane.

Hold down Ctrl and select the sketch Source and the Top Plane.
10 Insert a derived sketch.
Click Insert, Derived Sketch. The sketch is inserted onto the selected
plane, but it is under defined.
When a derived sketch is created, the system automatically puts you
into Edit Sketch mode. Also, notice that derived sketches are
identified as such by the derived sufiix appended to the sketch name in
the FeatureManager tree.
11 Modify the sketch.
since the plane we chose to copy the derived sketch to is the same as
the originals sketch plane it IS currently overlaying the Source sketch.
We will need to mirror the sketch to orientate it correctly.
Click Modify Sketch 0,.
Position the cursor over the
black origin symbol as
indicated and notice the
cursor feedback changes.
Click the rightrmouse
button to mirror the sketch.
Note The black knobs on this
symbol can be used to
mirror the profile over the
x or Y axes or both by
positioning the pointer and
using the right mouse
button.
335
Lesson 8 SOLIDWORKS
Inlmdmmn to Lot! and Boundary Features
12 Drag.
Use the lefi mouse button to
move the sketch origin to the
part orig
Click Yes to accept the
Coincident relation and Close
the Modify Sketch dialog.
13 Fully definel
Add relations between the profiles
to fully define the sketch.
14 Exit the sketch.
15 Lot! or Boundary.
To Create the solid geometry ofthis part, either a lofi or boundary
feature can be used. Since there are curves in just one direction and
there are no controls required at the center profile, either feature can
produce the desired shape. We will use Boundary feature here in order
to introduce some of the preview options available.
Click Boundary BosslBase @.
Make sure Merge tangent faces is selected under Options and
Preview.
Create the feature by selecting the three profiles near a common vertex.
335
soLIDwoRKs Lesion a
Inlmdumionm Lott and aminaary Features
Bou ndary When you are creating or editing a boundary feature, you can enhance
Preview the preview by displaying Mesh, Zebra Stripes, and Curvature
Options Combs either from the FmpertyManager or the Shortcut menu. The
preview can also be evaluated by using the Curvature Explorer tool
from the Shortcut menu. This adds a node to the preview that can be
dragged across the faces to evaluate the curvature at any location.
There are also additional options in the Shortcut menu while working
in this command that allow Connector points for the feature to be
manipulated. Connector points that are visible can be manually dragged
with the mouse to modify the way profiles are mapping together. The
boundary feature displays one set of connectors near the profile
vertices that are selected. Connectors can be hidden, reset, or added
using available options.
16 Add another connector.

Right—click on the profile as
indicated in the image below and
select Add Connector.
337
Lesson 8 souuwoRKs
lmdmmn tn um and aunnuany Fealmes
17 Manipulate the shape.

By relocating one or all of the connector points, you can dramatically
alter the shape. However, inmrsecting geometry will fail.
18 Reset connectors
While editing the boundary, use
Reset Connectors from the
Shortcut menu to retum 10 the
default mapping condifions.
Click OK v.
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 3
lntroaumian lo Lott and Baundary Features
19 Change the Source sketch.

To demonstrate how the model reacts to Changes, modify the R20
dimension in the Source sketch to be R25 and Rebuild
| .
The derived sketch updates with the Source while the Copied sketch
retains the same dimensions.
Sketch Block Library Features and sketch Blocks provide another way to reuse
and Library sketches. We have already seen some examples ofhnw making use of
Feature Profiles library feature parts can be an easy way In reuse sketch data (see
Library Failure Pam on page 222 )- This is especially usefill for
reusing sketches in multiple documents. Another file type that can be
used for this purpose are SOLIDWORKS Sketch Blocks. Sketch
Blocks have the distinct advantage 0f being scalable, however their
dimensions cannot be overridden as easily as Library Features. For an
example ufusing and creating sketch blocks for profiles, see Emmise
35: Skeicll Bloc/(x as Pro/flex on page 350.
339
”Mad Vase
Exercise 32: Create the model pictured at the right by Creating

Lofted Vase the necessary profiles and loft feature.
- Lafl Feature on page 319

- Pmparalma nflae Profiles on page 320
Units: millimeters
Procedure
New part.
Open a new part using the FEI'LMBE template and name it Vase.
Optional: Add a part appearance.
Select Appearances, Scenes, and Decals O in the
Task Pane.
Expand Appearanoes (color), Glass, and select the ,
Thick Glass folder. bwm eh»
Doubleeclick the blue thick glass appearance.
First profile.
Create a sketch on the Top Plane. .- ® 1!»
Use the Polygon G) tool to create

the profile as shown.
Exit the sketch.
'
New reference plane.
Create a Plane fl oFfset from the I.
Top Plane 325mm.
Tip Shortcut to creating an offset plane:

1. Select an existing plane so its preview is visible in the graphics
area.
2. Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and drag the plane's harder. This
will create a “copy" nfthe plane and open the Plane
Propertylvlanager
3. Use the Plane PropertyManager to further define the plane.
340
Luned Vase
5 Second profile.
Create a sketch on P131161. Create a larger pulygon as shown.
«“75
Exit the sketch.

6 L011.
Use the pmfiles for a Lofled BosslBase ‘.
Select the pmfiles near a corresponding vertex t0
properly map the connector points.
7 Multi-lhickness Shelll
Complete the design by adding a Shell [3.
The primary wall thickness is 2mm.
Remove the top face.
Use the Multi-thickness Settings te add 7.5mm wall
thickness to the bottom face.
341
batted Vase
8 Edit featurer - a
Select Loftl and Edit Feature a.
m
»
a V
Tip Features can be selected from the

FeatureManager Tree, by selecting a
,
I
C stem) C rum
raee ufthe feature, ctr by using
breadcrumbs. Use the “d" key on the
keyboard to rneve breadcrumbs to
your cursor location.
9 Adding twist
Drag the connector Shawn an the top
profile to the next polygun vertex (0
the right. .1.
10 Add a StartIEnd Constraint.

Ta give the twist a more pleasing curve, add a Start!
End Constraint far the botwm profile 0f Normal to
Profile.
Click OK \/ .
Creallng a rmnsrtron
Exercise 33: Create a loft and boundary transition for the Glass
Creating 3 Bottle and compare the results.
l
Transition This exercise reinforces the folluwing skills:
- Loft Feature on page 319

- Anutyzmg Solid Geometry on page 121
- Boundary Feature on page 325

Units: millimeters
Frncedure
Open the part Glass Home.
Open the existing part fmm the
i
It contains two solid bodies.
Lon using faces.
Click Lofled Boss/Base
Select the planar faces of
3
the model as the
profiles for the left, Clicking them in
similar areas.
StartlEnd Constrains.
For both start and End constraints, seleet
l
Tangency to Face.
Click OK J .
Creatlng a rrznsmon
Evaluate the geometry.

Use Curvature
I
and Zebra stripes
to evaluate the transttion between the faces
ofthe part.
To create a smoother transition, the start
and end constraints can be modified.
Edit feature.
Ed" the Loft. feature.
Change the Start and End Constraints to be Curvature to Face.
Click OK J .
Evaluate the geometry.

Use Curvature
I
and Zebra Stripes
evaluate the transition between the faces of
to
the pan.
Comparing Lofl and As an alternative, :1 Boundary feature could be used for the transition.
Boundary To compare the results of the difl‘erent techniques. a Copy ot‘the Glass
Bottle will he saved and modified.
Cresimg a Iransltlon

Click File, Save As...
in the Save As dialog, click the radio button to Save as copy and
open.
Name the file Glass BattleiEuundar'yt
Click Save.
The copied tile is opened and becomes the active document.
8 Delete the loft feature.
9 Boundary feature.
Click Boundary Bossl
Base @.
Select the planar t‘aces ofthe
model as the profiles,
clicking them In Similar
areas.
I (umvdahm }
Use the flags in the graphics

area to define Curvature to
Face constraints for each
profile
Click UK s/ .
10 Compare parts.
To compare the 2 versions of the part.
tiie the open document windows.
Use Curvature
I and Zebra Stripes to
evaluate the parts and decide which version
to continue with.
Optional: Try modifying the feature
constraints and the geometry ofthe existing
bodies to find zi result you like.
Connector Points within the features may
also need to be modified to eliminate twist.
Lon Boundary
345
Creating a Transitinn
11 Mulli-lhickness Shell.
Complete the design by adding a Shell Q).
The primary wall thickness is 3mm.
Remove the lop face.
Use the Mum-thickness Settings to add 5mm wall
Ihickness to lhe bottom face.

Image shown with the model rendered in
PhotoViewSéO.
345
Mg!!! Cuver
Exercise 34: Create this pan using the dimensions

Light Cover provided. Use relations and equations where
npplieahle lo maintain the design intent.
This exercise reinforces the {allowing skills:
- Pm/ecied Curve Featam on page I99

- Loft Fealure cm page 319
u The Salem»: Manager on page 167
Unixs: millimeters
Design Intent The design intent for this part is as follows:

ll Pan is symmetrical across the Right Plane.
2. The snrrnee is smooth.
3. The shell is 1.25mm thick.
Procedure
New part.
Open a new part using the FaI'LMM template and name it
Light Cover.
Creale the setup curve.
This part uses a projected curve is set up the lnn.
- ()n the Front Plane, draw an Ellipse 0.

u ()n the Right Plane, draw an Arc n.
I Create 2: Projected Curve fin.
150
200
PM
347
Exercise 34 soLlnwoRKs
Light Cover
3 Create multiple profile sketches.

0n the Top Plane, create two half
circles centered on the projected
curve with dimensions as shown.
4 Second sketchl ll ht Plan.

On the Right Plane, create two half ellipses l2 n 75
centered on the projected curve with
/
dimensions as shown a
Start the Ian.
/
5
Click Lofted Boss/Ease fl.
Select the profiles in order as appropriate
sml’ting from the top of the curve.
_/ l»
/
When you select one of the profiles, the A
x
15-7
SelectionManager will appear. Use the

‘
12. 50
Closed Loop D option and click OK J. ‘
1
Do this for all four profiles. 50

l
6 Adjust the connectors.

You may need lo adjust the connectors to
get the lofi to work properly.
If the connectors will not move, rights
click and click Reset Connectors.
SOLIDWORKS Exemise 34
mm Cuver
7 Close the Ian.

(an-m
To Create a closed loop, m M. hwemhua
click the Close lofl M mm
uption in the Options m mm mm
grouphux.
a shell the part.

Click Shell m.
Use a Thickness 0f 1.25mm and remove the
back face created by me straight lines.
349
stretch Blacks as Profiles
Exercise 35: In this exercise, we will introduce creating 3 Curve Through XYZ
Sketch Blocks Points and also how to utilize SOLIDWDRKS Sketch Blocks to reuse
sketch data for lnfi profiles.
as Profiles
This exercise also reinforces the following skills:
- Loft Fealurc on page 319

Units: inches
Airfoil data is a good example orwhen you would have a file ofx, Y, z
coordinates, although since an airfoil cross section is 2D, the z
coordinate would be zero. We will also need to scale the curve imd
reposition it to produce the appropriate profiles Converting the Curve
to a sketch block will allow us to modify the Curve to suit our needs.
Curve Through Curve through XYZ enables you to create a curve through a series of
XYZ X, Y, Z locations. You can enter these locations directly into a
sprendsheetlike dialog or you can rend them from an ASCII text file.
The file should have the file extension *.SLDCRV or "mxt. The curve
will pass through the points in the same order as they are entered or
listed in the file.
Important! The curve is created ctr/ode ofz sketch. Therefore, the x, v, and z are
interpreted with respect to the model coordinate system.
Where to Find It I ComlnzndManager: Features > Curves Flyout Menu U >
Curve Through XYZ Points U
I Menu: Insert, Curve, Curve Through XYZ Pains
350
Sketch Blocks as Frames
Special Airfnil data only has X, and Y values. Z is assumed to be zero and is
Considerations for therefore omitted from the file. in order to use the data file in
Airfoil Data SOLIDWORKS, you will have to add the Z coordinate valuest
Airfoil data present some other special situations:
I The data is “unit“ sized. That means the X coordinate goes from I
to U and back to I. In orderto model an actual wing. the data has to
be scaled to the chord length nfthe airfoil.
I In order to create the wing in its proper orientation with respect to
the aircrafi coordinate system, you will have to rearrange the X, Y,
and 2 values. For example, ii‘you want the airfoil created parallel to
the Right reference plane, the X values in the original data must go
in the Z column and the Sign must be reversed.
I It‘you wanted to change the angle ofattack ofthe airfoil, that is,
rotate it, you would have to transform the values in the tile. Not a
trivial task.
Strategy: Use To work around these issues, we will pursue the following strategy:
Sketch Blacks l. Create the curve in model space using the data “as is".
2. Open a sketch on the Front Plane.
3. Use Convert Eu! 5 to replicate the curve as sketch entities.
4. Make a block ufthe active sketch.
5. Create a new pan and sketch on the appropriate reference plane.
6. Insen the block, scale it, and position it where needed.
Procedure
New part.
Begin by opening a new part using the Palmm template.
This part will be used to create and save the sketch blocks needed tor
the nrctiles ofthe wing.
Change units.
Change the units to feet. We will use feet because the airfoil data is
from a World War IIrera Boeing Br] 7 and its specifications are in feet.
Insen curve.
Click Curve Through XYZ Points 2)“.
351
smelt Blacks as Profiles
Select the file.

Click Browse... and select the file
NACAioo 1 Seldom from the
Lesson08\Exercises\
annamnr \ rm Dru ‘ turn. slam
m
u;
L4
w
Curve Data folder.
The file contents are read into the
§§§S§§§§‘§
dialog and separated into

columns. , Lama ]
Note The browser can he set to search for Curves (* .sldarv) or

Text. Files (hm).
[fa curve or text tile is not available, infurmmion can also he entered
intu this dialog manually.
Note NACA stands for National Advismy Cnmmitlee my Aeronautics, the
precursor to NASA.
Add the curve.
Click OK to add the curve to the part. A smooth spline curve is created
using the points contained in the file as shown below in a Front view.
A feature named Curvei appears in the FezmreMznager design tree.
New sketch.
Convert Ent es.
Use Convert Entities i) to cupy the curve feature into the active
sketch.
Close the profile.
The trailing edges ofthe airfoil are not closed.
Sketch a line connecting the two ends ofthe
spline.
Do rm] exit the sketch yet.
352
sum. Blocks as Fmfiles
Sketch Blocks Blocks are a way to save, edit, and reuse graphic information. ()fien
people think ofblocks in terms ufelements in drawings, such as
standard notes. symbols, and title blocks. However, blocks are also a
way to reuse and manipulate sketch geometry.
You can create blocks from single or multiple sketch entities. Using
blocks you can:
I Create layout sketches using a minimum ofdimensions and
relations. For more information about creating layout sketches
using blocks, please refer to the Assembly Modeling course.
I Freeze a subset ofentities in a sketch to manipulate as a single
entity.
I Manage complex sketches.
I Edit all instances ofa block simultaneously.
To create a block you can either select entities in the graphics area, or
save a sketch directly to a hlock file. when saving a sketch to a block
file, be sure to have the intended insertion point selected when saving.
Block files are separate SOLIDWORKS files with the extensiun
" .sldblk.
Where to Find It I Menu: Tools, Blocks, Save

I Blocks Toolbar: Save Sketch as Black
9 Save a block file.

Select the Origin. Click Tools, Blocks, Save E.
in the Save As dialog bux, bmwse to the LessDnOS\EXercises\
Curve Data folder and save the block as NAGA,OOlEl.sldbl.k.
Click Save, then exit the sketch.
Why Select the Selecting the Origin defines that location as the insertion point ot‘the
Origin? block. In other words. when you insert the block, this is the point that
the cursor is attached to and is used to locate the block.
10 Repeat.
Repeat step 3 through step 9 this time using the curve file
NACA700 1 0.sldcl’vl Likewise, name the block NAGA,OOlO.sldbLk.
353
Sketch Blacks as Profiles
11 New part.
Create a new part for the wing lnodel.
Change the units to feet & inches with fractions. Set the denominator
to 32.
75.1mm. manhunt.“
summit
Wm M,in." thituwnt
Me
We in M
.,
um;
nine...“
m
..
Minimum mm
s
WW
in, .
7
is W Win
new
we in: n. as... m... in“.
mm, mm
new“
meme
mm.
autumn,
nuts
miss
um
WM
int
Save the part and name it Wing.

«new
m.
n".
.2
n
it
,
fl
Tip When using feet at inches for units, dimension values typed into fields
nftlle document are assumed to he inches unless an apostrophe or it
is added. Values can also be entered in feet and inches using a format of
0
2'45". When using Fractions, the default behavior is such that
decimals will still be shown unless the dimension value matches a
fraction ofthe specified denominator (ot a reduced fraction such as I/i).
Use the More... button in settings to specify it‘you want to round in the
nearest fraction.
12 Reference plane.
Create a Plane
l
oFfset from the Right Plane a distance of4 teat.
Name this plane Rant.
13 New sketch.
Open a new sketch on the Root reference plane.
14 Insert block. m u...“ (3
Click Tools, Blocks, Insert. Q. ~/ x
Browse to the LessonOS\Exercises\ WNW "

Curve Data folder and select infigh—
NACAioo 1 8.51db1kt
Under Parameters, set the Scale to 19.6.
Since the airfoil sketch had a chord length of 1
unit, in this case l font, a Scale of19.6 scales the
airfoil to we feet which is the length ofthe chord 4W“
at the root of the wing. is...“ A
I] it.
Click the Origjn to insen an instance nt‘tlle block, is;
354
sounwoRKs Enemise 35
smelt Blocks as Fmfiles
Click DK «.
Exit the sketch.
15 Offset plane.
Create a new reference plane offset 45 feet from the Root reference
plane. Name this plane Tip.
16 New sketch.
Open a new sketch on the Tip reference piane.
17 Define the insertion point.
As you can see from the
drawing at the right, the cross
section ofthe tip has to be
positioned all and up to
accommodate the taper and
dihedral angle of the wing.
Insert a sketch point and
dimension it as shown below.
We'll use this point to position
the next sketch block.
yeti l
2‘!" . .
18 Insert block.
Click Tools, Blocks, Insert. E.
Browse to the LessonOS\EXEPCises\Cur’vE Data. folder and 56130!
NACAJJO 1 0.51clb1k.
Under Parameters, set the Scale to 7.25.
This scales the airfoil to 7.25 feet which is the length ufthe chard at the
tip ofthe wing.
Click the sketch point to insert the block.
q:>
Click OK .
’25'
73%.4.‘
Exit the sketch.
355
Exemile 35 sauuwoRKs
sum Blocks as Pmfils
19 Lo“.
Click Loned Boss/Bass 8. .r x
Select the two sketches being careful to pick in

roughly the same location or corresponding
entities in each sketch.
Click OK I .
'

Lesson 9
Advanced Loft and Boundary
Features
Upon successful complenon oflhis lesson. you will be able to:

I Use secondary curves In Lofi and Boundary features.
I Use Spln Emmes to dlvlde a skemh curve.
I Use me Delele Face command to remove unwanted feature

amfacls.
I Use me Devianon Analysis mol (0 compare faces along edges.
I Add Face Fillets.
357
Lesson 9 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Lnlt and aunndsry Features
Additional Lofi and Boundary features both allow for the addition of secondary
Curves in Loft curveon control the shape ofthe feature. These are referred to as guide
and Boundary curves in lofls and Direction 2 curves in boundary features. In left
features, profiles have the most amount of influence of the shape of the
feature. While in boundary features Direction land Direction 2 curves
have the same amount afinfluencel
Lofis also allow for an additional type of curve to be included in the
feature: a Centerline curve.
Centerline Lufi Centerlines are milar to guide curves, except that a centerline is
.
Lofting designed to provide a direction for the eenter locations orthe protlles,
while guide curves are meanl to manipulate the outside edges Ufa ldfi.
A eenterline does not need to intersect the profiles nt a vertex, while a
guide curve inust connect directly with the profiles.
Case Study: The part shown below is a heat shield thnt goes over a hot gas manifold.
Heat Shield ,
lt oonsists ofseveral shapes a semicircle, a reetnngle, a halfellipse
all of which must be smoothly blended together.
,
Centerline Curves will be used to control the direction oflhe loit
features in between the profiles.
We will also use this example to show some ofthe preview options for
lotting, working with lofi oonneetor points, and how to use the
Delete Face command to deal with feature artifacts
35E
sounwciRKs Lesson 9
Advanced Len aria Buunflary Features
1 Open the part Heal: Shield.

Open the existing part fmm the Lessen09\0ase Study folder.
To save time, this part already has the required sketches.
W35
Tip lfyou wish to display dime ‘cns for multiple features in the graphics
area, rightrclick the Annolati ns folder in the FeatureManzger design
tree and choose Show feature dimensions fmm the menu.
2 Insert a lull
3
Click Lofled Boss/Base
Preview.
8
Start by Infiing the halfrellipse profile (Sketehs) to the halfram
(Sketchzt).
Chuose the profiles from the graphics area. Select near the same
relative corner to properly map the venices to one another
pissieniruhn
Tip Because (if the importance of where you pick the profiles, it is best to
cheese them in the graphics area rather than the FeatureManager
design tree.
:59
Les-an 9 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Lnfi and Enundary Features
4 Slarllend constrains
Mlelka‘l
Use Normal to Profile fur both
the start and end canstraints.
5 Cenlerliner
Expand the Cenlerline Param-
eters gruup box.
Select the centerline
(Sketeha).
Click OK ./ tn create the
feature.
Tip A eenterline does not have to intersect a profile at a vertex, unlike a
guide curve.
6 Resullsr
Sharing Sketches The same sketch can be used for multiple features within a part.
Sketehes een simply be made visible in the graphic area or selected
from the FeatureManager design tree to become part ofthe new feature.
When a sketeh is shared between features, the sketeh icon in the tree
updates to be overlaid with an open hand 1;.
7 Insert another loll.

Show Q Sketch4. (It is
absorbed into the lofi feature.)
Loll 3 between eketehs and
Sketah4.
Use Normal to Profile for both
the start and end constmints.
Use 81(9th as the Centerline.
Jan
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 9
Advanced tart and soundary Features
Shared sketch.
Sketeh4 is shared by both
lofl features, as indicated by
the name and the Shared
sketch 1; symbol. Editing
the sketch would change
both features.
, 3 mm
Unfurtunately the lofi shape, C Sketdté
although valid, is not 1; 5m...
desirable. The fact that the
profiles have different
C 5mm:
numbers of edges adversely . 3 m2
intluences the shape of the C ““06
feature. E 5‘3"“
Hide V Sketch4.
C sketrrtz
Loft Preview similar to Boundary features, Lofis have preview options that can
Options t in manipulating and evaluating the geometry. When creating or
editing a loft feature, you can use the Shoncut menu to access preview
uptinns for displaying Mesh, Zebra Stripes, or on Opaque preview.
There are also additinnal options to view or hide all the connector
points for the feature. By default the lofl displays one set of connectors
near the profile venices that are selected, by selecting Show All
Connectors from the menu, connectors at each vertex appear and can
be manipulated by dragging.
To modify the way the lofi feature is mapping together, we will take a
look at 2 techniques. First, we will show the connectors and manually
use the mouse to relocate the points. As a second technique, we will
modify the lofi profile to gain greater control otthe feature.
351
Les-an 9 sounwoRKs
Advanced ten and Boundary Features
9 Show Connectors.
Select the Loftz feature and
click Edit Feature a.
Right-click in the graphics area
and click Show All
Connectors.
Colored circles appear at the
(enlmlnllxtldmll .
endpoints of the segments of
the profiles. Because ofthe
different number of segments in
each profile, the system
estimates where each connector
should map to.
10 Synchronize the profiles. ptsriitirnrrm,
Drag the connectors to improve
how the rectangllar profile
maps to the semicircular
profile.
Click OK ./ to rebuild the
feature.
11 Results.
Although dmgging the
connectors is very interactive, it
may not be precise enough for
some applications. If precise
control is needed over how the
profiles map to each other, you
should manually subdivide the
profile.
12 Delete.
Delete X the Lama feature.
We will recreate the feature using a modified sketch with an equal
number of segments.
362
sounwoRKs Lesson 9
Advznced Lott and Bounuzry Features
13 Recreate the sketch.

Select Hamel and open a
Sketch C.
Select Sketch4 and click
Convert Entities 0.
Adding Sketch To precisely identify mapping locations for lnfi and boundary t‘eatures,
Segments profiles should contain the same number ofvenices. In order to create
additional vertices in the circular profile, the arc will need to be split
into tnultiple segments. SOLIDWORKS provides 2 tools to split an
existing sketch entity into multiple segments: Segment and Split
Entities.
Segment Tlle Segment command creates equidistant sketch points or segments
in an existing sketch entity.
Where to Find it I Menu: Tools, Sketch Tools, Segment u';
Split Entities The Split Entit' 5 command can be used to break a single sketch entity
into multiple pieces at selected locations. Once activated, click
elements within the sketch to add multiple split points and cancel the
command cnce done.
Where to Find It I
I
Menu: Tools, Sketch Tools, Split Entities
f
Shoncut Menu: Righbcllck a sketch segment and click
Sketch Tools, Split Entities
For this example, the Split Entities command will he used See
[karma 37: Funnel on page 386 for an example ofusing the Segment
Command.
353
Les-on 9 SOLIDWORKS
Advanced Lult and anunnnry Features
14 Split ent s.
Split Points
Rightaclick the arc and click
Sketch Tools, Split
Entities .
f
Divide the am intu three pieces
by clicking at two locafions on
either side of the center.
All three arcs are comdial but
their arc angles are under
defined.
15 Angular dimensions.
Dimension the arcs at 35"
u ng 3 point angular
dimensions.
Optional: You can make
the values of the angles
equal using a global
variable. This way, if yuu
change one, they both
update.
16 Exit the sketch.
17 New Lott.
Create a eenterline lofi between
Sketch?) and the new fourv
sided sketch.
Use Normal to Profile for both
the sun and end constraints.
Add the Centerline curve.
Riglltaclick Show All “M““M‘W”
Connectors tu display the
maleliing endpoints.
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 9
AdvaMM Lon and auuneary Features
18 Resulls.
Now that there are an equal
number of vertices in each
profile, the system can easily
map them together for the
desired result.
Cleaning Up a Sometimes with sweeping and

Model lotting the model ends up with
,
unwanted artifacts faces from one
feature that protrude through
another feature. Generally, these
artifacts should be removed.
one way to make it easier to spot
these artifacts is to make the
features contrasting colors. Anilacl
Note
Changing the display to Shaded With Edges
artifacts more visible. . also helps make
A model matching the artifacts seen in these images has been provided
in the L97refererlce folder.
19 change colors.
Change the appearance ofthe two
lott features, making them
contrasting colors.
You can increase the image quality
to make it easier to see the artifacts
as well.
365
Lesion 9 SOLIDWORKS
Advanced Lult and aaundary Features
Deleting Faces To remove the unwanted faces from the part, we will use the Delete
Face command. This tool includes several options to control how the
model reacts to a face that is deleted. For this example, we will delete
the faces and patch. For an example of using the Delete and fill option,
see Delete Face: Delele and Fill on page 408.
Delete Face The Delete Face tool removes one or more faces from the model.
Feature Options within the Delete Face command include:
. Delete: removes face(s) leaving open edges in the model. This

results in a surface body. See the Surfilce Modeling course for more
information on this option.
I Delete and Patch: removes face(s) and patches the open area by
extending the boundaries ofadjacent faces.
I Delete and Fill: removes face(s) and fills gap with a new surface.
The new face can be created with tangency to the adjacent faces.
Where to Find It I CommandManager: Surfaces > Delete Face 8

Menu: Insert Face, Delete
. shortcut Menu: Right~click a face and click Delete @
20 Delete Face.
Click Delete Face @.
Click Delete and Patch.
Zoom in on the edge of the flat face where the two lnfl features meet.
Select the artifact faces. Some are very tiny,
sliver faces.
8 mm a,
I
E
X
Tip Use the "9" key to toggle the magnifying glass

tool to assist in zooming in on small areas.
El swarmn ass"
0m... A
o Delm
a) Duets "a mo.
0 bdrm ...a m
[3 Shaw amiss
Artifact laces
366
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 9
Advanced Lalt and Boundary Features
Note The number of artifacts may vary based on how the loft features are
defined. lfusing the Heat smemjhase 1 model from the
Legerepenoe folder, there will be 5 artifact faces to remove.
Click OK ./ .
21 Results.
The artifact faces are removed
and the surrounding edges of
Lotta are extended to close the
gap.
22 Remove color.
Remove the colots you assigned
in step 19.
Evaluating The next step is to apply fillets to the pan. Adding fillets between
Edges complex surfaces can sometimes be challenging. To help identify
potential issues,we11 first analyze the edge we're looking to fillet. To
evaluate edges in a model, SOLIDWORKS includes a tool called
Deviation Analysis. We‘ll use this tool to take a closer look at the
edges resulting from the last lofi feemte.
Deviation Analysis The Deviation Analysis tool can be used to determine the angular
difierence between t‘noes along Common edges. A 90° value indicates
perpendicular races, 0° indicates tangenoy.
Where to Find It I CommandManager: Evaluate > Deviation Analysis 8:
I Menu: Tools, Evaluate, Deviation Analysis
23 Analysis parameters.
Click Deviation Analysis 25: and select the model edge shown. Set
the number of sample points slider control to about halfway.
Click Calculate.
367
Lesion 9 SOLIDWORKS
Advanced Left and eoundary Features
24 Deviation Analysis graphics.

The results ofthe deviation analysis appear as pairs of 3D arrows on
the edge. They are color coded to show the change in angle between the
faces along the Common edge. The color settings used for the arrows
can be changed.
There are also flags indicating the maximum, minimum, and average
angle between the faces at the selected edge.
_
What...
Maxim auntie"
a
tr-
Iv
sit
as-
m.“ batman a 21'
Max beams. to .
warm seamen
Face Fillets As we saw with the deviation

analy the angle between the
faces Julned by the highlighted
edge transitions from 90° to 0°.
This is mmetimes called a
degenerate edge and they can be
problematic when it comes to
filleting. The best approach for
filleting this type of edge is to
use a face fillet.
Face Fillets require face selections for their definition and can be
useful for problem areas like degenerative edges. Since the face fillet is
applied to the selected faces, it doesn't matter what the edge looks like
between them and can even be applied to faces that do not share an
edge.
The Face Fillet is one ofthe available type offillets that can be created
from within the Fillet command. For more information on Faee Fillets,
see Face Fillets on page 417.
soLIDwoRKs Lesson 9
Advanced Lufl end Emmdary Features
25 Face fillet.
Click Fillet 0.
Click Face fillet D.
Set the Radlus to 25mm.
For Face Se! 1, select the face on
the .ridc elf the Lofts feature. m: su 1
Click in the Face Set 2 selection

list to activate it.
Select the face on the mp 0f the
Lofts feature.
Click OK v.
26 Second face fillet.

You cannot fillet
disconnecmd edges using n
face filleL Therefore a
second face fillet is
required on the degenerate
edge on the opposite side
of the Loftrfi feature.
21 Remaining fillets.
Add a 25mm fillet down the
remaining sharp edge ofthe Luft3
feature. This can be a regular
Conslant Size Fillet Q ; it does
not have to be a face fillet.
369
Lea-an 9 sounwoRKs
Advanced Lnfi and Boundary Fealnms
Add a Face Fillet D with a

55mm radius fillet between the
face selections shown.
not so :
28 Results.
Opllonal: Complete the Heat Shield by adding additiunal features.

29 create an offset plane.
Create a plane offset 100mm
from the Top Plane. This will
be used to sketch the profile 0f
the rectangular inlet tube.
30 Sketch profiler
Sketch a rectangular profile as
shown.
Fillet llle comers with sketch
fillets.
The profile is centered lefivto~
right with respect to the Origin.
37a
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 9
AdvaMM Lu“ and Buundary Fealures
31 Exlrudel
Extrude a boss using the end
condition Up to Next, and 5" of
Outward Drafl.
32 Add filleL shell.

Run a 12.5mm radius fillet around the base of the boss.
Shell the pan towards the inside using a wall thickness of1.5mm.
311
Lesson 9 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced unit and aunndsry Features
Case Study: Many shapes found in industrial products fall

Hook into the eomplex shapes category. This lilting
hook is one ctfihem. There are no tlat
surfaces, and the only easily ideniifiable
feature is the revelved loop on top.
To help determine where to start building,
make a list of the information you have such
as:
.I Design requirements.
Sizes or known dimensions.
I Maierials.
I Manufacturing processes.
. The application in which it will he used.
This may not answer all the questions for you, but it will give you a
sun.
in this case, we have a picture ofa simm- part
we are to design around. We also know that the
inside diameter of the top loop is 1.25" and the
cross section othe loop has a diameter of
0.750".
372
sounwoRKs Lesson 9
Advanced Lott and aoundary Features
Planning 3 Before tackling a part like this, it is a gcmd idea to plan out the task.
Modeling Slmtegy Placement oflhe origin is one ofllle first things that should be
considered, since it can be imponanl to downstream tasks such as
mating in an assemhly. In this case, the logical positions for the origin
would he the center nfihe [up loop or at the center oflhe hook throat.
There may be other valid locations but these are two examples.
Next you should try to identify
functional shapes on the pan. For Loop
example:
I The 10011 Transition
- The hook body

Tip
I The transition between the
hook body and the loop.
I The tip on the end ofthe
hook.
Each one oflhese functional
shapes will present its own
modeling challenge. Hook my
Once you have identitied the
functional shapes, it may hecorne easier to assign feamres to make each
shape.
The loop is most easily created as a revolve.
A transition from one shape to another is a good description ota lott
or boundary.
The book body could be created with either a lott, boundary, or a
sweep. it will he easier to set up multiple profiles to get the desired
shape, so we will try a lofl first.
There are several ways to make the tip. but we will use this feature to
demonstrate using a point as a profile for a lott or boundary feature.
in the following case study, we will complete thehook body feamre
using both a loft and houndary feature. The remainder oflhe hook will
he completed In Exercise 36: [Ian/t Continued on page 381.
373
Lesson 9 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Lott anu auunusry Features
1 Open the part Hook.

it contains the following:
I m mm
sort lelmttuDrv-ulrrrntsl
a: 5mm
I Hank Picture sketch.
This sketch holds the minim the
El not put.
Sketch Picture and Kl Ylelihe
contains a sketched circle. fil W rum
1. on...
The Circle was used as a r C use. rm
reference to properly scale L (
tusuemm
til premium
and position the picture. in “firemen.“
I Hank Contours sketch. [ll termites"
til treatment.
The Hook Conwurs LU nitration".
mm.
ituthtilePlar-e
L‘l
sketch will be used to hold m
the lofi guide curves. The
,
comm
sketch currently has a
spline tracing the inside contour nftlle hook. This spline and its
points have been used as references for the profile planes.
I Profile Planes. Several planes are provided for the locations of the
profile sketches.
I Second Profile sketcht This sketch represents a cmsysectinn of
the new hook design The profile is a symmetrical and proportional
spline which we will reruse for most aftlle profiles ofthe hunk
body feature.
2 Create second guide curve.
Edit the Hook Contours
sketch.
Create a second spline amund lineman-212m
the outside contour of the main
hook body. It will take some
adjustment to get it close to the bN
sketch picture image. This will
be the second guide Curve for
the hook body t‘eature.
Make sure the spline extends
past the First Profile Platte
on each end. To get the shape
we want where the hook
transitions to the loop, it will be easiest to overbuild this feature and
then trim it back. We eiso need the curve to pass through or touch the
sketch plane to create pierce relations in the profile sketch
3 Exit the sketch.
374
sounquKs Lesson 9
Advznced Lott and summary Features
4 Create the first profile.

Open a new sketch on the First
Profile Plane.
Sketch an Ellipse 0 whose major
axis is pierced on both ends by the
splines ofthe Hook Contours sketch,
and whose minor axis is 1" wide.
,
5 Exit and rename the sketch.
Name the Sketch First Profile.
6 Hide the sketch picture.

Hide \t the Hook Picture sketch in the FeamreManager design tree.
7 Optional: Organize the tree.
Drag the Second Profile sketch to reorder it after the First Profile in
the tree.
8 Edit the Second Profile sketch.
Edit the sketch and constrain the two
centerline endpoints ofthe proportional
spline to the Hook Contour splines using
Pierce 6 relations.
Note This sketch was created by mirroring a
proportional spline and using Fit Spline to
join the original and the mirrored copy.
9 Exit the sketch.
375
Lesson 9 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced Lult and summary Features
10 Copy and paste the profile.

We ate going to use this same profile for
several ofthe lofl sections. Because it is a
proportional spline and the distance
between the guide Curves changes, the
sketch will stretch to fit between the
curves.
Select the Second Profile sketch from
the FentureManagerdesign tree and press
Ctrl+C.
Select the Third Profile Plane, and
press cmw
Also Paste 2 copy onto the Fourth,
Fifth, and Sixth Profile Planes. The seventh profile will end the
feature with another ellipse.
11 Edit the copied sketches.
Edit each copied sketch.
Constrain the same points in the same way
as in step 8, using Pierce ¢ relations.
12 Create the last profile sketch.

0n the Seventh Profile Plane, Sketch
an Ellipse 9 whose axis is pierced by
the guide curves in one direction and has
a width of 0.6" in the other.
At this point, the sketching for the main
hook body lofi is complete.
13 Optional: Rename the sketches.
Rename the sketches to organize the
model and make them easy to identify in
the Lofi PropertyMznaget.
37s
soLIDwoRKs Lennon 9
Advanced Lnfl and Boundary Features
14 Create the loll feature

Click Lofled Boss/Base 8.
Select the lofl profiles in order near
cunesponding points.
Modify the loft connector points to
align with the guide curve.
15 Salem Guide Curves.

Activate the selection box for Gulde
Curves.
Select the spline tmeing the inside
cantour or the hook.
When you try to pick the curve, the
SelecfionManager will appear on the
screen.
This is because there is more than one

curve within the Hook Contours
sketch.
In the SelectionManager, click Select Open Loop r’, and click
OK .I on the SelectionManager.
Select the spline tmcing the unmide eentoni in the same manner.
377
Lesson 9 soLlnwoRKs
Advanced Lott and summary Features
Curve Influence Lofi and boundary features include controls for how secondary Curves
influence the shape ot‘the feature.
To Next GuidelCurve: extends the guide curve influence to the next
guide/Curve.
To next sharp: extends the curve influence to the next hard corner of
the profile.
@‘G
To Next Edge: extends the curve influence only to the next edge.
Global: extends the Curve influence to the entire feature.
To next sharp Global

Tangency can also be applied to secondary curves. Lofts have some
limited options for applying tangency at guide curves, while boundary
features have the same options available as Direction I curves.
16 Complete Lott.
Use the option To Next Guide for the
guide curve influence.
Click 0K « to complete the feature.
Rename the lofi feature Hook Body.
17 Save the part.
Hook Using The setup we created for the lotted hook body can also be used tor a
Boundary boundary feature. since this feature has curves in 2 directions. the
results from a boundary will vary greater than when the feature is made
ofonly profiles. With a boundary feature, Direction and Direction 2
1
curves have the sztme amount otintluence over the shape, while in a
lott, the profiles have a greater intluence than the guide curves.
We will create a copy of the Hook part with a new name and recreate
the feature as a boundary. Once complete, we will Compare the results.
37B
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 9
Advznced Lott and aonndzry Features

Click File, Save As.
Select the option in the Save As dialog to Save as copy and open.
Name the file HonkJslngemmdapy and click Save.
19 Recreate feature as Boundary.
Delete the loft feature.
Click Boundary BossIBase @.
For Direction 1, select the cross sectional profiles in order, near a
corresponding point.
Modify the connector points to align with the guide curve.
For Direction 2, use the SelectionManager to pick the contour curves.
Notice that the preview
shows the feature
extendingto the ends of
the Direction 2 curves.
Click Trim by
direction 1 under
Options and Preview
to limit the shape to in
between the first and
last profiles.
Click OK J to complete the feature.
379
Lesson 9 SGLIDWORKS
Advanced Lutt enu auunuery Features
20 Compare results.
Tile the 2 Hook document windows To match the illustration below‘
tile the HunkflsingBaundary to the right, and the Hook with the
lofi feature to the lefi.
Lofl
g Boundary
E
At first, the results look Very similar. Turn on Curvature
analyze the model further.
I dtsplay to
The primary drtrerenee is nouceahle at the inslde contour. Both

solutions are correct and meet the design requirements it‘s srmply a
decision ofpreference to decide which feature to move forward with If
system performance is a concern, you may also want to try comparing
Performance Evaluation 6.
Lou
I I Boundary
Note Your results may difier from those shown m the illustrations due to the
aruque spline you created and how the connector points are mapping
together for each feature.
380
SOLIDWORKS Elemise as
Hook Conllnued
Exercise 36: In this exercise, you'll complete the Hook

Hook Continued model that was started in the previous case
study.
I Muliibndy Parts on page 8

a Case Study: Lafled Merge on page 329
- Boundary Feature on page 325
Units: inches
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing part Hookjonunued from the
LessonOQ\Exercises folder.
Wi
Create the top loop.
0n the Right. Plane, create the sketch as a?
shown. Use the minimum arc condition to 0.1
create the 61.25 dimension for the inside of the W9

loop.
I"
Revolve a the sketch about the
Clear Merge Result to create the
centerline.
loop as a separate
solid body.
Rename the feature Loop.
381
Hunk Continued
3 Trim the Hook Body. 0mm

To create the face where the transition
feature will begin, we‘ll trim the Hunk
Body using a cut feature. It is better
practice to overbuild complex features
and trim rather than try and force them
to titan exact shape at the ends.
0n the Front Plane, sketch a circle
centered on the origin with a diameter of
3.7".
Extrude a Through All cut in both
directions. Use the Feature Scope so
that it only cuts the Hook Body.
4 Trim the Loop.

Ta transition from the Hook Body to the Loop, we need as place on the
Loop to transition to.
Again on the FrontPlane, draw a circle dimensioned as Shawn.
Extrude a Through All out in both directions. Use the Feature Scope
so that it only cuts the Loop.
Be sure to use Flip side to cut.
382
Hook Cunllnued
5 Make the transition feature

The out faces from the Hook Body and Loop will serve as the profiles
for the transition feature.
Create 2 Boundary a
feature by selecting the two out faces at
approximately corresponding locations.
All" W m- rem. .
I:
“uni
irraee
E
Wanton
Note It will also work if you select the edge around the cut face insmad ofthe
cut face itself, but in general, it is better practice to create the feature
between faces than edges when creating solids.
Use Tangency to Face for bath profiles and use the default value of
1.0 for the Tangent Lengths.
if the feature bulges out or wcists in, it may be because the tangency is
going to the wrong face or in the wrong direction. lfthis is the case, use
the Next Face and/or Reverse Tangent Direction buttons to select the
correct face or reverse the tangency.
Also notice the connectors. Depending on your selection, you may

have to move them. The best place for them is as shown, along the
plane of symmetry of the pan.
Click OK J .
Rename the feature Transition.
383
Hunk Continued
6 Results.
A loft feature could also have easily been used
for the Transition.
7 Sketch a point.
To Create the Tip feature, we‘ll add a boundary using a single sketch
point as a pmfile.
Create a plane with an Offset Distance
«0.5" from the end face ofthe hook.
Q;
Create a sketch and sketch

poim as shown. The point
should be constrained
Horizontal — from the
(high or Coincident /\
to the Front Plane
1.“
Exit the sketch.
soLIchlRKs Exercise 36
Hook Cuttlllllled
Create the Tip.

Create :1 Boundary
to the sketch point.
a feature from the flat face on the end of the hook
end-v . humimmi. .
mm In Mn
‘Gi flllfldew
El int ;
Envlyw Ill
fin Using a sketch paint as a profile is a useful technique for Capping the

ends of pans. Just be sure ifyou are intending t0 use eonsunints such as
Normal to Pmfile, that the point is located on an appmpriate plane.
Tangency Type should be set Tangency To Face for the face profile.
Use Normal to Profile for the point profile, with the Tangent Length
set to 1.5 ta give the tip ofthe hack some breadth.
Rename the feature Tip.
335
Funnel
Exercise 37: Create this part using the

Funnel information and dimensions
provided.
following skills:
- Loft Feature on page 319

- Segment on page 363
- Sweeping Ala/lg Model
Edges on page 238
- Intersection Curve Feaium
on page 269
Units: millimeters
Conics The inside contour at the top ofthe funnel
uses conic curves at the corners. Conies
are sketched curves defined by a conic
section, or a plane slicing a cone.
Depending on how the oonic is defined, it
can be used to produce an ellipse,
parabola, or hyperbulz. Conics will never
include inflections and are somewhat
easier to camm] than splines.
A Conic curve is created by defining 2

endpoints, a top apex point, and a Rho
value as a founh point. The Rho value can
be constrained with a dimension and
defines the ratio of the curve between 0
being flat, and being at a point. When
1
using a conic to connect entities, options

can be selected to incorporate tangent
relations automatically.
Where to Find It I Menu: Tools, Sketch Entities, Conic A

I Shoneut menu: Rightrclick while in a sketch and click
Sketch Entities, Conic
386
Funnel
Procedure
1 New part.
Open a new part using the FaPLMM template and name it Funnel.
2 sun the first profile.
Create the symmetrical profile shown.
@115
3 Add a Conic curve.

Click Conic A.
Click Auto tangency in the PropertyManager.
Connect the endpoints of the conic with the endpoints at an open corner
nmie profile.
With the Auto tangency option selected, the apex of the curve is
positioned automatically.
Move the cursor to see how the different Rho values afl‘ect the curve.
Position the final point at about Rho=n.5
Add a dimension to the Conic to define the Rho value as 0.45.
Ens
387
Funnel
4 Add another Conic.

Add unolher Conic n m lhe olher onen earner in the profile.
Add a Symmetric ,la’ reluuon bexween the 2 conics and lhe profile
cenlerlinel
@115
5 Exil sketch C.
6 Second profile. ‘
Creme 3 new plane that is parallel m

the Top Flame and 32.5mm helow it.
Skemh n 225mm circle lined up wilh
(he Origin.
To ensure these pmfiles marl legemer
appropriately, we'll split the circle
into lhe same number ofenmies as the
/,
\
firsl profile.
7 Segment the profile.
Click Segment “IL
Select the allele and click Sketch segmenls,
Change lhe number of sketch segmems to 6.
Click OK \/ $25
38E
Funnel
The Segment command adds new venices equidistant around the

circle tn split it into 6 arcs. We'll use construction geometry to position
the arc end points to map appropriately to the veniees in the first
meme
8 Add construction geometry.
Add Centeriines 'x' radially from the circles center to the endpoints
of the first profiles
Tip You can use the clickedmg technique to sketch single lines» versus the
clickeclick technique which creates a chain ofiinesl
9 Add relations.
Add a Coincident A relation to an arc endpoint and a centerline.
Afier adding the relation the sketch is fuily defined.
389
Funnel
10 Evaluate relations. lemmauem t»

Rightrclick one ofthe arcs in the sketch
and click Select Chain.
Wtitle“: Emlhr)
A
Click Display/Delete Relations Jo.

The arcs share Coradial as well as Equal
length relations. These were created
automatically when using the segment
tool.
Dlnmdeu
Use Ctrl or Shift 10 select the
Equal length relations. Righrclick and
select Delete.
The are endpoints are now under
defined.
11 Add relations.
Continue to add Coincident A relations hetween the arc endpoints
and the Construction geometry to fully define the sketch.
390
Funnel
12 Lot! feature.
Exit the sketch and create a Lall 8 between the two profiles. Selec1
the profiles near corresponding points to map them together correctly
and ensure the feature will not twist.
Important! Make sure the option far Merge Tangent Faces is selected.
Click OK \’ .
Note The illustrations show the model with a red color appearance applied t0
the part.
13 Proflle for the funnel neck
The funnel neck is formed by another loft feature. For the first profile,
create a sketch on the bottom circular face.
Sketch a Circle G) and add a Coradlal O. relan‘un to one cf the edges
of the Circular face.
Add a Sketch Point I on the circle that is
Vertical | to the Origin. We will use this po‘ t
to aid in lining up the feature and preventing twist.
391
Funnel
14 Neck end pmfilel
0
Create a new reference plane
uffset fmm the Circular face by
50mm. 4:“?
Sketch a 1611.5mm circle that
is centered on the Origin.
Again, add a point on the

circumference ofthe circle that
is Vertical | to the Origin to
help align the lufi.
15 Neck Ion.
Lon 3between the two circnlnr
profiles. Move the connector to
align with the sketch paints.
Tip When selecting the profiles, be
sure to select the circle rather than
directly on the sketch point. Ifthe
sketch point is selected, the system
will attempt to use only the point as
the profile.
16 Shell the funnel.

The dimensions are given fur the
inside of the funnel.
Create a thinvwalled part by
shelling to the outside, ii thickness
0f 150mm.
392
Funnel
17 Build the riml

Sketch the outline of the rim using the dimensions given.
Use Convert Entities a to create the inner outline.
Extrude the rim to a depth of 1.50mm.
Optional: Make the I‘
we wall thickness M
values equal using a
global variable.
Note The term
“thickness" is
reserved and cannot
be used as a global
variable.
18 Sweep a lip on the underside of the rim

The crossvsection afthe lip is a semicircle, 1.50mm in diameter. Use
the model edge ofthe rim as the sweep path.
393
Funnel
19 Rib path and profile. Sweep pam

Create the sweep path for the rib by adding a
sketch on the Front Plane. Create an
Intersection Curve 9 where the inside face
ufthe funnel neck crosses the sketch plane.
Delete the curve at the back oflhe neck.
Sketch the rectangular profile cm are ban/am
face.
e?
20 Rib sweep feature.

Create the rib sweep feature using the option for Align with end faces.
This Option will ensure thalthis rib and the panerrr instances extend
properly to faces of llre funnel.
21 Pattern the rib.
Make a lolel ofthree ribs, equally spaced,
using :1 Circular Pattern >241
394
Funnel
22 A hole in the rlmi

Using the dimensicms provided,
sketch 2 profile to cut through the rim
SD the funnel can be hung on a hook.
Notice the use of an angular
dimension on an are. This can be
created by picking the arc’s
centerpoint and its two ends.
395
Ranker An.
Exercise 38: Create this part using the

Rocker Arm dimensions pmvided. Use
sketch relations and
dimensions to maintain the
design intent.
following skills:
. 31.1mm Spline on
page 104
I Derived Ska/chair on
page 335
I Baundmy Fenlum on
page 325
Units: millimeters
Design Intent The design intent for this part is as follows:

I. The part is symmetrical.
2. The main body oftlie aim must smoothly Connect the three pivot
points.
Procedure
New part.
Create a new part using the PartJIIM template and name it
Rocker Arm.
Draw the layout sketch.
Use the dimensions shown to draw the layout sketch on the
Front Plane. This will place all ofthe functional features on this pan.
Note the Symmetric ,Izl’ relations.
/ .Ii
Exit the sketch.

Name the sketch Layout Sketch.
396
sounwoRKs Erlereise as
Rocker Arm
New sketch.
Name the sketch Guides.
Draw guide curves.
Draw both guide curves
in the same sketch. The
lower guide curve is two
lines and an arc, and the
upper one is a single
threerpoint spline.
The spline is
perpendicular to the two
short centerlines that
pass through the centers
of the small circles.
Exit the sketch.
Create three new planes. Planez
Create two new planes
perpendicular tn the longer
centerlines and coincident to
the centers nfthe small Mabel
circles.
Create a third plane at so
degrees from the Front
Plane and caincidem m the
short middle centerline.
Draw profile sketch.

0n Planel, sketch an ellipse.
Constrain it tn the guide curves with Pierce
relations and dimensions as shown.
¢
Exit the sketch.
397
Rocker Ann
Derived sketchi
Using the sketch fmm step a, Create a derived sketeh
on P131162.
Constrain it to the guide curves tp fully define it.
Draw third profile sketch

0n P161165, draw an ellipse dimensioned
as shown.
Use Fierce fi
relations in cunstmin the
ends «the rnnjor axis to the two guide
curves.
Boundary feature.
Click Boundary @ and select
the three ellipses for Direction 1.
Be sure the conueetms are
appropriately aligned.
39:
SOLIDWORKS Exercise as
Rocker Ann
10 Select Direction 2 curves.

Select the spline as a Direction 2
curve.
Select the two lines and the
tangent are as another Direction
2 curve.
Since both ofthe curves are in
the same sketch, you will have to
use the SelectionManager.
Leave all the Curve Influence
and Tangency Type options as
defaults.
Click OK J .
Optional Create a copy ot‘the part and recreate the feature as a loft. Use
Curvature to compare the features.
11 Extrude the pivot bosses.
()n the Front Plane open a new
sketch and offset each of the three
ZlO
circles from the layout sketch by
1 0mm.
Optional Set the three ofi"set values equal to

each other using a global variable.
Extrude the sketch:
I End can on: Mid Plane
I Disnnce: 65mm
I Draft: 5“ zm
lit
12 Cut holes.
Open another new sketch on the
Front Plane.
Conven the circles from the
layout sketch and create a cut that
goes Through All in both
directions.
399
Ranker Ann
13 Add fillels.
Add 10mm fillets around xhe
bosses.
11p Select the face ufthe
boundary rather than the
edges.
Ann
Lesson 10
Advanced Filleting and Other
Features
Upon successful cnmpletmn ofthis lesson. you will be able m:

I Understand the advanced options available with fillels.
I Apply advanced fillet types.

I Use the Wrap feature,
I Use the Defnrm feature.
I Use the Move Face command.
M11
Lesson 10 SOLIDWORKS
Adnnced Fllletlng and Other Features
Fillet Settings There are many filletmg functions beyond the most commonly used
default Constant Size, Symmetric fillet. Advanced fillets can be
powerful tools to help achieve design goals The following table shows
each fillet type and their available settings. These settings Wt“ be
discussed and demonstrated throughout this lesson
Fillet Type
Constant Variable
Fillet Settings Size Size Face Fillet Full Round
8 3 0
Fillet Method (page 403)
Sylnmetrlc \\\ \\\

Asymmetric
(‘hord Width (page 420)
Hold Lme (page 421)

Parameters \\\\\\\'\\\
Profile Options (page 404)
Fillet
Circular
Conic Rho \\\\\
(‘onlc Radius \\\\\\\
Curvature Continuous
Multiple Radius (page 405)

Setback Parameters
(page 406) \
Select Through Faces
(page 409)
Keep Features (page 409)
\
Options \\\\
Round Corners (page 4] l)
Flllet
Overflow Options (page 412)
Transition. SmoothIStraight
(page 416)
402
soLIchlRKs Lesion 1o
Mama Filleling and Other Features
Fillet Each fillet type will have dilrerent

Parameters settings available in the Fillet
PmpertyMznager. For most fillets, the
Fillet Parameters groupbox is where
uptions are selected for how the fillet is «mule naturalist
to be defined, what size it will be, and Fmfilt:
what shape. We'll begin by introducing
the settings fuund in Fillet Parameters
and will then move on to examples of the
unique options for eaeh fillet type.
Fillet Method The Fillet Method refers to haw the fillet
is defined. By default a fillet is defined
symmetrically, but using these options
allow for fillets to be defined
asymmetrically, by the width of the fillet,
or by using an existing edge as a hold
line. The images below illustrate the
different fillet methods on a simple pan.
Functional examples will be
demonstmted throughout the lesson.
Symmelric Asymmetric
Chord Width Huld Line

(Face Fillets unlyl (Face Fillets cnlyl
403
Lesson 10 soLIDwoRKs
Advanced rtllettng and otner Features
Fillet Profile
‘
All fillet types except for the Full Round Fillet include Fillel Profile
options. The fillet profile is the Cmss~seciion of the fillet. When
defining a Symmetric fillet, the profile is circular by defaull. Ifdesired,
you can use the profile options to create a fillet with a conic profile
defined by a rho value, a conic profile defined with a radius, or a
curvature continuous profile which would have a spline cross section.
Note For more information on conic curves, see Corlim on page 386.
If an Asymmetric fillet method is selected, the fillet profile will default
to Elliptic and a Conic Radius profile will not be available.
circular
‘* Conic Rho
a.
9‘
It:
Conic Radius Curvature Continuous
Elliptic [Asymmelric Fillets)
When advanced profiles are used in filleting, the radius dimension of

the fillet is really determining the distance the fillet edge is set hack
from the edge being broken.
SOLIDWORKS Lesson to
Advanced Fillehng and Other Features
Constant Size Now that we are familiar with some wnys to define Fillet Parameters,
Fillets we will explore settings for each fillet type.
Constant Size 3 fillets are the most widely used fillets. They include
some unique optiuns that can create very complex geometry. first
This
example will demonstrate how to use the Multiple Radius option as
well as make use of Setback Parameters.
Multiple Radius when creating Constant Size G tillets, you can use the Multiple
Radius optiun to define a different rndius nt selected edges. This option
is helpful for getting fillets at different sizes to blend appmpriately. The
Multiple radius fillet option will only be available with Symmetric
fillets.
1 Open the part CS_Setback Fillet.

Open the existing pnrt from the LessonlO\Case Study folder.
F'llet
' Parameters.
Click Fillet @- -m
Crezite a Symmetric, Circular fillet
with a radius of50mm.
Select the five edges as shown.
Multiple Radius.
Click the Multip e radius fillet option. mm lemme ~
A
K lW——
M—
Use the flag attnehed to the front, tcp edge to
change the radius there to 12.5mm.
405
Les-an 1o sounwoRKs
Advanced riiietmp and other Futures
Setback Setback Parameters can be applied

Parameters where three ur more fillet/ed edges meet
at a single vertex. For each edge, a
setback distance is defined to specify
haw far back from the common vertex
the fillet begins to blend.
Setback fillets are used in several
applications, particularly cesmetic
Setback Fillet
plastic pans and deep drawn sheet
metal. They give the corner a blended
look, and for drawn metal, they more
accurately reflect the stretching of the
metal than dc: default fillets.
Setback Parameters are available
with Constant Size 8
and Variable
E
Size @ fillets. Default Fillet
4 Select the setback vertices.

Expand the Setback Parameters group box
m~m
A Enunvmm
a
and click in the Setback Vertices @ a

selection box.
Select the franc right vertex where the filleled aisnmm
edges meet.
5 Assign setback values.

Each field in the callcnt represents an edge at the selected vertex.
Leaders from the callout indicate which field is associated with which
edge.
Use the callout to enter a
value af 115mm far the
lop, front edge.
Use a setback distance of
50mm fur the 2 other
edges.
Tip Use the Tab key to cycle
from one callcnt cell to the
next.
11p Using the Set All button can save a lot of set up time ifthere are many
currunon values.
«is
soLIDwoRKs Lulu" 1o
“winced Filming and mm Features
6 Repeat.
Click in the Setback Venices @ selection list once more and add the
second venex at the {mm oftl’le part.
Add 1119 same Setback Parameters as shown.
7 click OK v.
The final result with edges displayed shows how souowonxs
patches togelher dds complex fillet.
401
Lesson 10 saunwoRKs
Advanced Filletlng and other Futures
Delete Face: As a result ofthe blend, the setback fillet produced many small faces at
Delete and Fill the resulting corner. This is a good example of where the Delete Face
command might be used to remove many faces and replace them one
continuous face. This can be accomplished with the Delete and Fill
option.
Note For more detailed information on the Delete Face command, see
Delete Face Fcalum on page 366.
8 Delete Face.
Rightclick a face at the front, right comer and click Delete Face 8.
Select the faces at the comer blend as shown.
Under Options, click Delete and Fill and

Tangent tilt Tangent Fill will create tangency
cond us to the surrounding faces.
Click OK ./ .
El shim selenlon (why
can” a
0 one:
o comm pm
@ Dektund m
E renown
D Show pnwew
9 Optional: Repeat on second cornerl
um
sounwclRKs Lesson 10
Advanced Filletlng and Other Features
Fillet Options The next set of options we will be taking a

look at are found in the Fillet Options m A
groupbnxt The options pictured at the right are mgmmm

those specific to Constant Size E fillets Usaanmmw
There is one settings here that is shared by all WWW
fillet types except Full Round fillets; the a men.
option to Select Through Faces. : Keen edge
no We
Select Through When filleting you oflen have to select edges that
Faces are hidden behind faces of the model. The option
Select through faces allows you to select hidden
edges. This option is enabled by default and works
independently ofthe similar option in Tools,
Options, System Options Display/Selection.
Keep Features Constant Size G

fillets include a unique option which allows
geometry surrounded by the fillet to be either kept in the model or
removed. The Keep features option is selected by default and allows
for features fully surrounded by (he fillet to be trimmed or extended to
the face ofthe fillet. When this option is cleared a surrounded feature
would be removed from the pen.
Open the part CS_Keep Features.

Open the existing pan from the LessonlO\Case Study folder.
Click Fillet @-
Apply a Constant Size Fillet G to the edges shown using a radius
of 5mm.
Expand the Fillet Options group box and look at the Keep features
option. By default it is selected.
new. A
mementos
El Rmmd camel:
Ovtrflw Wat
is Default
t
Kelp my:
i' Keepwrfice
M19
.0
Les-oh 1o SOLIDWORKS
Advanced riilehng and Other FEIMIES
3 Cllck OK o/ i
Notice that both the hole and the boss are affected by the fillet and are
either trimmed or exmnded to adjust for it.
4 Edit the Fillet Method.

Edit the fillet and change the Fillet Method to
Asymmema
Change the Directionz iadius value to 9mm.
—fi "'°‘°‘
1: “Wm—Fl
Note The Fillet Profile automatically updates to 1‘ ”mm—Z“
Elliptic. }'
done
O.
no The longer side ufthe fillet should be aciess the top race of the pan.
The Reverse Direction 4/ button can be used to flip the definition of
each axis direction. This button only affects the edge(s) highlighted in
the selection box when pressed.
Click OK .1 .
The fillet now completely surrounds the boss but not the hole. Bath
features are still extended or trimmed back to compensate.
Mn
soLIDwoRKs Lula" 10
Advanced Filleting and other Fumes
5 Change the Keep Features settingr

Edit the fillet feature and clear the Keep features check box.
Click OK «.
Notice that the boss disappears but the hole remains.
6 change the flllel size

Change the size of the fillet to he
12mm across the top face and
Rebuild . .
Since the hole feature is now

completely surrounded by the fillet,
it is remaved from the made].
Round Corners Round comers is another unique setting for

NW A
Constant Slze E fillets and determines the WWW“ “m

behavior of fillets at non-tangent corners. with
Round comers selected, a fillet will roll
u .
around the sharp Corner like a marble. With the
opu‘on cleared, a fillet will miter like a picture D WW"
frame. 5 Kay mg.
0 Keep xmfiu
Round corners selected Round camels cleared
411
Lesion 1o SOLIDWORKS
Advanced rilleting and other Features
Overflow Options Constant Size 8as well as Variable Size @ fillets include
Overflow type options. These options enable you to specify how fillets
will act when they are larger than the space available for them.
. Keep edge . keeps the original edges that exist in model, braking
the fillet faces if necessary.
I Keep surface , allows surrounding edges to change to keep the
fillet surface unbmken.
. Default . allows the system to choose the overflow type based on
geometry conditions.
1 Open the part CS_0verflawl

Open the existing part from the
LessonlO\Case Study folder.
Notice that the edges of the middle
layer are not parallel to the sides of
the bottom layer. This will help
illustrate the differences between the
Keep edge and Keep surface
uptions.
Fillet Parameters.
Click Fillet @-
Select the edge as shown.
Create a Symmetric fillet with a
Radius offimm.
Make sure Tangent propagation is MW*
selected.
Keep Surface setting.

Expand the Fillet Options group box
and click Keep surface.
Click OK ‘1 .
The surface that is being “kept" is
the surface ofthe fillet itself. Notice
that the edges ofthe outer faces have
changed 7 they are no longer
straight. However, the faces ofthe race unbroken
is
fillet are unbroken. Edges have changed
412
SOLIDWORKS Lesson 10
Amanoed FIllellng and Other Features
Keep Edge setting.

Edit the fillet and change the option
to Keep edge.
Now notice that the edge ofthe
bmiom feature is now straight e as it
was before the fillet. However, the
face ofthe fillet has been broken up.
Face is broken
Edges are in-aight
Variable Size Variable Size @ fillets share many opliuns with Conshnt Size
Fillets fillets, but are defined very differently. As the name suggests, the
Variable Size fillet creates a fillet or round which can change in size
along selected edges. Control points are available along selected edges
to define values. The control points at the ends ofa edge are activated
by default. ()ther points can be activated by clicking or additional
control points can be created by using Ctrl+dmg.
We'll use the example pan pictured
to explore how to define 3 Variable
Size ES fillet and also modify the
fillet profile to use a Conic Radius.
1 Open the part VS_Varlable Size.

Select Fillet Type.
Click Fillet a.
Click Variable Size @ as the Fillet
Type.
Select the top, curved edge orthe pan.
Note The fillet type cannot be edited afier the feature is initially created. You
cannot change a constant size imo a variable size fillet or vice veisa.
413
Advanced rrlietrng and other Features
3 Enter radius values

The active control points at the ends ofthe edge display onscreen
callouts and are listed in the Attached Radii ,5) selection box.
The radius values can be modified in either place. The callouts are
generally easier to use because they graphically show where the radius
value will be applied.
Assign a value of 30mm to the inner callout and 10mm to the outer
A
callout 15 shown.
Mull:
.
an... 4.
lTl
—->
—ml K,
yr
.
‘
a“: ‘ 2
i mean mum
irorramrmrnn
Variable Size Variable Size control points operate as follows:

Control Points The system defaults to three control points» located at equidistant
increments of25%, 50%, and 75% along the edge between the
venices. You can increase or decrease the number of control points.
Ycu can change the position ofany control point by changing the
percentage assigned to that control point. You can also drag any
control point, and its assigned percentage will update accordingly.
Ifall the default control points have been assigned and you still
need to assign more, select a control point, press cm, and drag the
control point to create another.
Although there is a visual display ofthe control points, they are
only active ifyou select them.
Active control points have a callcut attached to them indicating the
assigned radius and percentage values. inactive control points have
no callout flag.
414
Amanoed Flllellng and Other Features
4 Add a control point.

lflmm
By default, oalleuts only %I
appear at the endpoints of

selected edges. Tu assign a
radius value at an intermediate
point, select one of the visible
control points and add a value
to the CallouL
Select the control point nearest
to the 30mm value and assign
R = 30mm.
5 Click OK ./ .
Variable Size Fillet When using advanced Fillet Profile uptions with :1 Variable Size @
Profile fillet the values defining the profile can be made constant or can vary
along the edge as well. We‘ll modify the variable size fillet to use a
conic radius profile to demonstrate the available options.
6 Edit the Variable Size fillet. inseam“... A

Under Profile, choose Conic Radius. immune —
Use the onllouts on the part in Change the conic a l? “' ”22 E2" ‘32: :
radius in 10mm for each active control point. P’ ”r” ‘5
7
fl laiumn
i
(we aim
V
" W"
Mt
Wrinkle and).
7, hinrnn
in annth tnnaltlnn
;
(mm mm
lmuqmlumltm"
(in: hams
415
Advanced rilletmg and other Features
Click OK o/ .
Straight and Variable Size E fi11ets can transition between values at control points
Smooth in twct ways: straight or smooth.
Transitions This setting is available in the Variable Radius Parameters area of the
PropertyManager when creating this fi11et type.
Straight Transition
Smooth Transition
Zero Radius The Variable Size @ fillet is

Values one of the few features in
SOLIDWORKS which can
accept a value of zero. However,
zero radius fillets may cause
problems in manufacturing, so
they should be used with
discretion.
41s
Amanoed Fillehng and Other Features
Face Fillets A Face Fillet

selected edges as
0 with
s created between selected faces, instead of on
the default fillet Face fillets
type. are generally
used when the edge between two faces is problematic, such as a
degenerative edge (see Eva/timing Edges on page 367), or between two
races that do not share an edge. Face fillets are also the only fillet type
that can be defined with a chord width rather than a radius and the only
fillet type that can make use ofan exi ing edge as a hold line.
Face Fillets m were introduced

in a previous lesson as a good
way to address fillet challenges
on complex geometry (see Face
Fillets on page 368). In this
example, we will fiirther explctre
the unique options available with
this fillet type using an imported
part.
Open the pan

FILM“ Fillet.
Lessun 1 O \ Case Study
folder.
Notice the chamfer on one side
and the imperfections along
the edge on the other side.
Both ofthese will prevent edge
fillets from being applied to
this pan.
417
Les-an 1o souuwoRKs
Amued Filming amt outer Futures
2 Face Flllet.
Click Flllet a.
Click the Face Flllet 0 option.
Click in the Face Set 1 selection list to activate it.
Select the [up face of the model.
Click in the Face Set 2 selection list to activate it.
Select the side race of the part.
Tlp When cursor feedback displays as ”8, you can right—click to move to
the next selection box in the PmpenyManager.
Set the Flllet Parameters to Symmeh‘lc with a radius of 4mm and a
Clrcular profile.
Click OK J .
Note In a situation 1i e this one, where the face fillet is being created
between faces with no common edge, the fillet mdius must be large
enough to reach both races.
3 Create fillet on the other slder
Flip the pan over so you can now see the face that has two small outs.
Create a Face Fillet D with the same settings as step 2 on this side.
Ma
soLIchlRKs Lesson 10
Wanner! Fllletlng and Other Features
Curvature Face Fillets D as well as Constant Size 3is and Variable Size @
Continuous Fillets fillets can make use ofa fillet profile which curvature continuous.
This results in a fillet whose cross section is not circular, or arc.based,
but is instead based on a spline. The curvature continuous profile
matches the curvature ofthe surrounding faces, and the curvature ofthe
fillet is continuously variable. All other fillet profile types are created
tangent to the adjacent faces.
Curvature continuous fillets are often used in consumer product design.
This is because the tangent continuity between the default fillet and the
adjacent faces creates a noticeable “break" or even the illusion of
concavity. The curvature continuous fillet creams a smoother transition
between the fillet and the adjacent faces.
Abru
n
Cimular fillet Curvature ounlinuous fillet
4 Edit Fillet feature.

Edit une ofthe fillet features ofthe part.
Under Profile, choose Curvature Continuous.
Click OK J .
41s
Lesson 10 SOLIDWORKS
Adnnced among and other Features
5 Display Curvature.
Turn on Curvature
I display to compare the two fillets.
Radial or Chord Face Fillets 3 also include the opium lo “Wynn.“ A

Width Definition define a fillet by the chord wtdtht When
using the Chord Width fillet method, the
value specified IS defining the distance V ”“m 3
between the edges of the filleL rather than the 2mm:

fillet radius. The Chord Width option works
like an automatic variable radius fillet where
the radius is determined automatically by
keeping the wtdth ofthe fillet constant.
Curvature continuous and Chord width can be used together, but
other options are limited.
Radius : 5mm Chord wldlh : 5mm
42!)
soLIchlRKs Lesson 10
Wanner! Ftllellng and other Features
Hold Lines Another unique tillet method with Face

Fillets O is the ability to specify Hold
lines. A hold line makes use of an
existing edge to define the fillers
tangent edge or rail. Defining the rail of
the fillet defines the fillets radius since
the fillet will adjust to remain tangent ur
curvature contin clus to the other
adjacent faces lnCe the hold line will
define the radius, you du not need to
enter a radius value. When yuu select a hold line, the Radius field
disappears.
ln the following example, we win design halfof the pictured cover by
using an existing edge as a hold line for a race tillet. Then we‘ll mirror
the body.
1 Open the part l'l'Jiokl Line.

Lesson10\0ase Study folder.
Face Fillet.
click Fillet 0.
Select the Face Fillet 0 type.
Select faces. ran in 2 e
Select Face Set 1 and Face

Set 2 as shuwn at the right.
With the default condition
Tangent propagation
enabled, picking one face
will allow the fillet m mei
cuntinue tn the adjacent
faces.
421
Advanced Fllletlng and other Features
4 Add fillet options

In the Fillet Method list, select Hold line.
Select the three edges as shown in the illustration.
Click OK I to create the fillet.

mun-m A
Hold m V
an“ 1)
dis 2,
am 3)
Bum.
Results.
The fillet is created with a variable radius
defined such that the fillet ends exactly on
the hold lines and is mngent to the lop face.
Optional: Mirror and shelll

Mirror HQ the body.
Shell m the part with a wall thickness of
2.5mm. Remove the two flat faces as
shown.
Save and close the part
422
sounwoRKs Lesson 10
Advanced Filieting and Other Features
FilletXpert The Fillet command includes a FilletXpert

mode that can be used to assist with adding
and changing Constant Size fillets There are
me
Quantum B- 0)
@
~/ It
3 tabs that appear in the PropertyManager l
when
when using the FilletXpert. ann cmet Camel
I Add
Use aptinns here to apply multiple fillets E3
m the pan. FilletXpert will automatically
reorder the sequence ofi‘ne features as K Aflflmm
appropriate to achieve a valid result. was
I Change one».
igi :elerxmmugn ea.
Use options on this tab to resize or remove i7 mam inseam
selected fillel faces. -, Full
and".
man aiunw
I Corner Nu
arm
Use this tab to modify how fillets are
blending at a selected comer.
Where to Find It - Fillet PmpenyManager: FilletXpen
Using FilletXperl We will explore using the FilletXpert Add

Add and Change and Change options to create the fillets
shown in red at the right.
Open the ex ng part “11th139112.

Open the existing pan from the
Lesson10\0ase Study folder.
423
Advanced Fllleung and on." Features
2 FillelXperl.
Click Fillet Q and FilletXpert. Set the radius to 4mm. Select the edge
as shown and the Connected to star! loop i: option. Click Apply.
arm
4 x7.
a)
Mm“
m om! cm
8 Eng“ D
my»
mum,
page e
um.
mum,
me i)
mm.
rm s>
Edgum»
mean;
mu \z>
K
l
w,
Note Using Apply allows the command to remain active so more fillets can
he added. Apply can he messed from the PropertyManager or from
the shortcut menu.
3 Edge selection.
Set the radius to 1mm. Select the edge shown and the Between left
feature and part a
option. Click Apply.
42A
Advanced Flllellng and Omar Features
4 Change.
Click the change tab and Click me filIel at the base oflhe circular boss
as shown. Se! lhe radius value lo 5mm and ellck Resize.
[g Plenum a
V x Is
MM
K :W . ;
may lm
mwm A
m ml,
5 Remove.
Select this 56! of fillets by selecting lhe mdlcaled face with Right Loop
(or Left Loop) and cllck Remove.
W; la la Fun:
6 Resulls. .24.»
(lick DK
s »
J l
, 55
3mm
We.“ n
4
Three fillels features are added to (he pan in One:

l
lhe appropnme sequence. 9 m.
425
Lesion 1o sounwoRKs
Advanced nilecmg and other Futures
Using FilletXpert Corner faces generated by fillets

Corners can be modified to altemztive
blends using the Corner tab of
the FillelXpen.
We will modify the corners szn
example part as shown m the
right.
11p You must select a corner that has three constant radius fillets of mixed
convexity meeting at one vertex.
1 Open the part Huetxlzerticornersl

Open the existing part from the Lessonlmcase Study folder.
FilletXpefl.
Click Fillet @-
Select FilletXpert and the Corner tab.
Select either of the highlighted faces
shown.
3 Altemalives.
Click Show Alternatives and click the
alternative shown.
425
Wanner! Fillellng and Other Features
,W
m
COPY ‘0‘ O
7
The Copy to nption
allows you to apply the
., x
same corneraltemative W cm
'0 other similar comers.
(um-Flu!
Click the fillet corner
that was just changed.
a “W
W—
Click Enable thtlflllmtu)
Highlighting and click
in the Copy Targets
a ma»
similar comers
highlight. Select them
and click Copy to.
—_
EWIZZM
Results.
Click OK o/ .
Save and close the model.
OtherAdvanced The remainder cfthis lesson will introduce some other advanced
Features features that can he used to generate cumplex geometry and modify
parts. These features include:
- Wrap Feature on page 427
- De/ami Feature on page 430
- Move Face Feature on page 439
Wrap Feature The Wrap feature takes a flat sketch and wraps it around a non.planar
surface. The Wrap feature can use a sketch to emboss (add material),
deboss (remctve material) or scribe (split faces). The sketch must be
made up ofclosed contours; open contours are not permitted.
When using the emboss or deboss options, a pull direction can he
specified. This is similar to defining a direction for an extrude feature.
Where to Find It I CommandManager: Features > Wrap
I Menu: Insert Features, Wrap
427
Lesion 1o sounwoRKs
Advanced rilleting and other Features
ln this next case study, we'll use the Wrap feature to design a
cylindrical Cam.
1 New part.
Open a new pan using the PartJ/LM template.
2 Extrude a cylinder.
0n the Top Plane, draw a circle with a
250mm diameter centered an the Origin.
Extrude athin feature 180mm tall with a
wall thickness 25mm to the inside.
3 Define a plane.
Create a reference plane Tangent d to
the cylinder and Perpendicular
the Right. Plane. i tn
4 Draw a sketch to wrap.

on the newly created reference plane, draw a sketch as shown.
Tip Consider using the Fully Define Sketch tool to autumate adding
urdinate dimensions. The dimension to the origin will need to be added
manually.
Alternately, this sketch can be copied fium the provided part
mansketch available in the Llojerecenee rclder.
e §§3§§ §§§§
n
to
I:
u
W I!
Il2—’ m
428
sounwoRKs Lesson 10
Advanced Flllellng and other Features
Equation.
Write an equation that sets the overall length of the sketch equal to pi
times the diameter ofthe cylindert
0
seen I
me; o
to
7
u
It
in
1:
nm
Exit the sketch.
Wrap sketch. "m a,

..
0)
Click Wrap .1 x
If you have not preselected the sketch, the A
system will pmmpt you to select one.

As the Face for Wrap Sketch, select the A
outside, cylindrical face.
The Wrap Type is Deboss B. C

A
The Wrap Method is Analytical E3. “
8 rm
Set the Depth to 12.5mm
(gs )2 sum ;
Click OK w 4mm mam
i—i
_
mm” A
I'
Note The Analytical E? wrap method is used for cylindrical and conical
surfaces while the Spline Surface @ method is used for free form
surfaces.
429
Lesson 10 sounwoRKs
Advanced Fllletlng and other Features
Fillet.
Add 25mm Constant Size fillets to the
corners ofthe cam track.
Change the Profile to be Curvature
Continuous.

Name the part CylindI'icaLCam.
Deform Feature Delorm is a feature which can alter an existing solid or

surface body regardless of the existence of any
parametric data. That is to say that you can deform
native SOLIDWORKS pans as well as imported
geometry.
The Deform feature supports three types of
deformation:
I Point
I Curve to curve
I Surface push
Deform provides a simple way to change virtually any
model, whether organic or mechanical, and is useful when creating
design concepts or making geometric changes to complex models that
would otherwise take too long using traditional sketch, feature, or
history editing.
Where to Find It I Menu: Insert. Features, Delorm a
Point Deformation The Point option allows you to apply a hump to a part at a point, and
allows you to control the diameter of the effected area as well as the
height ofthe hump.
The Deform Distance A! determines how high offthe face ofthe part
the deformation will be.
The Deform Radius 6) determines the size ofthe area to be effected.
The center ofthe radius is the selected sketch point.
The Shape Options determine the crossrscction of the defamation.
I Stiffness - Minimum /\
l Stiffness - Medium /\
I Stiffness - Maximum /'\
430
Amama Fillellng and Other Features
1 Open the part Datum.

This part is a native SOLIDWORKS pan, but it could
have been imported and the same functionality wuuld be
available.
Apply a split line feature.

ne @ to break the curved face of the
model. This split line will be the dividing line between
the finger grip section and the rest ofthe grip.
The sketch should be drawn on the Front Flame of the
n
pm rind curve with the pm. A 3 Point Arc works
well with a radius ofahout 300mm.
Place a 3D sketch point on the modelt

Open a 3D sketch E and insert a Sketch Point I
directly on the face of the model.
This sketch point will be the center of the Point
deformation.
4 Exit the sketch.
4.31
Lesson 10 sounwmzxs
Advanced mean; and other Featmes
5 Delorm Point.
a new 9
Click Deform e. 4 x
For Deform Type, click Point and select the M... m. A

.. pm
point. ,. We tom
For Deform Distance A! enter 3.8mm.
a Swine m
n1 llflmm
;
flxhnwnvmew
Delorm Region. new...” A
For Deform Radius Q enter 63.5mm. Q mm ;

Selem Deform region. This option limim the
m em ream
deformation tejust the face where the poim is “I
located.
0I
Shape Options.
Under Shape Options, click Stiffness -
Medium /\ and Mai n boundary. Meet-em A
The Maintain boundary option keeps the edges iAifliA

ofthe face in their original position. or)
A Mxmum «mm
Click OK ./ .
432
Amanoed Flllellng and Other Features
8 Resulls.
Th' resulting shape would be difficult to duplicate
using standard profile hnsed features.
Curve to Curve The Curve to curve option is a precise method for deforming complex
Defamation shapes that transition from initial curves to target curves. The initial
and target curves can be edges, curve features, or sketch entities.
We will use the Curve to curve deform type to erente the ringer grip for
the pan. The in :1] curve will be the existing edge «the model and the
target Curve will be a spline created in the Finger Grip Sketch.
9 Second deform feature.

Show '0 the Finger Grip sketch and click Deform e.
10 Deform Curves.
a M" (D
For Deform Type, click Curve to curve.
,
.
For the Initial Curves ’9 select the right

model edge.
mm.
W 9
A
;
n Mus me
For the Target Curves 4y select the spline ‘
WWW"
'7‘
in the Finger Grip sketch. mum A
s
am sad l3
l7 summit
4.33
Advanced Fllleung and on." Feannes
I:
11 Deform Region.
”mm“ A
For (he Fixed Curves/Edgeleaces Q! , 7mm.)
seiect the face as shown. FWD“
“5
mmmmnwm mummsece Mm
'
[—
affected by this feature. aI
Note Initial curves cannot Iouch fixed entities.
lhhe preview does not mawh the Target
.
Curve closely enough, move the Shape 7Im
Accuracy 0 slider (o the righL '
A,
fixed Face
wmmmm."
.'- m.
Sumn nngmx
we (W
Click OK ¢ .
12 Resulls.
This is another example ofa shape mm may be diffieuh
lo model direcfly using tradixionzl techniques.
sounquKs Lesson in
Advanced Flliellng and Other Features
Surface Push The Surface push option modifies Tool eddy

Defamation surfaces of target bodies by pushing
tool bodies into them. You can select
a customizable prerbuilt tool body
from within the deform feature or
create your own.
The surface push deform
approximates the surfaces ofthe tool bodies, while maintaining the
identities of the surfaces of the mrget bodies (the number of faces,
edges, and vertices remains unchanged in the final target body).
Surface push deform provides more efficient control ofthe deform
shape as compared to point deform It is also a predictable way to
creme specific features based on tool body shapes.
Use surface push deform to design freeri'orm surfaces, tooling, plastics,
soft packaging, sheet metal, and other applications where it is useful to
incorporate the characteristics oftool bodies into existing designs.
Joining Surfaces In the next step we will create our own too] body. We want to do this by
extruding a sketch using the Offset From Surface end condition.
However. the sketch spans two faces, and the command only allows us
to select one face. We need a way to combine two faces into a single
surface body. This means utilizing surface and solid modeling
techniques together which is fairly common in advanced modeling.
Knit Surface Knil Surface takes faces that touch edge to edge and combines them
Feature into a single surface body.
Knit Surface is introduced here to demonstrate one of the advantages
of surface functions This feature and additional surfacing techniques
are dealt with extensively in the Surfizce Mode/mg course.
Where to Find It I ColnmandManager: Surfaces > Knil Surface 3]
I Menu: Insert Surface, Knit
435
Advanced rmenng and other Features
13 Knit faces together. m MW

Click Knit Surface [1]. e x
Select the two faces as shown and

click OK ~/ .
The system knits copies ofthe two a
faces together, creating a Single Men. ma
surface body. em.“
A Surface Bodies folder is added to
the FeatureManager design tree.
Note The visibility of folders in the FeatureManager design tree is controlled

by Hide/Show Tree Items in Tools, Options.
14 Create tool body.
aura"... a)
Extrude fl the sketch named Thumb Rest
using the end condition Offset From Surface.
e x -
:—
Use the Surface-Knitl hody as the surface to
offset from. mm, a
og
,I
The Offset Distance is 2.5mm.
Examine the preview and click
it‘ necessary,
Reverse offset to create the feature as shown. . 12 mm
Clear the Merge result option and click OK J .
W Emu: em
1' made an.“
if Merv! rem
15 Hide the surface body.

Select Surfaoe»Knit1 and click Hide 'V.
436
sounwclRKs Lesson 10
Advanced Flllellng and Diner Features
16 Surface push deform.

a Mm; a)
Click Deform e. v )t
For Deform Type, click Surface push. WW

porn.
"
For Push Direction, select the Front Plane. “Warm
.. min or.»
For Ad anal Faces to be Deformed 8, mom A
l;
select the two front faces ofthe grip. E rum-vim
_I:
For Bodies to be Deformed
.
solid body.
., select the main
a...“
a mammal“;
.
film]
9,
'
—
For the Tool Body choose Select Body and
pick the body made from the Thumb Rest ”W
sketch-
Set the Deform Deviation Q to 1.25mm. The
smaller the value the more closely the O. 3
deformation conforms to the tool body. The larger

the value, the more subtle the efi‘ect ofthe tool
”in..."
he
mom
c
A
body is.
The tool body was built

in the correct position so
we do not need to use the
triad or the Tool Body
Position options in the
PropertyManager.
Click OK v.
17 Hide the tool body.

Rightrclick on the tool body either in the graphics window, in the Solid
Bodies folder, or on the feature that created it, and click Hide 'V.
4.37
Lesson 10 souuwoRKs
Amine Filleting amt outer Fun-rs
18 Results.
I’
why Select Faces In step 16 we selected the solid body to deform
I—am¥
W
and the Solid Body? and we selected the two front faces. What is the my»
purpose of selecting both the body and faces? “W
The reason is to limit the defamation to just the
those faces of the body. If no faces are seiected,
.a
the enn‘re body is affected.
The illustration below shows the results of the
feature with and without face selections.
With additional isms selected Wiiixmi additional laces selected

sounwoRKs Lesson in
Amtanced Fiiteiing and other Features
Direct Editing Deform 9,Move Face I? , and Delete Face 8 are features very
useful for direct editing techniques. Direct editing refers to
modifications made directly to the faces that exist, rather than
modifying the model by changing model parameters. Direct editing is
common in SOLIDWORKSwhen working with imported geometry
which does not include feature information for making changes. In the
next example, we'll use Move Face and Delete Face to make changes
to an imported solid part,
Move Face Feature Move Face IE will move a face on a solid or surface body and extend
or trim adjacent faces to match. The Move Face feature can operate on
geometry in three different ways:
I Offset faces, moving them in a direction lrormal to the face.
I Translate faces, moving them in a selected direction or utilizing an
available end condition.
. Rotate faces, rotating about a given linear axis.
Where to Find It I Menu: Insert, Face, Move 3
- Shortcut Menu: Rightrclick a face, click Move fi
Note For more information on the Delete Face feature, see Deleting Faces
on page aoo.
1 Import a Parasolid file.

Open the Parasolid file named Movejaeext
Use millimeters for the units.
Increase the length of the large

cylinder.
Select the fillet and end faces ofthe
large cylinder.
Click Move Face 3.
439
Lesson 10 scLIDwoRKs
Advanced Huang and other Features
Click Translate and set :3 mm. a)

the Blind Distance to ., x
5mm.
“mm A
Select the Top Plane for 32:“

the Direction , m,“
Reference )' . $ 2:;
Click Reverse
Direction 2} to make
Jun
the cylinder longer.
Click OK «i z ruin."
(a mum :
3 Remove the fillets.

Click Delete Face 3 and select the three fillet
faces.
W
4 Delete and patch.
The default setting for Delete Face IS Delete and
_ >
a miner“. v
.1 x
Patch, which extends neighboring faces to patch 2'“.
the hole lefi hy the missing face.
a Famed)
qu)
"“"’
Click DK «.
one.“ A
0 nine
9 ninie m pm
0 min. .n. n,
In new“,
Preview Resuiis
Mn
Advanced Frneung and Other Features
5 Increase the diameter of the large

cylinder.
Using Move Face ® and the Offset
option, increase the diameter enhe large
cylindrical face by 10mm.
6 Chamier.
Apply new 3mm x 45" chamfers to
replace the three mlets removed in step 4.
M1
Vanahle Radius Finer
Exercise 39: In this part, create a variable radius fillet

Variable Radius to m as specified.
Fillet This exercise reinforces the following
5 s:
- Variable Size Fri/em on page 4 I 3

Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open parti
Open the existing part Faucetjover
from the LessonlmExereises folder.
Full round fillet.

Apply a Full Round
narrow end ot‘the part.
8 fillet m the
Tip When cursor feedback displays as D@,

you can rithtliCk to move t0 the next
selection bux in the PropertyManager.
Variable radius fillet.

Apply 2 Variable Size @ tillet with a Curvature Continuous Profile
as shown.
mi. "at:
”an
“2
Varlahle Radius Flllel
4 Link radius values.

Use global variables in link symmetric radius values.
Inn,
(0)
2x7 55
(0)
Ms
(D) *-
'
n5
('5)
new.
(D4)
5 Optional: Alternate t'lllet.

Create a new configuration with an alternative fillet.
Create a similar variable size fillet with a Conic Radius profile. Set the
conic mdius to 3mm at each active control point.
mm 4.
(m mu _
mm. mm.“ m. }
(MUM-4i m x
. ,
“#3121“ :2:
, nm
Create a global variable to link the conic radius dimensions.

6 Compare the results.
Use Curvature
configurations.
I
and Zebra Stripes to compare the 2

0
Exercise Mi sounwoRKs
rue Fillets
Exercise 40: In this exercise, apply face fillets as

Face Fillets described.
following skills:
- Face Fillets on page 368 and
page 417
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Import file.
Import the Parasolid file named
Gasketj‘ramexj from the
LessonlmE‘arercises folder.
Use millimeters for the units.
000
Apply first face filletl
The loop around the inside ofthe
purt has several features in it that
will cause edge fillets to fail.
Apply a Face Fillet D with a

2.75mm radius.
Apply outside loop fillet.

The outside loop ofthis part has an
existing ehumfer on it.
Apply a face fillet with u radius of
1.5mm over the chamfer.
soLIDwoRKs Eumize M
Home Fillets
Exercise 41: In this exercise, you'll be adding fillets to the

Bottle Fillels bottle created in a previous lesson.
- Face Fillets on page 368 and page 417
- Splming 11 Face on page 236
I Curvalure Conlirmous Fillets on page 419
I Hold Lines on page 421
Uniis: Inches
Procedure
Open part1
Open the existing pan named Bottlej‘illetis from the Lesson10\
Exercises folder.
Rollback the part
Position the rollback bar before Shell 1.
This is the appmpiiate posi on in the feature
history to add the first fillets since they should
be included in the shell.
Add a face fllletl
Create a Face Fillet a between the side and
hettem faces of the bottle with a mdius of
01375111.
Exercise M soLIDwoRKs
Brittle Fillets
Evaluate resuls.
Analyze the resulting fillet using
Curvature I. The dramatic change in color
at the fillet edge indicates a mngancy
relationship between the faces.
Edit the fillet.
Change the fillet profile to be Curvature
Continous.
This produces a much smoother blend
between the faces, but the feature could still
use improvement.
Analyze fillet rail.

Tum ot‘fthe Curvature
I
display and display the model as
Shaded With Edges ..
Change to a Front View fl.
Due to the complex face ofthe Bettie, the Met edge does not run
straight across, which might be more pleasing esthetically.
To achieve the desired mils for the fillet, we can use 11
Split Line @ to
create edges that can be used for Hold Lines.
Delete Fillet1.
Delete X the face fillet.
First Split Line.
Sketch a line as shown on the Front Plane.
F
.m
us
Create 2 Split Line
bottle.
j
8 by projecting the sketch onto the face of the
soLIDwoRKs Exemize M
auntie Fillets
9 Second Split Linel

Create a second 5pm Line E 0n the bottom face ofthe bottle using
the sketch shown.
10 Face Fillet.
Recreate the Face Fillet 0
using the options fur Hold Lines and
Curvature Continuous.
11 Evaluate the resuls.
Use Curvature
I
evaluate the resu
display to
g fillet.
12
Tum offcurvature
Finishing touches.
I display.
Add a 0.090in Constant Size 9

fillet with a
Dl030in Conic Radius profile to edges of the
swept label feature.
Roll to the end 0f the Feanirelvlanager design
tree.
Add a fillet ofthe same size to the inside and
outside edges where the neck meets the body
of the bottle.
Note The last fillet rnusthe added alter the Shell
feature. This is because a multi~thickness shell
requires a sharp edge between the faces
specified far different thicknesses.
447
Exemile 42 SOLIDWORKS
Watering can
Exercise 42: Finish ihe Watering Can model using the steps provided. This model
Watering Can will make use of multiple ieehniques immdueed throughout this course
including advanced filleting.

Dome Feature on page 178
Spliulrig a Face on page 236
Fillel Method on page 403
Curvalure Conlinuaas Fillets on page 419
Variable Size Filletx on page 413
Sweeping on page 156
Delele Face Feature on page 366
Units: Inches
Procedure
1 Open part
Open the existing pan Wammcm
from the Lessonl 0\ Exercises
folder.
2 Dome feature.
Click Dome S .
Select the lap face ofthe
Wateringng and speeiry a dislanee
of0i500". Click OK J .
Wmeling Can
3 Split Llne.
Before shelling the WateringJIan, we’ll add fillets and 3150 cream the
face that will be removed from the top of the model. We'll create the
face at the top of the Wammcw using :1 Split Llne.
Sketch the profile as shown.
m
Use the profile fur a
Split Line 8 curve feature.
4 Add an asymmeme fillet.

The fillet at the bottum of the can feature will be Constant Size, but
Asymmetric.
Click Fillet @-
Click Constant Size

of the can.
9 far the fillet type and select the battom edge
Select Asymmetric for the fillet method.
Direction 1 = 0.50"
Direction 2 = 025"
Click OK sl .
mm L .
Mt, _
M9
Walenng Can
Add a curvature continuous fillet.

The fillet at the top ofthe Can will be curvature continuous to provide
the smoothest transition between the side face and the Dome.
Click Fillet 8.
Click Constant Size 8 for the fillet
type and select the edge as shown.
Select Symmetri for the fillet method
and use a radius oi 0.500"
For the Profile, use Curvature Continuous.
Click 0K « .
Add a Variable Size fillet.

The fillet between the Spout and the Can will be :1 Variable Size fillet.
Click Fillet 3.
Click Variable Size a! for the fillet
type and select the edge as shown.
Select Symmetric for the fillet
method and Circular for the profile.
Use a radius of 0.375" at the bottom
control point, and 0.625" at the top
control point.
Varilhlerudlu)
Click OK ./ .
Shell the part.

Create a Shell El“ feature with 2 wall thickness of0.075". Remove the
faces at the Spout Tip and the face created from the Split Line.
Roll forward.
Move the Rollback bar to the end of the FeatureManztger Design tree to
include the Handle Sketch in the part.
Create profile plane.
The Handle feature will be a
sweep feature.
Create a Plane
'
for the
sweep pmtile that is
Perpendicular J_ to the style
spline and Coincident A to its
end point.
450
soLIDwoRKs Eugene 42
Waning Can
10 Sketch profile.
Open a sketeh on the new plane and
create a Ellipse O for the sweep profile
as shown.
Exit tlle sketch.
11 Sweep Handle.
Create a Sweep .r feature using the ellipse as the profile and the style
spline as the path.
Rename the feature Handle.
12 Section Vlew.
Click Section Vlew a.
Section the part using the Right Plane
‘.
Click OK u.
451
Watering Can
13 Evaluate feature.
The ends ot‘the Handle feature require some cleanup. At both ends the
feature does not fully contact the Can. At one end. the Handle IS
protruding inside the Can.
There are many ways to address these issues including modifying the
definition of the feature, using additional hoss and cut features, using
the Intersect tool, and/or using the Delete Face command. For this
example, we'll use the Delete Face command to remove unwanted
faces and patch the remaining areas ofthe pan.
14 Delete Face.
Select the 2 faces inside the Can and choose the
Delete and Patch option.
Click OK J .
The faces are removed and the surrounding edges

are extended to patch the opening.
452
Wmeling Can
15 Delete and Patch ends offlandlet

Use the Delete Face 8 with Delete and Patch to remove the faces at
the ends of the Handle and extend the edges to the Can.
Note All faces could have been deleted within the same uperation.
16 Exit Section View.
Tuggle offthe Section Wew a.
17 Handle fillets
Create Constant Size E fillets at each end of the Handle which are
Symmetric, R = 0‘375"and Curvature Continuous.

Delete rzee
Exercise 43: [n this exercise you Will apply the

Delete Face various optlons available with the
Delete Face feature to fix
Bump |d remove
imponed geometry.
This exercise reinforces the “"3“ ‘9 ”WW9
following skllls:
59'" '3” ‘0 remove
I Dclz’le Face Feature on
page 3 66
I Delete Face: Delele and F1]!
on page 408
Units: inches
Procedure
Open Part.
Open the part Deletej‘aee-lmported from the Lesson10\ Exercises
folder.
Delete and patch.
Click Insert, Face, Delete 8.
Select the split face and the two faces that make up the artifact.
Use the Delete and Patch option.
The Delete and Patch option completely removes the edges around
the faces, and restores the underlying, untrimmed base surface.
454
ff
sounwoRKs Exercise A3
Delele Face
3 Remove the bump.

Use the Delete and Fill and the Tangent fill options.
((
4 Analyze results.
The Delete and Fill option automatically creates a Filled Surface
feature to patch the hotel At first glance the results look pretty guod.
Note The Filled Surface feature lS covered in depth in the Surjizce Mode/mg
course.
Click Evaluate > Curvature
IThe curvature discontinuity around
the edge ofthe patch is clearly visible.
Edit the DelebeFacez feature and select the Delete and Patch option.
Notice the improvement.
Delete and Fill Delete and Patch
455
orient sailing
Exercise 44: Use Move Face to edit an

Direct Editing imported pan.
following skills:
- Move Face Feature on
page 439
Units: millimeters
Procedure
Open part.
Open the existing part
Forgengracket from the
Lesson10\Exercises folder.
This part contains a single
imported feature.
The first change will be to modify
the size of the plate.
Select faces to novel
Click Move Face 8.
Select the front face ofthe part
along with the fillet faces «common!
adjacent to it.
Tip The selection toolbar can be used
to assist with making selections.
2
Translate faces.
Translate the front
faces 10mm using
the Front Plane for
the Direction
reference.
Move the holes

The next required change is to reposition and resize the holes.
Click Move Face 3.

mm Editing
Select the faces of the
four holes and move
them 5mm, using the
Front Plane for the
Dlrection reference.
TIP Afier you select the first
hole click All co-
direcllonal full
cylindricallconioal m
on the selection toolbar
to select the other three
holes.
change the hole size

Use the Move Face 3
command to Offset the hole
raees 2.5mm, making them
smaller.
Extend the bottom face of the

bar.
Use the Move Face 3
command to Translate the
bottom face of the bar.
Use an End Condition of Up to
Surface. Select the bottom face
of the plate as the 1o Entlty
reference.
Reduce the size of the bar.
Use the Move Face 3 ‘55
command to reduce the size of
the bar.
Offset the bar faces 2.5mm.
457
om
u
Exerciu
Editing
SOLIDWORKS

Index
Numerics corvanne 121 E

313cu1-ves 191: defil Ian 112 ennnes
See nlm cuwcs alsplay 121 conven 771553513113
3Dskelcnes IR‘LWSJDILZIS equal 1111 spln 353
acnvase a plane 211 splme 112 eqnelcurvamre 1111
creale a plane 213 corvanne combs 1127114, 112120 equallan dllvcll curve 99
smce handle 190 cummre conunnous 011e1 419
curvedcgree 1211 F
A curvefealum: 11111 face 444
andcorvaauleoonuol 115 curves race blends 3511.417
addmngencyconnol 115 composne 1101,2130 face curves In
analysls {mm a file 350 face lillex 3511, 417, 444, 447
cnevanne 121 llcllx 1101,1115 faces
devlanon 357 m skexclles 91pm) delenng 355, 4011, 454
uh“: slnpes 122 lnlzrscdmn curve 253 mnvlng 455
a mmelnc projcclad 11111, 194200219 selecnng 409
spnal 11111, 315305 splnnng 312,431
splllllne 11111, 235,312,431,445 l'eanueseope 15,3112
a |hrongll xvz locanons 11111, 350 FeanueMenege. design nee
hackgmlmd .mages 250 solld bodleslolde. 13, 111
D fealums
boundary 325, 379, 383, 3115, 3911
blendmg between lwo homes 3113 decal 150 boundary 325, 3717, 3113, 355, 3911
conneclors 3x3 defnnlucmplxlcs 52 compalmg 315
prevlew opnons 337 demrm 431) deform 430
surface 3211 curve to curve defolmauan 433 slelele face 355, 4011, 454
po1nme1onnanon 430 dame 1711
c surface push delnnnanon 435
lool body 437
race 511m 359
calenlanng volume 33. 145 nellx 195
combine 25 delele race 355,403,454 1nden1 34
common 27 delele/keep body 30 llhnry 233235
comblmng homes 25 delcllng badlcs 35 lon 377, 39173172
common bodies 27 derived skelcl. 131,315,398 move race 455
See on.) copy skexcln move/copy bodies 21
comparmg complex reanues 315
composne curve 200 deslgnllbnry 231 save hndlcs 574511
111e1ocanons 231 shell 371
come 39, 31153117
cnnnecmrs 3411 demled prevlcw 15 spln llne 235
cnmml psnms 414 devlanonanalysls 357 snppless 225227
cmllmlpalygan loo dlrccled lug 43o sweep 1577155, 23111254, 2115. 3‘13
conven ennnes 77, 155, 353. 393 .11splay mead 222.225. 243
cnnvcnmsplme 127 cmvanne 121
wmp 427
convemossylespllne 127 ubmsmpes 122 me :xplmer 233
mssolve lllnary lean-res 235 file :xlensmm
copy skclch 329,331,332
See nlm denved skexcn dame 1711 SLDCRV 350
comm TXT 350
llllelxpen 425
4.59
Index SOLIDWORKS
file loeannm I M
deslgn llbmry 231 mdenl 34 merge resall 211.4041, 56
filler mneenon palms 112 merge smonlh laces 134
asymmelne 410, 440 men mergelangennaces 11:4, 322
00111101 poms 414 compaslm curve 200 mlnlmum radnrs 112
cnrvanne eonnnnons 417 curve dlmugh xyz pmnls 350 mlrmr
laee fillel 351L369, 417.444, 447 denved skereh 335 skerelr 335
1 e1 method 403 hcllx 195 modlly skelch 333, 335
nllerxnen 423 pan mlo an enslmg pan 12719 move raee 456
holdlme 4214422447 skereh prelnre 100 ofiael 441
keep reannes 409.411 solrd body mlo new pan 63 rranslale 43a
mnlnple mdlus 405 aplrne 104 move/copy body 21
opnons 402 409 aplnlme 236 mulllbody pans 2 374,1
paramelera 402403 men eomrol venex 127 comblmng badlcs 25
profiles 4043415, 447 men mlo new pan 63 ereanng wnlr ems 34
round comers 411 men spllne porm 116 fearnresoope 15
selecl Illmngh faces 409 lmerseer31.145.140 loealoperanons 15
scllmgs 402 lmerseenoneuwe 09, 26‘) merge lcsuk 211340—41, 56
smondnmnmlans 415 merglllg 41
slrnlghnransluans 416 K uslng lnfi 329
Lranslllons 416 keep reamres 409, 411 pauerm 17
vanalale rad s 413.442 keep normal conaram 2677269, 271 savmg as assnmbhes 60
zero radms values 416 aavmg laodrea as pans on
filletmeLhad 4034214224 447 L Ion] body 111
aaymmelne 410, 440 lrbrary lean-res 222, 231L235 mulnple radms fillel 405
filler opnons 402,409 drsselve 235
fillelparnmclels 402403 llghls 250 0
fillel profile 404,415,447 local edn 12x on plane 211
nllersemnga 402 loealoperauons 15 opnons 62
nllerxpen 423 lofi 377,301,392 onenlanon and rwrsr mmml 272
comers 426 blendlllg berween rwo bodnes 327 lollow poll. 26?
n plrne 011301342112 cemedme 360 keep normal eonslam 2677268. 271
opnons 132 cenledmcs 358
folders elosedloep 34o p
solrdbodles 13,113 conneclms 3413, 352 parem/elnld relalro <hlps 227
follnw parlr 267, 26‘) drall 324 pans
gulde curves 377 msenmg 113710
G perfmlllsnce eonsrderanons 2264227
merge Langenl raoes 322
geomelne relanona merging a mulllbody 320 prelnrea
almg y 191
pmparlng me profile; 320 as backgrounds m pans or
alongz 101
prevrew oplrons 361 assemhlles 260
mnsrderanons m lollmg 2x2 reorder profile: 321 maskereh 100
mnsrderalrons m prnnles 2713 mleslorprolllea 320 Iraclng 1011
on plane 194.211 aran and end eonanalma 323 preree 1624611074“
preree 16271633077302 llngency 323 plane
gulde curves aenvale 211
lofl 377 ereale wthlll a 313 skelelr 213
sweep 160 prev1ew.derarled 15
pmfile onemalmn 266
H follow paln 267
Mllx 1118, 195 keep normal eonsranl 269
Mid lnre 421422, 447 prmeer curve 107400219
propagare along rangenl edges 23x
propenr ,kmule 227
proponronalsplme 115
450
soLIDWORKs Index
R splrrre handles 1077110

relererrce geomerry splrrerrrrues 353
ournposrre curve 200 spllllme |8R,236,312,43!,446
curve llrrouglr xvz pnlnls 351) splrrlrrrg luccs 312.431
hellx 193 sun and end consrrarnrs 323
pmjcclcurvcs 199 slap/end langcrrcy 255
relauonslups, parerrr/clrrld 227 sloclc lealure 53
relaxsplrne 115 slyle splrne 9x, 124, 134, 171
round comels 411 add comml pornls 173
corrven lo so rue 127
5 curve degree 1211
save bodles 574x rnsen conlrol venex 127
scalerool lWlDlJlfi localedrr 12x
selecrllrrouglr laces 4119 suppress
seleclrng uems reamres 22rk227
propagale along langcrrr adges 2311 swcep 393
SelemonManager 157, 2x5, 329, 377 alrgn wulr errd laces 285
snarrng skerclres 3m along model edges 23x
shellrrrg a parr 371 componems 157
srrnplrry splrrre 117 corrrrollrng rwrsr 27272134
skerclr race qualuy 1114
31) IX‘LIOSJOALZIS fallaw parlr 267,269
blocks 339, 350,353 gurde curves mo, 1m
conven er rres 77,155,361393 keep normal conuarrr 2577259, 271
copyrng 329, 3317332 merge smoorlr races 1m
Sac also derrved merge rangenl faces 1m
derrved 331. 335, 3913 nplrons 2M
Sac aim copy orrerrralrou and rwrsr comrol 272
madlfy 333, 335 pallr 157,151
shanng 160 pmfile 137
skelclrprclurc loo profile orremalrorr 266
splnemrues 353 propagare along rangenl edges 23x
skerclr blacks 353 secnon 157,152
slrow rrrrerrrredrale secrrons I65, 266
skelclr prclure loo
solrd pmfile 2x11
scalerool [00401, 136
solrd bodres lolder 13, 111 sran/end rangerrey 255
solrd profile 21311 rwrsr 291
syrnrrrerrrcalsplrnes 173
space handle 190
sprral 11311, 31157305
T
splure 911,104. 134,397
add curvanrre corruol 115 remplales
add rangency conrrol I6 1 defaulrlernplares s2
ccnrrol polygon 11w unread 222, 225, 243
llrread prorrle 223
oonvcnm slyle splrrre 127
curvamre 112 TIFF rrnages as backgrounds 2w
curvarure combs 1127113. 11971211 lool body 18
1' splrrre 99, 130, 134, 202 dcfarm s37
rnfleclrorr porrrls 112 lools, oplrorrs o2
men splrne porrrl 115 Lnlnmg files 3
rnanrpulalrrrg m4 Lnllslllolls
rnurrrnurn radrus 112 srrarglrlarrdsmooln 415
pararrrelers 115 lwlsl
propomonal 115 corrrrollrng rrr sweeps 272
relax 115 lwrslrng along a sweep pallr 291
srrnplrlysplrrre 117
V
splrrre handles 1077110
slyle splrne ax. 124,134. 171 varralrle mdlns fillet 413, 442
syrnrnerrv 173 varrauonal sweep, See sweep, gurde
rools 112.116 curves
rwo porm 1113
w-z
wrap 427
rehrasrrrpes 122
zero rudrus l'rllel 415
461
spl. 911. 104, 114.197 T
addcurvammconrml 115 Aemplms
addmngencycmlml 11s dcfaulncmplalcs 52
wmralpolygan m 111mm 222, 225.243
Ihrezd profile 223
mnvenmszyksplme 127
curvxmre 112 TIFF Images as backgmunds 250
curvxmre combs 1127114, 112120 (mlbody IE
msplme 99, 110, 134, 202 dermm 437
Inflecuon pemLs 112 1oa1s,op1mns 52
msen spline poll“ “6 mmmg files 1
mampulmlng IN mnsnmns
mmlmumlxdms 112 slmlglnlndsmomh m
paramflels 11s rwm
pmpomaml 115 cammllmg u. sweeps 272
relax 115 lwmmg along a sweep [3th 291
simplify splme 117
V
snlln: handles 1077110
51er spllne as, ”4.134, 171 variable radius mm 411, 442
symmetry 17: vanananxl sweep, See sweep, gulde
mals 112.116 curves
two pom! [IX
w-z
wmp s27
7ebmsmpes 122
me mam “11:1 415
461
Index soLIDwoRKs

05-Solidworks Advanced Part Modeling 2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

05-Solidworks Advanced Part Modeling 2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

p75 SHSTEMES

FIDVHNCED PFIRT MODELING

Advanced Part Modeling

Dassault Systémes SolidWorks Corporauon

Course Design Philosophy . . .

Using this Book

Conventions Used in xhis Book .

Graphics and Graphics Cards .

Solid Bodies Folder

Saving Solid Bodies

Exercise 22: Dceil Flashlight Spring . 216

Case Snidy: Loﬁed Merge . t t

Overﬂow Options . . 1 412

.I Mechanical design experience.

Training A set nflmining templates are used throughout the course to

Use of Color The SOLIDWORKS soﬁwnre

provide you with visual

As a result, because the color settings on your cumputer may be

More MySoldeorks.eum enables you to be more productive by connecting

Upon successful completion ohhis lesson. you will be able to:

1 Click Options {5) , System Options, FeatureManager.

Same mher multibudy design techniques are summarized in the table

Open an existing part.

Contour , select a sketch q)

Region , select an area

Select the feature sketch.

hide, or Show bodies within ihe model. By

9 Explore the Solid Bodies folder.

The second Boss-Extrude feature causes the

Bodies E folder to view the solid bodies of

10 Create a third solid body.

13 Turn of! Detailed Preview.

Local Creating separate solid bodies within a model allows modiﬁcations to

working with a multibody part, the Feature 3:33;:ka

14 Set the feature scope.

to Pattern ﬁeld is used to identify which body

or bodies will be patterned.

Keep Merge solids cleared. Click OK «.

Boss»EXtmde4 merges all touching bodies

I Cli k in the graphics area.

Where to Find It I Menu: Insert, Par! 5!

Locate Part and The Locate Part PropertyManager is nearly

respect to the X, Y, and Z axes, or a

Use the button at the bottom ot‘the PropertyMaiiager to switch between

27 Male lhe body.

Click Add to apply the Coincident A mate.

This cumpletes pus ning the lug. Click OK «.

30 Examine the feature.

Entities transferred with T! ‘MWW ‘W’"C""E"“‘="

31 Explore the solid bod'es.

Combining The Combine command is used to combine the volumes ofmultiple

Subtract: Selected bodies are merged into a single solid by

Tip The Solid Bodies Selection Filter

33 Combine the solid bodies.

34 Dplional: Add ﬁ sh features.

35 Save and close the part.

Case Study: ()t‘the three ways to combine solid

Open the existing part Protective

Revolved thin feature.

Se1eet the rib as the feature to patiem and use

Note Rib features automatically extend up

8 Optional: Mirror feature.

Because of the way rib features are calculated , up to next in all

10 Combine the solid bodies.